Hamilton Medical-raphael Manual De Servicio 6y524w

ed by: Maria Alejandra
0
0

January 2022
PDF

This document was ed by and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this report form. Report 3i3n4

Overview 26281t

& View Hamilton Medical-raphael Manual De Servicio as PDF for free.

More details 6y5l6z

Words: 154,010
Pages: 682

Intelligent Ventilation

RAPHAEL Service Manual PN 610671/05 Software versions 1, 2 & 3 June, 2006

© 2006 HAMILTON MEDICAL AG. All rights reserved. Printed in Switzerland. No part of this publication may be reproduced or stored in a database or retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, or by photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of HAMILTON MEDICAL AG. This document may be revised or replaced by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG at any time and without notice. You should ensure that you have the most current applicable version of this document; if in doubt, the technical department of HAMILTON MEDICAL AG, Switzerland. While the information set forth is believed to be accurate, it is not a substitute for the excercise of professional judgement. Nothing in this document shall limit or restrict in any way HAMILTON MEDICAL AG’s right to revise or otherwise change or modify the equipment (including its software) described herein, without notice. In the absence of an express, written agreement to the contrary, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG has no obligation to furnish any such revisions, changes, or modifications to the owner or of the equipment (including software) described herein. The equipment must be operated, serviced or upgraded only by trained professionals. HAMILTON MEDICAL’s sole responsibility with respect to the equipment and its use is as stated in the limited warranty provided in the operator’s manual. Product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. HAMILTON MEDICAL AG will make available on request, circuit diagrams, component parts lists, descriptions, calibration instructions, or other information that will assist the ’s appropriately trained personnel to repair those parts of the equipment designated by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG to be repairable.

Manufacturer HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Via Crusch 8 CH-7402 Bonaduz Switzerland Phone: (+41) 81 660 60 10 Fax: (+41) 81 660 60 20 Public Web Site: www.hamilton-medical.com E-mail: [email protected]

Representative in USA HAMILTON MEDICAL Inc. 4990 Energy Way Reno, NV 89502 PO Box 30008 Reno, NV 89520 Phone: (775) 858-3200 Toll-free: (800) HAM-MED 1 Or: (800) 426-6331 Fax: (775) 856-5621 E-mail: [email protected]

Contents Contents Conventions Notes, Cautions and Warnings Typographic conventions Expressions

Foreword Who is this service manual for? What does this service manual contain? What does this service manual not contain? What equipment does the service manual cover? What other tools and resources do I need to test and maintain RAPHAEL? Where can I get the latest news, information, software updates, and so on?

Part 1: General description Section 1 Introduction to RAPHAEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.1 What is RAPHAEL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.2 What does RAPHAEL do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.3 How does RAPHAEL function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.4 What components manage the principle gas flow? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.5 What other components does RAPHAEL have? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1.6 Flow control and pressure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Section 2 Construction of RAPHAEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.2 RAPHAEL design highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Pneumatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.3 Main component groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Components mounted on the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Pneumatic block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Components mounted on the pneumatic block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Components mounted on the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Contents-1

Contents

Section 3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Blockdiagram Raphael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Structure of following sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 Overview of principle gas route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.3 Components managing gas flow to the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Component functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.4 Components managing major gas flows from the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Component functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

3.5 Components managing gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway . 3-13 Component functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.6 Components managing minor gas flows from the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Component functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Section 4 Details of gas flow components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.2 Oxygen and air water traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further information and specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1 4-1 4-1 4-3

4.3 Solenoid valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further information and specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4 4-5 4-5 4-5

4.4 Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further information and specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6 4-6 4-7 4-8

4.5 Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Description and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Further information and specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.6 Inspiratory valve and ambient valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further information and specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-11 4-11 4-11 4-13

4.7 Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further information and specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16

4.8 Expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Contents-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Contents

Description and function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Further information and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Section 5 Electronic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.2 Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Mainboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Display Control Unit (DCU) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Communication interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 dc/ac board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Power supply board and backup batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5.3 Oxygen cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Description and function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Further information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5.4 Pressure sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Description and function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

5.5 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Description and function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Further information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Section 6 The optional communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.2 RS232 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending data to a patient monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending data to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 pin locations and assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3

6.3 Special port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending inspiratory:expiratory (I:E) timing signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending a remote nurse alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special port pin locations and assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical specifications of Special port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-7

Part 2: Preventative maintenance and testing Section 7 Overview of preventive maintenance and testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.2 Check your software level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.3 Check you have all the items you require . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.4 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Section 8 Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1 Hospital preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Contents-3

Contents

8.2 Engineer preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Dealing with water traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Internal cable and tubing checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 External checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Section 9 Backup battery and voltage tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.2 Backup battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Checking the age of the backup batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.3 Mainboard voltages test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Troubleshooting mainboard voltages test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9.4 12 V batteries condition test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9.5 Connector condition test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Section 10 Manual electrical safety tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Section 11 Running version 1.x test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.2 Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.3 Functions of the test software test units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.4 Sequence of test software units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11.5 Entering test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11.6 How to use the test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Alarms during test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Exiting test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Test 1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Checking and setting the scaling Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Checking and setting the configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Checking and adjusting the altitude setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Checking and setting the number of operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Test 2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Testing the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Checking and adjusting display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

Contents-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Contents

Test 3 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the nebulizer, trigger, and alarm LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the alarm tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the display and front keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the P&T-knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-17 11-17 11-18 11-18 11-19 11-19 11-20 11-20 11-21 11-22 11-23 11-23

Test 4 Alarm monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for error signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the power down status flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the alarm LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the alarm silence function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the expiratory valve unpowered position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the front LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing backup battery operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking again for error signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-24 11-24 11-25 11-25 11-26 11-26 11-27 11-27 11-28 11-28 11-29 11-29 11-30 11-30 11-31 11-31 11-32 11-32 11-33 11-34 11-34

Test 5 Ext. Autozero and Nebul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autozeroing the dPptm, Pprox and Pvent pressure sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the autozero valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the extended rinse flow valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Pprox and dPptm sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the nebulizer valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-35 11-36 11-37 11-37 11-38 11-39 11-40 11-41 11-42 11-42 11-43 11-43 11-44 11-44

Test 6 Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autozeroing dPptm, Pprox and Pvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and adjusting dPptm gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Pvent zero calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-45 11-45 11-46 11-46 11-47 11-49 11-50 11-50

Contents-5

Contents

Checking and adjusting Pvent gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52

Test 7 Mixer and Tank Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53 Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55 Testing the tank overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56 Testing the air and oxygen inlet mixer valves for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57

Test 8 I-Valve and E-Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58 Calibrating the inspiratory-valve control signal for zero flow . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61 Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64 Testing the inspiratory valve controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-66

Test 9 Tightness and Overpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67 Testing the patient overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69 Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-70 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-70 Testing the rinse flow “pills” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-71 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-71 Testing for internal leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72 Testing for external leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-74 Testing the ambient state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-75 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-76

Test 10 O2 Cell Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-77 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-77 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-77 Calibrating the oxygen measurement zero offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-79 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-79 Calibrating the oxygen measurement full-scale gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-80 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-80 Checking the oxygen measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-81 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-81

Test 11 Calibration + Scaling Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-82 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-82 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-82 Checking calibration values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83

Test 12 Gas Delivery Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-84 Test 13 Sensor Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-84 Test 14 Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-85 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-85 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-85 Checking the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-86 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-86 Mandatory completion point for test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-87

Contents-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Contents

Test 15 Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-88

Section 12 Running version 2.* test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12.2 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 12.3 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 12.4 Functions of the test software test units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 12.5 Sequence of test software units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 12.6 Entering test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 12.7 How to use the test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Alarms during test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Exiting test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Test 1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Checking and setting the scaling values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Checking and setting the configuration data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Checking and adjusting the altitude setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Checking and setting the number of operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 ASV enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Checking the clock battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Test 2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only) . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-16 12-16 12-17 12-19 12-20 12-21

Test 3 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the nebulizer, trigger, and alarm LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the alarm tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the display and front keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the P&T-knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-22 12-22 12-23 12-23 12-24 12-24 12-25 12-25 12-26 12-27 12-28 12-28

Test 4 Alarm monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for error signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the power down status flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-29 12-29 12-30 12-30 12-31 12-31

Contents-7

Contents

Checking the alarm LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 Testing the alarm silence function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 Checking the inspiratory and expiratory valve unpowered position . . . . . . 12-34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35 Testing the front LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36 Testing the watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 Testing backup battery operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38 Testing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39 Checking again for error signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40

Test 5 Mixer and Tank Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41 Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44 Testing the tank overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 Testing the air and oxygen inlet mixer valves for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46

Test 6 Ext. Autozero and Nebul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 Testing the autozero valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 Testing the extended rinse flow valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 Testing the Pvent autozero valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 Testing the nebulizer valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54

Test 7 Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 Autozeroing dPptm, Pprox and Pvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57 Checking and adjusting dPptm gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61 Checking Pvent zero adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62 Checking and adjusting Pvent gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-65 Adjusting Pprox gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67 Checking the automatic analysis of the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors 12-68 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69 Calibrating the Flow Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71

Test 8 I-Valve and E-Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-72 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-72 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-72 Calibrating the inspiratory-valve control signal for zero flow . . . . . . . . . . . 12-73 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-76 Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265 . . . 12-77 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79

Contents-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Contents

Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373 . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the inspiratory valve controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-81 12-85 12-86 12-87

Test 9 Tightness and Overpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the patient overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the rinse flow “pills” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing for internal leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing for external leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the ambient state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-88 12-88 12-89 12-90 12-91 12-91 12-92 12-92 12-93 12-93 12-94 12-95 12-96 12-97

Test 10 O2 Cell Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98 Calibrating the oxygen measurement zero offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99 Calibrating the oxygen measurement full-scale gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-100 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-100 Checking the oxygen measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-101 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-101

Test 11 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the inspiratory/expiratory signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nurse Call (alarm switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232C port loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-102 12-102 12-103 12-103 12-104 12-104 12-105 12-105

Test 12 Calibration + Scaling Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-106 Test 12 EEPROM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-106 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking calibration values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-106 12-106 12-108 12-108

Test 13 Gas Delivery Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-109 Test 14 Sensor Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-109 Test 15 Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-111 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-111 12-111 12-112 12-112

12.8 Optional completion point for test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-114 Test 16 Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-115 Test 17 Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-117 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-117 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-117 Preparing your computer or printer to receive data from the RS232 port 12-119

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Contents-9

Contents

Displaying and checking the event log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-121 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-121 Transmitting the event log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-122 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-122

12.9 Optional completion point for test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-123 Test 18 Trend Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-124 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-124 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-124 Transmitting trend data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-125 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-125

12.10 Mandatory completion point for test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-126

Section 13 Running version 3.* test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13.2 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13.3 Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13.4 Functions of the test software test units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13.5 Sequence of test software units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13.6 Entering test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 13.7 How to use the test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Alarms during test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Exiting test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Test 1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Checking and setting the scaling values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Checking and setting the configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Checking and adjusting the altitude setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Checking and setting the serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Checking and setting the number of operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Checking the clock battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Test 2 Display and Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Testing the display (monochrome RAPHAELs only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Testing the display (RAPHAEL Colors only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only) . 13-20 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Checking the loudspeaker sound level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

Test 3 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Checking the nebulizer, trigger, and alarm LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

Contents-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Contents

Testing the display and front keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the P&T-knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-28 13-29 13-30 13-30

Test 4 Alarm monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for error signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the power down status flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the alarm LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the alarm silence function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the inspiratory and expiratory valve unpowered position . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the front LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing backup battery operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking again for error signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-31 13-31 13-32 13-32 13-33 13-33 13-34 13-34 13-35 13-35 13-36 13-37 13-38 13-38 13-39 13-39 13-40 13-40 13-41 13-42 13-42

Test 5 Mixer and Tank Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the tank overpressure valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the air and oxygen inlet mixer valves for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-43 13-43 13-45 13-46 13-48 13-48 13-49 13-49

Test 6 Ext. Autozero and Nebul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the autozero valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the extended rinse flow valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Pvent autozero valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the nebulizer valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-50 13-51 13-52 13-53 13-54 13-55 13-56 13-56 13-57 13-57

Test 7 Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autozeroing the dPptm, Pprox and Pvent pressure sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and adjusting dPptm gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Pvent pressure sensor zero adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and calibrating Pvent pressure sensor gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Pprox gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-58 13-58 13-59 13-60 13-61 13-64 13-65 13-65 13-66 13-68 13-70 13-70

Contents-11

Contents

Checking the automatic analysis of the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors 13-71 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-72 Calibrating the Flow Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-73 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74

Test 8 I-Valve and E-Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Calibrating the inspiratory-valve control signal for zero flow . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-79 Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265 . . . 13-80 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-82 Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373 . 13-84 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-88 Testing the inspiratory valve controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-90

Test 9 Tightness and Overpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-91 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-91 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-91 Testing the patient overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-92 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-93 Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-94 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-94 Testing the rinse flow “pills” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-95 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-95 Testing for internal leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-96 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-97 Testing for external leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-98 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-99 Testing the ambient state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-100 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-101

Test 10 O2 Cell Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-102 Calibrating the oxygen measurement zero offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-103 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-103 Calibrating the oxygen measurement full-scale gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-104 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-104 Checking the oxygen measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-105 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-105

Test 11 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-106 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-106 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-106 Testing the inspiratory/expiratory signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-107 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-107 Testing the Nurse Call (alarm switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-108 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-108 Testing the RS232C port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-109 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-109

Test 12 EEPROM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-110 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-110 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-110 Checking EEPROM Scaling Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-111 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-111

Test 13 Gas Delivery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-112 Test 14 Sensor Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-112 Test 15 Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-113 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-113 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-113

Contents-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Contents

Checking the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-114 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-115

13.8 Optional completion point for test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-116 Test 16 Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-117 Test 17 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-119 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-119 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-119 Preparing your computer to receive data from the RS232 port. . . . . . . . . 13-121 Displaying and checking the event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-123 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-123 Transmitting the event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-124 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-124

13.9 Optional completion point for test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-125 Test 18 Trend Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-126 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-126 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-126 Transmitting trend data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-127 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-127

13.10 Mandatory completion point for test software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-129

Part 3: Troubleshooting and replacements Section 14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 14.2 Understanding RAPHAEL alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Two alarm systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Two kinds of alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.3 The role of the event troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Interpreting events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

14.4 Troubleshooting technical fault alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 14.5 Troubleshooting normal alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11 14.6 General troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13

Section 15 Maintenance and replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15.2 Opening RAPHAEL’s enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15.3 Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 Cleaning the inspiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 Cleaning the expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

15.4 Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-15 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 Removing the DCU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

15.5 Changing the 12V batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-17

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Contents-13

Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 Removing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 Replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18

15.6 Changing the real-time lithium clock battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 Removing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 Removing real-time clock battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20 Replacing the real-time clock battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20

15.7 Replacing the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 Removing cable connectors and tubing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 Removing RAPHAEL’s front cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24 Removing the display on a monochrome RAPHAEL or RAPHAEL Color . . . 15-25 Dismantling and replacing a monochrome display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28 Dismantling and replacing a RAPHAEL Color display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32 Removing, dismantling and replacing the display on a RAPHAEL XTC . . . . 15-41

Part 4: Appendixes Appendix A RS232 port configuration settings and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A.2 HAMILTON MEDICAL RS232 configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 A.3 Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Appendix B

Historical and background notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B.2 Notes on Test 4: Alarm monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Notes on the power down status flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Notes on the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B.3 Notes on Test 6: Pressure Sensors and Test 7: Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Notes on alternative test setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B.4 Notes on Test 14: Supply Voltages and Test 15: Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Notes on step (1) on page 11-86 and step (1) on page 12-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Notes on step (3) on page 11-86 and step (3) on page 12-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

Appendix C Software history and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5

Contents-14

Software version 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Software version 1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Software version 1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Software version 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Software version 2.0S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Contents

C.6 C.7 C.8 C.9 C.10 C.11 C.12 C.13 C.14 C.15 C.16

Software versions 2.01, 2.01S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software version 2.1 (Japan only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software versions 2.2, 2.2S, 2.2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software versions 2.21, 2.21S, 2.21C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software versions 2.22, 2.22S, 2.22C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software versions 2.23, 2.23S, 2.23C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software version 2.24CU (USA only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software version 2.25CU (USA only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software versions 3.0, 3.0S, 3.0C, 3.0CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software versions 3.1, 3.1S, 3.1C, 3.1CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software versions 3.2CX, 3.2CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-3 C-3 C-4 C-4 C-4 C-5 C-5 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-7

Appendix D Upgrade routes and kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 D.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 D.2 Upgrade and language kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Appendix E Hardware and software versions and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 E.1 Mainboard versions and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 E.2 Software and mainboard compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2 Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-6 Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-9

E.3 Display control unit and mainboard compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

Appendix F Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 F.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 F.2 Component history chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2 F.3 Component change details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

Appendix G

Maintenance tools and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

G.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 G.2 Standard tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 G.3 Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 IC extractor tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentiometer adjustment tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grease for self-emptying water trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspiratory valve coil tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface board PN 157269 and RS232 cable PN 157354 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metron EST tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G-1 G-2 G-2 G-2 G-2 G-3

G.4 ESD protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 G.5 Equipment required for running test software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 Care of test equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Contents-15

Contents

Appendix H

NIST and DISS connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

H.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1 H.2 Photographs and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

Appendix I Automated electrical safety tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 I.1 I.2 I.3 I.4 I.5

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground wire resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulation resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-1 I-1 I-2 I-2 I-2

Ground leakage current under normal conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-3 Ground leakage current with live open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-3 Ground leakage current with live and neutral reversed, and live open . . . . . . .I-3 Ground leakage current with live and neutral reversed, and neutral open . . . .I-3

I.6 Chassis leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-4 Chassis leakage current under normal conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-4 Chassis leakage current with live open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-4 Chassis leakage current with ground open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-5 Chassis leakage test with live and neutral reversed, and ground open . . . . . . .I-5 Chassis leakage test under normal conditions, but with reversed connections I-5 Chassis leakage test with open ground and reversed connections . . . . . . . . . .I-5

Appendix J Spare parts and schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 J.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 J.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 J.3 List of schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 Schematic ZCH157100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157272 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157275 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157276 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH157332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH 157423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH614186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic ZCH614196 and BD614196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic WD616056 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-16

J-1 J-3 J-3 J-3 J-4 J-4 J-4 J-4 J-4 J-5 J-5 J-5 J-6 J-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Glossary Index RAPHAEL version 1.x test software report RAPHAEL version 2.* and 3.* test software report Document History

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

1-17

Contents

1-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Conventions Notes, Cautions and Warnings Note This format emphasizes information of particular importance. CAUTION This format alerts the to the possibility of a problem with the device associated with its use or misuse, such as device malfunction, device failure, damage to the device, or damage to other property. WARNING This format alerts the to the possibility of injury, death, or other serious adverse reactions associated with the or misuse of the device.

Typographic conventions Effect Courier, bold

Italic

Bold

Example

Function

Configuration

Marks text quoted directly from the RAPHAEL screen.

RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994)

Marks the names of other documents.

Appendix J, Spare parts and schematics

Marks text that is a quotation from within the manual. In this case, it is part of a cross-reference.

Tank

Marks a term that is in the glossary. If you are using a PDF file to view this, you can hyperlink to the glossary by clicking on these items.

TRIGGER

Marks text that is quoted directly from: • The RAPHAEL case • A touch key • A printed circuit board

Bold, italic

Select only the first column.

Emphasizes important text.

x

With this kit, you can update from software version 2.2xC to 2.23C.

Unless otherwise locally defined, a syntactic variable denoting any alpha-numeric character. For instance, software version 2.2xC refers to 2.21C, 2.22C and 2.23C. It does not refer to 2.23 or 2.23S.

*

June 9, 2006

With this kit, you can update or upgrade from software version 1.x or 2.* to 3.1.

Unless otherwise locally defined, a syntactic variable denoting any number (including zero) of any alpha-numeric characters. For instance, software version 2.* refers to 2.0, 2.01, 2.21, 2.22, 2.23, 2.0S, 2.01S, 2.21S and so on.

PN 61067/05

Conventions-1

Conventions

Expressions Expression Activate

Example Activate LED On/Off.

Explanation Using the control knob, you must first select the LED On/Off button on one or RAPHAEL’s screens, and then press the control knob. The button on the screen changes its appearance, so that it looks “pressed”. It now performs its function (turning the LED on in this case). Sometimes you are told to “activate and set” a field. In this case you first activate the field, and then turn the P&T-knob to set a value.

Deactivate

Deactivate LED On/Off.

With LED On/Off still selected and activated, you must press the control knob again. The button on the screen changes its appearance, so that it looks “unpressed”. It stops performing its function (turning the LED off).

Conventions-2

Pressure

This expression refers to that part of the pressure that is above the ambient pressure. Therefore, if we say that pressure in the tank is 850–1000 mbar, we mean it is 850–1000 mbar above the pressure in the room in which the RAPHAEL is placed.

RAPHAEL operator’s manual

Refers only to RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent.

Update

This expression refers to the improvement or improvements of existing functionality in a device. Updates are generally denoted in the revision number by an increment in a digit after the decimal point: for example, 3.0 to 3.1.

Upgrade

This expression refers to the addition of new functionality to a device. Upgrades are generally denoted in the revision number by an increment in a digit before the decimal point: for example, 1.0 to 3.1.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Foreword Who is this service manual for? This manual is for engineers who have successfully completed a HAMILTON MEDICAL Service Training Course for RAPHAEL ventilators. If you have not completed such a course, you are not authorized to undertake the maintenance, repairs and tests described in this manual. Use RAPHAEL Service Manual (PN 610670) instead. Training courses are held regularly in Bonaduz, Switzerland, at HAMILTON MEDICAL’s headquarters, and in many other places around the world. For more information, the local HAMILTON MEDICAL representative for your country. You can find this information on the HAMILTON MEDICAL web site: http://www.hamilton-medical.com. Note If you have questions or corrections concerning any part of this manual, do not hesitate to HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]). WARNING You may open RAPHAEL only if you have completed a HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Service Training Course for RAPHAEL ventilators.

What does this service manual contain? This manual includes the complete content of the RAPHAEL Service Manual (PN 610670), with the exception of the self-training tests. This content is descriptive in nature, and covers the following topics: • • • • • •

Details of the physical construction of RAPHAEL Descriptions of the airflows through RAPHAEL Details of the pneumatic components in RAPHAEL Brief descriptions of the electronic components in RAPHAEL Description of the RS232 and Special ports of the communication interface Information about alarms caused by technical faults

In addition, this manual includes information about the following areas: • • • • • • •

Maintenance Testing the hardware Using RAPHAEL’s test software mode for further testing and calibration Performing Electrical Safety Testing (EST) Troubleshooting, by using general faults, technical faults, and the test software tests Replacing and cleaning parts Additional appendixes dealing with software history, compatibility, tools and test equipment

The main difference between versions 04 and 05, and earlier versions of this manual, is that the latest two versions contain information for performing the test software tests on software version 3.* (Section 13, Running version 3.* test software). In addition, version 05 has information about RAPHAEL XTC.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Foreword-1

Foreword

What does this service manual not contain? This service manual does not contain information about operating RAPHAEL. Operating information is in the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent, that must be used as a supplement to this service manual. Note Versions of the RAPHAEL operator’s manual earlier than RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) do not contain information about the new features in software version 3.*.

What equipment does the service manual cover? This manual covers all models of RAPHAEL, namely: • • • •

RAPHAEL (also called basic RAPHAEL) RAPHAEL Silver RAPHAEL Color RAPHAEL XTC

What other tools and resources do I need to test and maintain RAPHAEL? To install and test a RAPHAEL ventilator, you require: • The tools and equipment listed in Appendix G, Maintenance tools and test equipment. • The RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent. The part numbers for the local languages are: • French PN 610995 • German PN 610996 • Italian PN 610997 • Spanish PN 610998 • US English PN 624008 If you are in any doubt about these requirements, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]).

Where can I get the latest news, information, software updates, and so on? You can find this information on the HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Partner Web Site (http://www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site/). To enter this site you require a . For more information, write to the web master, ([email protected]).

Foreword-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Part 1: General description

PN 61067/05

Section

1

1

Introduction to RAPHAEL

1.1

What is RAPHAEL? RAPHAEL is a medical ventilator suited to continuous ventilation of adult, pediatric, and infant patients weighing between 5 and 200 kg. The RAPHAEL ventilator is intended for use in a hospital or hospital-type facility, including use at a patient bedside or for intra-facility transport, provided compressed gas is supplied.

1.2

What does RAPHAEL do? RAPHAEL supplies a flow of an air/oxygen mixture, at a regulated pressure, to a patient suffering a compromised ability to breath.

1.3

How does RAPHAEL function? At its simplest, RAPHAEL functions by regulating the flow of gases at three points, as represented in the diagram in Figure 1-1. Compressed air and oxygen from external supply

1 Key: = Regulation point

2

To patient (air/oxygen mix)

Expired gases escape into room

3

From patient (expired gases)

Figure 1-1. Principle gas flow through RAPHAEL

As shown, compressed air and oxygen are supplied to RAPHAEL from an external supply. The regulation points are: • Air and oxygen inlets (regulation point 1) • Outlet to patient (regulation point 2) • Inlet from patient (regulation point 3) Expired gases from the patient are allowed to escape into the room. In this manual, we refer to this gas flow to RAPHAEL, then to the patient, and then back to RAPHAEL, as the “principle gas flow”.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

1-1

1 Introduction to RAPHAEL

1.4

What components manage the principle gas flow?

Patient

Flow Sensor on spur from patient circuit

Patient circuit

Expiratory valve

Inspiratory valve

Tank

Expired gases exhausted into room

Mixer valves

Pressurized air Pressurized oxygen

The main components that control the flow of gases through RAPHAEL are shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2. Components comprising principle gas route through

RAPHAEL

1-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

What other components does RAPHAEL have?

The components have the following functions:

1.5

• Mixer valves

Regulate the flow of air and oxygen into the ventilator at the air and oxygen inlets.

• Tank

Smoothes the flow of air and oxygen through the ventilator, and provides a place for the gases to mix. Also enables RAPHAEL to deliver high flows of gas for short periods.

• Inspiratory valve

Regulates the pressure of the air/oxygen mixture in the patient circuit.

• Patient circuit

Supplies air/oxygen to the patient, and removes exhalation gases from the patient. Gases move in one direction in the patient circuit.

• Spur

Connects the patient circuit to the patient’s airway. Gases flow in both directions, as the patient breathes in and out (inhales and exhales).

• Flow Sensor

Monitors the flow and pressure of gases moving to and from the patient’s airway.

• Expiratory valve

Regulates the flow of expiratory gases from the patient circuit to the room in which RAPHAEL is placed.

What other components does RAPHAEL have? Apart from the components comprising the principle gas route, RAPHAEL has several other sets of components that offer additional safety or functions. These are: • Three safety valves: tank overpressure, patient overpressure, and ambient. They are documented in: • Section 4.5, Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve, on page 4-8 • Section 4.6, Inspiratory valve and ambient valve, on page 4-11 • Oxygen cell. This is a Galvanic fuel cell that measures the partial pressure of oxygen in the air/oxygen mixture in the tank. Although RAPHAEL does not require the cell to determine the mixture, it is very useful for monitoring and safety purposes. For more information, see Section 5.3, Oxygen cell, on page 5-16. • Communication interface. This enables RAPHAEL to communicate with an external monitor, alarm system, or computer. For more information, see Section 6, The optional communication interface.

1.6

Flow control and pressure control Theory of pressure-controlled operation In a pressure-controlled ventilator such as RAPHAEL, the inspiratory valve and expiratory valve synchronize to increase and decrease the pressure in the patient circuit, thereby causing the patient to inspire and exhale. At no time does the expiratory valve completely close.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

1-3

1 Introduction to RAPHAEL

Advantages of pressure control The advantages of a pressure-controlled ventilator are: • The pressure in the patient circuit can never become uncomfortably high — for instance, if a patient coughs. • The patient can inhale and exhale at any time, independently of the ventilator cycle. Furthermore, the volume of air delivered to the patient, although controlled only indirectly by the ventilator, can be set with reasonable precision. Theory of flow-controlled operation A ventilator such as GALILEO, when in flow-controlled mode, measures the flow of gas through the inspiratory valve into the patient circuit, stops the flow after the correct volume of gas has entered the patient circuit, and then opens the expiratory valve to enable the patient to exhale. Advantages of flow control The advantages of a flow-controlled ventilator are: • The volume of air delivered to the patient can be controlled with great precision. • The flow pattern can be controlled.

1-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

2

2

Construction of RAPHAEL

2.1

Introduction This section gives an overview of RAPHAEL’s physical construction. It contains information about the location of every major component. The section is not version-specific: the information given applies to all models of RAPHAEL, RAPHAEL Silver, and RAPHAEL Color, and the photographs shown can be of any model. • For information about the theory of the gas flows, see Section 3, Gas flows in RAPHAEL. • For details of the construction and function of each gas flow component, see Section 4, Details of gas flow components. • For general information about the electronic components, see Section 5, Electronic components. To better understand this section, open the schematic named Raphael Instrument and numbered ZCH157100 Blatt 1. You can find it in Appendix J, Spare parts and schematics. Check the schematic against the similar image displayed in Figure 2-2 on page 2-3. Note If the schematic ZCH157100 Blatt 1 does not show the part being discussed, a photograph is provided in the text.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

2-1

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

2.2 2.2.1

RAPHAEL design highlights Pneumatics The construction of RAPHAEL breaks new territory, in that, so far as possible, all internal tubing has been excluded from the design. This decreases the likelihood of leaks, improves reliability, allows the unit to be more compact, enhances efficiency during production, and makes servicing simpler.

Figure 2-1. The unique pneumatic block

The almost complete absence of tubing is achieved by mounting most components directly on the unique pneumatic block. This block is a composite of a specially-formulated Plexiglas, inside of which air channels of varying thicknesses replace tubing (Figure 2-1). A number of threaded holes and housings enable components to be screwed into place. 2.2.2

Electronics The electronic design of RAPHAEL is sophisticated but simple, requiring only the following printed circuit boards: • • • •

Mainboard, on which all processing takes place Power supply board Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board dc/ac converter board for powering the monochrome or color display backlight

In addition, a communication interface board that enables RAPHAEL to data to external equipment can be fitted as an option. Because of the low power consumption of the circuit boards, only relatively small batteries are required to back up the mains power supply. These are positioned in the main housing.

2-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

RAPHAEL design highlights

Figure 2-2. Copy of ZCH157100 Blatt 1

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

2-3

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

2.3

Main component groups As shown on Figure 2-2 on page 2-3, and schematic ZCH157100 Blatt 1, RAPHAEL’s main component groups are: • Chassis (explained further in Section 2.3.1 and Section 2.3.2) • Pneumatic block (explained further in Section 2.3.3 and Section 2.3.4) • Front (explained further in Section 2.3.5 and Section 2.3.6)

2.3.1

Chassis The chassis is the main structural item in RAPHAEL. All components (including the pneumatic block and front ) are mounted on it. (Figure 2-3.) Display control unit (DCU)

Alarm buzzer with capacitors to provide power source

Front with display. ( on XTC is larger, otherwise identical.)

DCU graphics PROM (RAPHAEL Color and XTC only)

Test points

Software PROM and microswitches

Potentiometers

On/off switch and fuses

Fan

RS232 port

Pneumatic block (cover removed)

Potential equalization terminal

Optional communication interface board

Special port

Figure 2-3. RAPHAEL’s chassis from above

2-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Main component groups

2.3.2

Components mounted on the chassis • Pneumatic block

This is mounted on the outside of the chassis, at the rear of the unit. For more information, see Section 2.3.3, Pneumatic block, on page 2-8.

• Front

See Section 2.3.5, Front , on page 2-13.

• Mainboard

The mainboard uses surface-mounted technology, and has a very low power consumption. It is the only printed circuit board in RAPHAEL dedicated to processing signals related to ventilation. The most important components on the mainboard are: • Microprocessor C167CR and ing components. These perform all signal and alarm processing. • ASIC 157249 and ing components. These provide a complete alarm backup system. Depending on your software version, you test this in: • Test 4: Alarm monitor, in Section 11 on page 11-24 • Test 4: Alarm monitor, in Section 12 on page 12-29 • Test 4: Alarm monitor, in Section 13 on page 13-31 • The software program PROM that manages microprocessor C167CR. • Potentiometers for calibrating valves and sensors. Depending on your software version, you do this in: • Test 6: Pressure Sensors, in Section 11 on page 11-45 and Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 11 on page 11-58 • Test 7: Pressure Sensors, in Section 12 on page 12-55 and Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 12 on page 12-72 • Test 7: Pressure Sensors, in Section 13 on page 13-58 and Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 13 on page 13-75 • Test points for checking voltages. You do this in Section 9, Backup battery and voltage tests. • DCU graphics PROM: a PROM containing text and graphics that are ed to the DCU graphics board in RAPHAEL Color and RAPHAEL XTC. For more general information about the mainboard, see Section 5.2.1, Mainboard, on page 5-1.

• Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board

Mounted on the mainboard is the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board that manages the monochrome or color display. This contains graphics that RAPHAEL can call up as required. For more information, see Section 5.2.2, Display Control Unit (DCU) board, on page 5-11 and Section 15.6.2, Removing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-19.

• DCU graphics PROM

June 9, 2006

A PROM, mounted on the mainboard (not the DCU board) in RAPHAEL Color and XTC. It contains text and graphics that are ed to the DCU graphics board.

PN 61067/05

2-5

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

• Communication interface board

This is an option that the customer can order from the factory with RAPHAEL, or that an engineer can fit later in the field (on models with mainboard PN 157265 and later). The board mounts directly on the chassis, and, as shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4, provides two ports: • The RS232 port can communicate with peripherals such as a computer or monitor. It is used for patient data, including waveforms. • The Special port can be used to activate an external nurse alarm, external nebulizer, or external nitric oxide device. For more information, see Section 6, The optional communication interface.

• Potential equalization terminal

This is a on the chassis (or cover in some older models) enabling you to connect RAPHAEL to other hospital equipment, thereby ensuring equal electric potential in the various pieces of equipment used on a patient.

• Fan

The purpose of the fan is to: • Prevent oxygen accumulating inside RAPHAEL, and thereby prevent the risk of explosion. • Provide cooling to the electrical circuits. You, or a member of hospital staff, must replace the filter as a part of regular routine maintenance, as described in the appropriate RAPHAEL operator’s manual. For more information, see Section 5.5, Fan, on page 5-23.

• Power supply board

This is a standard switched power supply that provides power at a number of voltages for RAPHAEL. The power supply board slides into the chassis on a “drawer”, as shown below. Mainboard

Drawer containing power supply

Pipe from inspiratory valve to to-patient port

For more information, see Section 5.2.5, Power supply board and backup batteries, on page 5-13.

2-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Main component groups

• Backup batteries

The two 12 V backup batteries shown below can keep RAPHAEL functioning for between 30 minutes and 2 hours. For more information, see Section 5.2.5, Power supply board and backup batteries, on page 5-13, and Section 15.5, Changing the 12V batteries, on page 15-17. Mainboard

Battery

Velcro strap

• Loudspeaker and buzzer

RAPHAEL provides two completely independent alarm systems. The main alarm system uses the loudspeaker. The backup alarm system uses the buzzer. The main alarm system is more comprehensive than the backup system, but the backup system has the advantage of having its own power source, in the form of two capacitors that can power the buzzer to sound for at least two minutes. Note Despite its name, the buzzer produces a high-pitched sound. You can see the buzzer and capacitors in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4. The loudspeaker is mounted directly on the chassis, behind the front cover, as shown below. Front cover Loudspeaker (behind grill)

Backup batteries

For more information, see Section 5.2.1, Mainboard, on page 5-1.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

2-7

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

• Ancillary items

The mains power connector, on/off switch and mains fuse are all also mounted on the rear of chassis, as shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4. WARNING

The on/off switch does not isolate RAPHAEL from the mains power supply. It only turns RAPHAEL on and off. Mains voltages are present in the power supply, even when RAPHAEL is switched off. The to-patient and from-patient ports are mounted on the front of the chassis. For more information, see Section 2.3.5, Front , on page 2-13. 2.3.3

Pneumatic block The pneumatic block (Figure 2-4) is the most innovative part of RAPHAEL’s pneumatic system. It is attached to the rear of the chassis. Connectors for tubes to nebulizer and Flow Sensor Solenoid valves

Inspiratory valve

Tank housing

Safety block containing tank and patient overpressure valves Figure 2-4. The pneumatic block partly assembled

2-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Main component groups

2.3.4

Components mounted on the pneumatic block • Air and oxygen inlet assemblies

These are positioned at the rear of RAPHAEL, as shown below. Stainless steel plate

Inlet Filter

Filter housing in which water is trapped

Each assembly comprises a water trap, complete with filter and housing. They are mounted on a large bar. When you look at RAPHAEL from the rear, the mounting bar appears to be screwed to a stainless steel plate. However, the plate is only a thin covering for the pneumatic block. The mounting bar therefore connects directly to the pneumatic block. You, or a member of hospital staff, must replace the filter in each water trap as a part of regular routine maintenance, as described in the appropriate RAPHAEL operator’s manual. Depending on your software version, you test these components in: • Test 7: Mixer and Tank Pressure, in Section 11 on page 11-53 • Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure, in Section 12 on page 12-41 • Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure, in Section 13 on page 13-43 For more general information, see Section 3.3, Components managing gas flow to the tank, on page 3-4 and Section 4.2, Oxygen and air water traps, on page 4-1.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

2-9

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

• Solenoid valves

RAPHAEL’s solenoid valves mount directly on the pneumatic block. You can see them in Figure 2-4 on page 2-8. The three largest valves in this group control: • The flow of air and flow of oxygen from the water traps to the tank • The flow of gas from the tank to the nebulizer Smaller valves enable RAPHAEL to perform internal functions. Depending on your software version, you test the solenoid valves in: • Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul., in Section 11 on page 11-35 • Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul., in Section 12 on page 12-47 • Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul., in Section 13 on page 13-50 For general information about the solenoid valves, see Section 3, Gas flows in RAPHAEL, and Section 4.3, Solenoid valves, on page 4-4. Note The inspiratory valve and expiratory valve are not classed as solenoid valves.

• Pressure sensors

The pressure sensors are too small to see in clearly in ZCH157100 Blatt 1. However, most are shown in schematic ZCH157276 Blatt 1. They are labelled: • • • • •

dPptm Pprox Ptank dPmixer Pvent

The diagram below shows a part of ZCH157276 Blatt 1.

2-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Main component groups

You can see two of the sensors in the photograph below.

Pvent dPmixer

Depending on your software version, you test and calibrate the pressure sensors in: • Test 6: Pressure Sensors, in Section 11 on page 11-45 • Test 7: Pressure Sensors, in Section 12 on page 12-55 • Test 7: Pressure Sensors, in Section 13 on page 13-58 For more general information, see Section 3, Gas flows in RAPHAEL and Section 5.4, Pressure sensors, on page 5-20. • Tank

The tank or reservoir is an aluminium vessel of about two liters.

Tank housing Tank

It has two functions: • To provide a large volume in which the air and oxygen from the inlet assemblies can thoroughly mix. • To smooth the gas flow to the inspiratory valve that delivers gas to the patient. The tank screws into a large aluminium housing mounted directly on the pneumatic block, and occupies a large amount of the space in RAPHAEL. For more information, see Section 3.3.2.5, Gas flow through tank, on page 3-8 and Section 4.4, Tank, on page 4-6.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

2-11

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

• Inspiratory valve

You can see the inspiratory valve in Figure 2-4 on page 2-8. This component is in reality a combination of two valves: • The inspiratory valve, that delivers the gas to the patient. • The ambient valve, that enables the patient to breath in the event of a complete RAPHAEL system failure. Depending on your software version, you test the inspiratory valve in: • Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 11 on page 11-58 • Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 12 on page 12-72 • Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 13 on page 13-75 For more general information, see Section 3.5.2.1, Gas flow to patient, on page 3-15 and Section 4.6, Inspiratory valve and ambient valve, on page 4-11.

• Nebulizer and Flow Sensor connectors

On the top of the pneumatic block are the connectors for three of the four tubes inside RAPHAEL. (Figure 2-4 on page 2-8.) These supply an air/oxygen mixture to the external nebulizer connector, and to the two Flow Sensor connectors on the front of the RAPHAEL shown in Figure 2-5 on page 2-13.

• Overpressure relief valves

The patient overpressure valve and the tank overpressure valve are both in the safety block, a unit situated at the bottom right of the pneumatic block (shown in the schematic and in Figure 2-4 on page 2-8). These are two simple, mechanical, safety valves — one for the patient breathing circuit, and one for the tank. Depending on your software version, you test the tank overpressure valve in: • Test 7.4, Testing the tank overpressure valve, in Section 11 on page 11-56 • Test 5.4, Testing the tank overpressure valve, in Section 12 on page 12-45 • Test 5.4, Testing the tank overpressure valve, in Section 13 on page 13-48 You test the patient overpressure valve in one of: • Test 9.3, Testing the patient overpressure valve, in Section 11 on page 11-68 • Test 9.3, Testing the patient overpressure valve, in Section 12 on page 12-89 • Test 9.3, Testing the patient overpressure valve, in Section 13 on page 13-92 For more general information, see Section 4.5, Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve, on page 4-8.

2-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Main component groups

2.3.5

Front Apart from the on/off switch and the water traps, all RAPHAEL’s controls and gas connections are on or under the front cover. (Figure 2-5.) All controls are identical on the larger RAPHAEL XTC display.

Display

Display keyboard

Front keyboard Press-and-turn knob Flow Sensor connectors

Nebulizer connector

To-patient port

Expiratory valve

Oxygen cell holder From-patient port of expiratory valve

Exhaust port of expiratory valve

Figure 2-5. The RAPHAEL front

The RAPHAEL operator’s manuals discuss the ’s use of these components very fully. This manual gives an overview from the engineers’ perspective.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

2-13

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

2.3.6

Components mounted on the front • Display

The display (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13), which can be monochrome or color, shows: • Numerics and waveforms associated with the patient being ventilated. These are displayed on a number of different windows. • Windows associated with the test software that engineers use to check all aspects of RAPHAEL’s functioning. The power source for the illumination of the display is the dc/ac board. This small board is mounted behind the front cover, just above the display as shown below. Depending on your software version, you test the display in one of: • Test 2: Display, in Section 11 on page 11-12 • Test 2: Display, in Section 12 on page 12-16 • Test 2: Display and Loudspeaker, in Section 13 on page 13-16 For information about the dc/ac board, see Section 5.2.4, dc/ac board, on page 5-12. For information about replacing the display, see Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

Front cover

dc/ac converter board (shown here for monochrome display)

WARNING

Output from the dc/ac board is about 1700 V. • Display keyboard

These keys (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13) enable s to access the screens used for ventilating patients. The keyboard is separately replaceable, but you must remove the display to do this.

• Front keyboard

These keys (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13) enable s to change the way RAPHAEL is currently functioning — for instance, by making RAPHAEL deliver 100% oxygen. The keyboard comprises a sealed membrane, and is easy to peel off and replace.

2-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Main component groups

• Press-and-turn knob

The press-and-turn knob (P&T-knob) is RAPHAEL’s major control (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13). It has two actions: • Turn: The knob rotates through 16 switch positions around a full 360° circle. The turns the knob to select an item on the screen during ventilation or when running the test software. • Press: The knob has a double-action push switch. The presses once to activate the item already selected by turning. He pushes again to deactivate the item. Depending on your software version, you test the keyboards and the P&T-knob in one of: • Test 3: Front, in Section 11 on page 11-17 • Test 3: Front, in Section 12 on page 12-22 • Test 3: Front, in Section 13 on page 13-25

• O2 cell holder

The oxygen cell holder (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13) secures the replaceable oxygen cell that RAPHAEL uses to measure the concentration of oxygen in the tank. The cell provides an oxygen-monitoring mechanism, although it is not required to control the flow of gas through RAPHAEL. Replacing the oxygen cell is part of routine maintenance, and does not require an engineer or any special tools.

Oxygen cell

Holder

The procedure is described in the appropriate RAPHAEL operator’s manual. Depending on your software version, you test and calibrate the oxygen cell in one of: • Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement, in Section 11 on page 11-77 • Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement, in Section 12 on page 12-98 • Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement, in Section 13 on page 13-102 For more general information about the oxygen cell, see Section 3.6.2.1, Sample gas supply for O2 cell, on page 3-21 and Section 5.3, Oxygen cell, on page 5-16. • Nebulizer connector

June 9, 2006

This connector (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13) provides a flow of gas directly from the tank to drive an external nebulizer, if there is one fitted. The activates this flow by using the nebulizer key on the front keyboard.

PN 61067/05

2-15

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

• Flow Sensor connectors

The two Flow Sensor connectors (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13) are connected to the Flow Sensor’s differential pressure sensor in the pneumatic block. This pressure sensor measures the pressure difference between the front and rear chambers in the Flow Sensor. For more information, see Section 3.5.2.2, Airway gas flow, on page 3-16 and Section 4.7, Flow Sensor, on page 4-13.

• To-patient port

The to-patient port (also shown in Figure 2-5 on page 2-13) delivers the air/gas mixture from the inspiratory valve into the patient tubing. It is shown in detail below:

Oxygen cell

Pipe from inspiratory valve To-patient port

Filter Tubing on to-patient port

2-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Main component groups

• From-patient port and exhaust port on expiratory valve

The from-patient port takes the air exhaled by the patient, and returns it to the environment through the exhaust port. (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13.) Both ports are part of the expiratory valve, which is shown in detail below:

Positioning coil of expiratory valve

From-patient port (hidden from view) Exhaust port

The expiratory valve synchronizes with the inspiratory valve, in order to: • Maintain full pressure in the patient circuit during inspiration • Maintain PEEP/AP pressure in the patient circuit during expiration (if required by the ) Depending on your software version, you test the inspiratory and expiratory valves in one of: • Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 11 on page 11-58 • Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 12 on page 12-72 • Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, in Section 13 on page 13-75 For more general information, see Section 3.5.2.3, Gas flow from patient, on page 3-18 and Section 4.8, Expiratory valve, on page 4-16. WARNING

Never attach a spirometer or any other device or tube to the exhaust port. A spirometer attached to the exhaust port gives inaccurate readings, and causes RAPHAEL to lose full control of PEEP/AP.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

2-17

2 Construction of RAPHAEL

2-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

3

3

Gas flows in RAPHAEL

3.1

Introduction This section gives an overview of the functions of RAPHAEL’s pneumatic circuits. The section is not version-specific: the information given applies to all models of RAPHAEL, RAPHAEL Silver, and RAPHAEL Color, and the photographs shown can be of any model. Details of the construction of individual components and assemblies are not included, but are given in Section 4, Details of gas flow components.

3.1.1

Blockdiagram Raphael To better understand this section, open the schematic named Blockdiagram Raphael and numbered ZCH614186 Blatt 2. You can find it in Appendix J, Spare parts and schematics. Check the schematic against the similar image displayed in Figure 3-1 on page 3-2.

3.1.2

Structure of following sections In the following sections, we break the pneumatic circuits in the Blockdiagram Raphael into the following three logical groups: • Section 3.3, Components managing gas flow to the tank, on page 3-4 • Section 3.4, Components managing major gas flows from the tank, on page 3-10 • Section 3.5, Components managing gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway, on page 3-13 Together, these comprise the principle gas route through RAPHAEL, from gas entry into the ventilator, to gas exit into the environment. A final group of components, Section 3.6, Components managing minor gas flows from the tank, on page 3-21, provide gas for a number of purposes within RAPHAEL. We start by taking an overview of the principle gas route through RAPHAEL.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-1

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

Figure 3-1. Copy of ZCH614186 Blatt 2

3-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Overview of principle gas route

3.2

Overview of principle gas route Pressurized air and oxygen

Mixer valves RAPHAEL case

Tank

Inspiratory valve

Expiratory valve

Patient circuit

Flow Sensor on spur from patient circuit Patient Figure 3-2. Principle gas route through RAPHAEL

Figure 3-2 gives a stylized overview of the principle gas route through RAPHAEL: • Pressurized air and oxygen enter RAPHAEL from the hospital main supply, or from an air compressor and oxygen cylinder. • The mixer valves it the correct quantities of the two gases to the tank. • The oxygen/air mixture from the tank flows to the inspiratory valve. This regulates the flow of mixture into the patient circuit. • A spur from the patient circuit takes the oxygen/air mixture to the patient during inspiration, and removes expired gases from the patient during expiration. The Flow Sensor measures the pressure, and the flow in each direction. • Finally, gas expired from the patient goes through the expiratory valve back into the environment.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-3

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

3.3 3.3.1

Components managing gas flow to the tank Component functions The components that supply the gas to the tank perform the following tasks: • • • •

3.3.2

Clean and dry the oxygen and air Ensure that neither oxygen nor air can flow back out of RAPHAEL Mix oxygen and air in the correct ratio Supply oxygen and air in the correct quantity—thereby achieving the correct pressure in the tank

Components Figure 3-3 shows the subset of components (see ZCH614186 Blatt 2) that manage the flow of gas to the tank.

Section 3.3.2.1 Gas flow through oxygen and air water traps Section 3.3.2.2 Gas flow through check valves Section 3.3.2.3 Gas flow through mixer valves

Sintered disk flow restrictor

Section 3.3.2.4 Gas flow through sintered disk flow restrictor Differential pressure sensor Tank

Section 3.3.2.5 Gas flow through tank

Pressure sensor for tank

Figure 3-3. Flow of oxygen and air to the tank

3.3.2.1

Gas flow through oxygen and air water traps Air and oxygen enter RAPHAEL at the water traps marked Oxygen and Air. These are at the back of the ventilator, as shown in Figure 3-4 on page 3-5. The filters in the traps remove dirt particles, and any condensed water present runs to the bottom of the filter housing.

3-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing gas flow to the tank

For construction details of the gas water traps, see Section 4.2, Oxygen and air water traps, on page 4-1.

Inlet

Filter

Filter housing in which water is contained

Figure 3-4. The air and oxygen water traps at the rear of the RAPHAEL

3.3.2.2

Gas flow through check valves Each gas es through a check valve. This is a one-way valve that ensures gas cannot flow back out of the ventilator. It is built into the mounting bar that s the water traps. (Figure 3-5.)

Check valve

Water trap

Figure 3-5. The oxygen check valve

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-5

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

3.3.2.3

Gas flow through mixer valves Each gas flows through the pneumatic block to the solenoid mixer valve that governs the flow of that gas, as shown in Figure 3-6. (The photograph was taken from behind RAPHAEL, with the rear cover removed.)

Air flow to solenoid mixer valve

Oxygen flow to solenoid mixer valve

Air inlet

Oxygen inlet Figure 3-6. Inlet gas flows through the pneumatic block

The solenoid mixer valves control the flow of air and oxygen into the ventilator. They are electronically governed, and are mounted on the rear of the pneumatic block as shown in Figure 3-7 (photograph taken from above, with top and rear covers removed) and in Figure 3-9.

Fan Pneumatic block Solenoid mixer valves

Rubber mounting blocks for solenoid valves

Figure 3-7. Mixer valves in the pneumatic block

Both valves are attached to the pneumatic block by a rubber mounting block that reduces the noise conducted to the body of the RAPHAEL. The valves have two states: open and closed. RAPHAEL opens a valve, measures the volume of gas that flows through, and then closes the valve. Depending on the requirements for the gas mixture in

3-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing gas flow to the tank

the tank, RAPHAEL might then open and close the second valve in a similar manner. Opening times of the valves are typically a few milliseconds. The solenoid mixer valves mark the boundary between gas at inlet pressure and gas at tank pressure. The mixer valves have different specifications to the nebulizer valve (Figure 3-13, The nebulizer valve and overpressure valves, on page 3-11). WARNING For this reason, do not exchange nebulizer and mixer valves.

You can identify new-style mixer valves by the black cap on the top of the solenoid body, and by the part number printed on the solenoid body. 3.3.2.4

Gas flow through sintered disk flow restrictor When RAPHAEL switches on a mixer valve, gas flows toward the tank through a large sintered disk flow restrictor. The flow creates a pressure difference across the restrictor. This gas flow and sintered disk are shown in Figure 3-8. This photograph was taken from behind RAPHAEL, with the cover and water traps removed.

Sintered disk flow restrictor Gas flow to dPmixer sensor dP mixer differential pressure sensor Pneumatic block

Figure 3-8. Inlet gas flow through the sintered disk flow restrictor

The sintered disk is also shown in Figure 3-9. This photograph was taken from the inner side of the pneumatic block, with the tank and the tank holder removed. The pressure difference across the sintered disk is measured by the dPmixer pressure sensor. This is attached to the pneumatic block, and is also shown in Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9. Because there is a clearly-defined relationship between the rate of gas flow and the pressure difference across any flow restrictor, RAPHAEL can control the quantity of gas ing through the sintered disk restrictor by switching the solenoid mixer valves according to the pressure difference measured by the dPmixer pressure sensor.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-7

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

Solenoid mixer valves

Sintered disk flow restrictor

dP mixer differential pressure sensor Figure 3-9. The sintered disk in the disassembled pneumatic block 3.3.2.5

Gas flow through tank Oxygen and air from the mixer valves flow into the tank, where they mix. (Figure 3-10.)

Tank

Figure 3-10. The tank or reservoir in position in RAPHAEL

Because the tank is large relative to the diameter of the inlet flow, short openings of the solenoid mixer valves do not have much effect on the pressure of the gases in it. RAPHAEL is therefore able to maintain the tank pressure at a fairly constant level, and the gas flow from the tank to other components is therefore smooth. Tank pressure is measured by a the Ptank pressure sensor.

3-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing gas flow to the tank

Together, the solenoid mixer valves, the sintered disk flow restrictor, the differential pressure sensor, and the tank make up the mixer. For this reason, the measurement at the pressure sensor (Figure 3-3 on page 3-4 and Figure 3-9 on page 3-8) is named dPmixer—differential pressure at the mixer.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-9

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

3.4 3.4.1

Components managing major gas flows from the tank Component functions The components that manage the major gas flows from the tank perform the following tasks: • Provide gas for the inspiratory valve • Provide gas for the nebulizer • Ensure that the tank cannot reach a dangerous pressure if RAPHAEL malfunctions

3.4.2

Components Figure 3-11 shows the subset of components (see ZCH614186 Blatt 2) that manage the major gas flows from the tank. Section 3.4.2.1 Gas flow to inspiratory valve Tank

Section 3.4.2.3 Gas flow through tank overpressure valve

Inspiratory valve

Nebulizer solenoid valve

Section 3.4.2.2 Gas flow to nebulizer

Tank overpressure valve

Nebulizer

Figure 3-11. Major gas flows from the tank

3.4.2.1

Gas flow to inspiratory valve The major flow of gas from the tank is to the inspiratory valve. This is an electronically-controlled, coil-operated valve that controls the flow of gas to the patient circuit. The operation of this valve is dealt with in Section 3.5.2.1, Gas flow to patient, on page 3-15. For construction details of this valve, see Section 4.6, Inspiratory valve and ambient valve, on page 4-11.

3-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing major gas flows from the tank

3.4.2.2

Gas flow to nebulizer The second largest flow of gas from the tank is to the external nebulizer jar, if this is fitted.(Figure 3-12.) Gas flow from patient to RAPHAEL’s expiratory valve Nebulizer jar Flow Sensor

Gas flow from RAPHAEL’s inspiratory valve to patient

Gas flow from RAPHAEL to nebulizer jar

Figure 3-12. The nebulizer jar

When fitted, the nebulizer is positioned between the inspiratory valve and the Y-piece. Because RAPHAEL has a tank pressure of about 1 bar, the nebulizer can be supplied directly with the mixed gas from the tank by means of a valve, without need for an additional pump. The nebulizer valve is one of the group of valves on the pneumatic block. (Figure 3-13.) To nebulizer connector on front

Nebulizer valve

Safety valve block, containing tank and patient overpressure valves Figure 3-13. The nebulizer valve and overpressure valves

The nebulizer connector on the front of the RAPHAEL (Figure 2-5 on page 2-13) is connected to the top of the pneumatic block (Figure 3-13) by one of the very few internal tubes in RAPHAEL.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-11

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

The nebulizer valve has different specifications to the mixer valves (Figure 3-7, Mixer valves in the pneumatic block, on page 3-6). WARNING For this reason, you must not exchange nebulizer and mixer valves.

You can identify new-style nebulizer valves by the gray caps on the top of the solenoid body, and by the part number printed on the solenoid body. 3.4.2.3

Gas flow through tank overpressure valve The overpressure valve serves to make sure that the tank pressure can never become dangerously high, even in the case of ventilator misfunction. It is a simple mechanical valve with no electronic connections. Together with the patient overpressure valve, it is contained in the metal safety valve block, secured directly to the pneumatic block, as shown in Figure 3-13. For construction details of this valve, see Section 4.5, Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve, on page 4-8.

3-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway

3.5

3.5.1

Components managing gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway Component functions The components that manage the gas flow in the patient circuit and airway perform the following tasks: • • • • •

June 9, 2006

Supply inspiratory gas to the patient at the correct rate Reduce pressure in the patient circuit, to allow the patient to expire Maintain pressure in the patient circuit during expiration (if PEEP/AP is set) Ensure that overpressure in the patient circuit cannot take place Ensure that the patient is free to breath in the event of complete failure in RAPHAEL

PN 61067/05

3-13

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

3.5.2

Components Figure 3-14 shows the subset of components (see ZCH614186 Blatt 2) that manage the flow of gas from the inspiratory valve, through the patent circuit, to and from the patient, and out of RAPHAEL to the environment. Gas supply from tank

Section 3.5.2.4 Autozeroing Flow Sensor autozero valves

Inspiratory valve

Section 3.5.2.1 Gas flow to patient

Expiratory valve Differential pressure measurement between two sides of Flow Sensor Pressure in patient circuit, as measured at the inspiratory valve Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve

Ambient valve Patient overpressure valve Section 3.5.2.3 Gas flow from patient

Pressure in patient airway, taken from Flow Sensor

Section 3.5.2.2 Airway gas flow Flow Sensor

Figure 3-14. Gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway

3-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway

3.5.2.1

Gas flow to patient Gas flows from the tank to the patient through the inspiratory valve. (Figure 3-15.)

Rear of RAPHAEL

Tank Inspiratory valve Outlet to to-patient port

Figure 3-15. The inspiratory valve

This is a sophisticated, electronically-controlled valve that synchronizes with the expiratory valve to raise and lower gas pressure in the patient circuit, so causing the patient to inspire and expire. The performance of the inspiratory valve is determined by the control settings made by the operator, and by the readings of the Pvent pressure sensor at the inspiratory valve outlet. For construction details of the inspiratory valve, see Section 4.6, Inspiratory valve and ambient valve, on page 4-11. To protect the patient from any failure in the gas flow from the inspiratory valve, RAPHAEL has: • A patient overpressure valve • An ambient valve Patient overpressure valve The patient overpressure valve is a simple mechanical valve that opens the patient breathing circuit to the external atmosphere in the event of overpressure. This can be caused, for instance, by RAPHAEL malfunctioning. The patient overpressure valve is housed in the safety valve block together with the tank overpressure valve. (Figure 3-13.) For construction details, see Section 4.5, Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve, on page 4-8. Ambient valve The ambient valve is a simple mechanical valve that opens the patient breathing circuit to the outside atmosphere in response to the patient’s inspiratory efforts, in the event of a machine failure. In other words, it allows the patient to inhale if he is able to do so, but does not offer active

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-15

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

ventilation . (The expiratory valve allows the patient to exhale.) The ambient valve is a part of the inspiratory valve assembly. (Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16.)

Body of inspiration valve Outlet to to-patient port

Ambient valve

Figure 3-16. Opening the ambient valve with a screwdriver

For construction details of this valve, see Section 4.6, Inspiratory valve and ambient valve, on page 4-11. 3.5.2.2

Airway gas flow Gas flow and gas pressure in the patient airway and in the tubing immediately proximal to the patient is monitored by the Flow Sensor. (Figure 3-17.)

Figure 3-17. A Flow Sensor

3-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway

The Flow Sensor is a plastic module containing a sophisticated flow restrictor with a variable orifice. It is positioned directly proximal to the patient airway, between the patient and the breathing circuit. (In other words, on the patient side of the Y-piece.) Gases moving both to, and from, the patient through it. (Figure 3-18.)

Blue (patient side) and clear (ventilator side) tubes to pressure sensors inside RAPHAEL

Flow Sensor Patient breathing circuit

Figure 3-18. The Flow Sensor in position

However, the Flow Sensor differential pressure measurement is not performed locally in the Flow Sensor, but is performed inside RAPHAEL at the dPptm sensor. At the same time, the pressure at the Flow Sensor is measured by the Pprox sensor. (Figure 3-19.)

To Flow Sensor

Flow Sensor differential pressure autozero valves

dPptm pressure sensor (differential pressure across Flow Sensor) Pprox pressure sensor (pressure at Flow Sensor)

Figure 3-19. Components associated with the Flow Sensor

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-17

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

The connection between the Flow Sensor and the pressure sensors is through the two small tubes, one clear and one blue, attached to the Flow Sensor pressure connectors on RAPHAEL’s front cover. Note The Flow Sensor does not use a flow of gas through the small blue and clear tubes to measure airway gas flow. It uses the difference in pressure between the tubes to calculate the gas flow in the airway. (There is a flow of gas through the tubes, but this is for a different reason, as described in Section 3.6.2.2, Gas for rinse flows, on page 3-22.) For construction details of the Flow Sensor, see Section 4.7, Flow Sensor, on page 4-13. 3.5.2.3

Gas flow from patient Finally, during expiration, gas from the patient airway es out of the breathing circuit through the expiratory valve and into the room. Figure 3-20 shows the valve photographed from the side, with RAPHAEL’s covers removed.

Positioning coil

Gas enters expiratory valve here at from-patient port

Gas exits expiratory valve here at exhaust port

Figure 3-20. Expiratory valve from side

3-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway

Figure 3-21 shows the valve photographed from the front, with the covers in place.

Gas exits expiratory valve at exhaust port Gas enters expiratory valve here at from-patient port Figure 3-21. Expiratory valve from front

When active, the expiratory valve: • Synchronizes with the inspiratory valve to actively ventilate the patient • Maintains positive pressure in the patient circuit (if PEEP/AP is set) When not electronically activated (for instance, during a general RAPHAEL failure) the expiratory valve functions as a simple one-way valve. In this mode, it allows the patient to expire, but not to inspire. (In this case, inspiration is allowed by the ambient valve.) For construction details of the expiratory valve, see Section 4.8, Expiratory valve, on page 4-16. 3.5.2.4

Autozeroing Introduction Autozeroing means automatically calculating and implementing a drift compensation for a pressure sensor. Regular autozeroing (the exact time depends on many factors) during normal operation is important because of the way that the characteristics of pressure sensors in RAPHAEL change with temperature. The autozeroing of the following pressure sensors ensures accurate control of gas flow to the patient: • dPptm — differential pressure between the two chambers of the Flow Sensor • Pprox — pressure in the patient circuit, as measured at the Flow Sensor • Pvent — pressure in the patient circuit, as measured at the inspiratory valve

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-19

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

Autozeroing procedure Please refer to Figure 3-14, Gas flows in the patient circuit and patient airway, on page 3-14 while looking at the following autozeroing procedure: 1. The Flow Sensor autozero valves switch so that both sides of the Flow Sensor circuit on the side of the Flow Sensor are closed, while both sides of the Flow Sensor circuit on the side of dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors are opened to atmospheric pressure. 2. RAPHAEL measures the signals at the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors, and calculates and implements the drift compensation for each sensor. 3. The Flow Sensor autozero valves switch back to their normal positions, so that the Flow Sensor is connected to the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors. 4. The Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve switches so that the Pprox pressure sensor is exposed to the same pressure as at the Pvent pressure sensor. (The pressure at Pvent is not affected by this.) 5. RAPHAEL compares the pressure that the Pvent sensor measures, to the pressure that the (already calibrated) Pprox pressure sensor measures. RAPHAEL uses this to calculate and implement the drift compensation for Pvent. 6. The Pvent autozero valve switches to its normal position. In this way, RAPHAEL automatically performs a Pvent pressure sensor autozero without this pressure sensor being exposed to any pressure other than that in the patient circuit, at the inspiratory valve. This is important, because there is a continuous analog control loop in force by which the Pvent pressure sensor controls the output of the inspiratory valve. A change of pressure at the Pvent pressure sensor would cause the inspiratory valve to perform erratically. Position of the autozero valves All autozero valves are mounted on the pneumatic block. Figure 3-22, taken from behind RAPHAEL with the covers removed, shows the Flow Sensor autozero valves. Figure 4-4 on page 4-6 shows all the autozero valves. Flow Sensor autozero valves

Pneumatic block

Figure 3-22. The Flow Sensor autozero valves

3-20

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing minor gas flows from the tank

3.6 3.6.1

Components managing minor gas flows from the tank Component functions The minor gas flows from the tank perform the following tasks: • Supply a continuous gas sample for the oxygen cell • Supply gas for the rinse flow and the extended rinse flow

3.6.2

Components Figure 3-23 shows the subset of components (see ZCH614186 Blatt 2) that manage the minor flows of gas from the tank.

Extended rinse-flow valves

Section 3.6.2.1 Sample gas supply for O2 cell

Section 3.6.2.2 Gas for rinse flows

Tank

Restrictor

O2 cell Flow restrictors to deal with possible overpressure caused by rinse flow combined with blockage in the Flow Sensor tubing

Figure 3-23. Minor gas flows from the tank

3.6.2.1

Sample gas supply for O2 cell To measure the oxygen concentration of the gas supplied to the patient, RAPHAEL uses a replaceable oxygen cell. The cell fits in a holder screwed into the bottom of RAPHAEL’s chassis, as shown in Figure 3-24 on page 3-22, and also in Figure 2-5, The RAPHAEL front , on page 2-13. The tank supplies the oxygen cell with a very small, continuous stream of gas, the flow being controlled by restrictor 14. (Figure 3-23.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-21

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

Oxygen cell holder

Figure 3-24. Removing the oxygen cell

For more information about the oxygen cell, see Section 5.3, Oxygen cell, on page 5-16. 3.6.2.2

Gas for rinse flows Normal rinse flow To stop the movement of condensation, bacteria and viruses from the Flow Sensor to the valves and sensors inside the ventilator, RAPHAEL supplies a continuous flow of gas from the tank, through the small blue and transparent pressure-sampling tubes, to the Flow Sensor. (The rate is 1.9 to 4.7 ml/min.) This rinse flow is provided by the two restrictors numbered 12. One controls the blue tube, the other the transparent tube. This rinse flow is therefore controlled mechanically, not electronically, the rate

3-22

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Components managing minor gas flows from the tank

of flow being determined by the characteristics of the restrictors or “pills”. The “pills” are embedded in the pneumatic block, as shown in Figure 3-25.

Extended rinse flow pills

Rinse flow “Pills”, below tubing leading to the Flow Sensor connectors on the front

Figure 3-25. The rinse flow and extended rinse flow “pills”

Extended rinse flow In addition to the normal, continuous rinse flow, RAPHAEL also provides a periodic extended rinse flow to the Flow Sensor. The extended rinse flow is switched by the two solenoid valves numbered 4 and 5, and by two “pill” flow restrictors, each numbered 11in Figure 3-23. A photograph of the “pill” flow restrictors is shown in Figure 3-25, and a photograph of the extended rinse flow solenoid valves in Figure 3-26. Extended rinse flow valves

Figure 3-26. The extended rinse flow valves

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

3-23

3 Gas flows in RAPHAEL

The extended rinse flow operates every two minutes, provides a flow of approximately 360 ml/min, and enables RAPHAEL to: • Test that the Flow Sensor is properly connected • Test the blue (patient side) and clear (ventilator side) tubes for kinks or blockages due to condensation Rinse flow over-pressure protection To prevent the possibly dangerous buildup of pressure that would be caused by the rinse flow if a blockage or kink in the blue and white tubes took place, RAPHAEL includes a simple method of protection, in the form of the two “pill” flow restrictors numbered 15 in Figure 3-23 on page 3-21. These flow restrictors vent gas into the patient circuit.

3-24

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

4

4

Details of gas flow components

4.1

Overview This section details the purpose and construction of each of the main components that manages the flow of gas through RAPHAEL. The section is version-specific: where different models of RAPHAEL, RAPHAEL Silver, or RAPHAEL Color contain different components, these are discussed. • For more information about the physical positions of these components in RAPHAEL, see Section 2, Construction of RAPHAEL. • For an overview of the logical relationships of components within the gas circuits that make up RAPHAEL, see Section 3, Gas flows in RAPHAEL. The components covered in this section are: • • • • • • •

4.2 4.2.1

Section 4.2, Oxygen and air water traps, on page 4-1 Section 4.3, Solenoid valves, on page 4-4 Section 4.4, Tank, on page 4-6 Section 4.5, Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve, on page 4-8 Section 4.6, Inspiratory valve and ambient valve, on page 4-11 Section 4.7, Flow Sensor, on page 4-13 Section 4.8, Expiratory valve, on page 4-16

Oxygen and air water traps Purpose The purpose of the oxygen and air water traps is to provide a clean and dry source of oxygen and air to the mixer valves that regulate the flow of these gases into the tank.

4.2.2

Placement The water traps are at the rear of the RAPHAEL, as shown in Figure 3-4 on page 3-5.

4.2.3

Description and function There are two types of water trap: • The standard type, delivered with RAPHAEL. This type is suitable for both air and oxygen inlets. • The self-emptying type, available as an accessory, in kit PN 157359. (Since November 2004, and on a temporary basis only, one self-emptying water trap is being supplied with every RAPHAEL.) This type is particularly useful in very humid climates, but is not required in most countries. WARNING The self-emptying type of water trap is suitable only for the air inlet. To reduce risk of fire, it must not be used on the oxygen inlet.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-1

4 Details of gas flow components

4.2.3.1

The standard water trap The construction of the standard water trap is shown in Figure 4-1. The oxygen and air traps are identical except for the screw connector to the external gas supply, which is different for oxygen and air.

Gas flows into RAPHAEL here Gas from hospital supply enters at connector

Screw thread on PN 279808 (PN 279808 available as a separate part) Gas flow through microfilter

High-level mark for water

Microfilter (ed by black plastic assembly)

Bowl

Water release/pressure check valve Figure 4-1. Details of the standard water trap (with air connector)

The flow of gas through the water traps is as follows: • Firstly, oxygen or air from an external source (compressor, cylinder or piped supply) enters at the rear of the metal housing. • The gas flows into the center of the microfilter, and is forced out through the microfilter. During this process, any condensed water can drip into the clear plastic bowl. • Finally, gas flows back up into the metal housing, and into RAPHAEL. You can use the valve at the bottom of the water trap to release water (but be careful of overflows!) or you can use it to make sure that gas pressure is present, if no water is condensed. 4.2.3.2

The self-emptying water trap The construction of the self-emptying water trap is shown in Figure 4-2. The trap is only available for the air inlet.

4-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Oxygen and air water traps

The flow of gas through the trap is identical to the flow though the standard water trap. However, there is an automatic, rather than a manual water release valve, and there is no high-water mark. Instead, the trap empties itself automatically when necessary, provided that the drain screw is turned fully clockwise. Alternatively, the can empty the valve manually, by turning the drain screw anti-clockwise.

Gas flows into RAPHAEL here Gas from hospital supply enters at connector

Screw thread on PN 279808 (PN 279808 available as a separate part) Gas flow through filter Microfilter (ed by black plastic assembly)

Bowl

Drain screw (Must be turned fully clockwise for automatic draining. The screw has a reversed thread.)

Figure 4-2. Details of the self-emptying water trap (only available for air)

4.2.4

Further information and specifications Depending upon the installation, water can condense and collect in the water trap. If this happens in a standard trap, the water must be regularly drained before it covers the high water mark printed on the bowl. This task is normally performed by hospital staff. CAUTION You must inform hospital staff that they must empty standard water traps as required, because water ing into RAPHAEL can cause the unit to fail. Providing that there is no high pressure hose connected, the easiest way of emptying a standard water trap is by unscrewing the bowl, not by pushing the water release/pressure check valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-3

4 Details of gas flow components

In all types of trap, the 5 μm microfilter (PN 279676) must be replaced when it becomes dirty. This task is also normally performed by hospital staff. For more information, see RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent. Oxygen and air must enter the inlets on the water traps at a pressure of 2 to 6 bar (29 to 87 PSI). The water traps are fitted with DISS connections for Europe, or NIST connections for the rest of the world. (See also Appendix H, NIST and DISS connectors.)

Figure 4-3. Air and oxygen DISS, and air and oxygen NIST connectors

Replacement parts The following replacement part is available for the self-emptying water trap: PN 7249057

Tube, 4 mm ID x 7 mm OD. (Order by meter.)

You may replace the drain tube using ordinary tubing with an internal diameter of 4-5 mm and a length not exceeding 2 m.

4.3 4.3.1

Solenoid valves Purpose Note The inspiratory valve and expiratory valve are not classed as solenoid valves, as they can be controlled by degree, rather than having only open and closed states. RAPHAEL has eight 12 V solenoid valves:

4-4

• The air and oxygen mixer valves

These control the inflow of the air and oxygen from the water traps to the tank, as described in Section 3.3.2.3, Gas flow through mixer valves, on page 3-6.

• The nebulizer valve

This controls the flow of gas from the tank to the nebulizer, as described in Section 3.4.2.2, Gas flow to nebulizer, on page 3-11.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Solenoid valves

• The two autozero valves

These open the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors (that measure the pressure difference across the two chambers of the Flow Sensor, and the pressure at the Flow Sensor, respectively) to ambient pressure, so that each pressure sensor can perform a zero-point-drift compensation. This is described in Section 3.5.2.4, Autozeroing, on page 3-19.

• The Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve

This exposes the Pprox pressure sensor (measuring at the Flow Sensor) to the pressure at the Pvent pressure sensor (measuring at the inspiratory valve). Because at this time Pprox is already calibrated, the Pvent pressure sensor can perform a zero-point-drift compensation by comparing itself to the Pprox pressure sensor reading. This is explained in Section 3.5.2.4, Autozeroing, on page 3-19.

• The two extended rinse flow valves

These periodically gas from the tank through the clear and blue tubes attaching the Flow Sensor to the front . This flow of gas is called the extended rinse flow. It enables RAPHAEL to test the connection of the Flow Sensor, and to check for kinks in the blue (patient side) and clear (ventilator side) connecting tubes. This is explained in Extended rinse flow on page 3-23.

4.3.2

Placement All the solenoid valves are mounted directly on the pneumatic block, as shown in Figure 4-4 on page 4-6.

4.3.3

Description and function The solenoid valves mounted on the pneumatic block have only two states: open and closed. However, because of their ability to switch very quickly (10 to 25 ms to change states), they can very precisely control the quantities of gas ing through. This is particularly important for the two mixer valves that control the flow of oxygen and air into the tank.

4.3.4

Further information and specifications All the solenoid valves are sealed units, and cannot be serviced. They cannot be damaged by electrostatic discharge, but can be damaged by water or dirt entering through the oxygen or air water traps.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-5

4 Details of gas flow components

Extended rinse flow, distal (left) and proximal (right) Nebulizer Oxygen mixer

Air mixer

Flow Sensor (differential pressure) dPptm autozero distal (left) and proximal (right)

Flow Sensor Pvent autozero

Figure 4-4. The solenoid valves

4.4 4.4.1

Tank Purpose The purpose of the tank (or reservoir) is to supply air and oxygen, mixed in the correct ratio, at a fairly constant pressure to: • • • •

The inspiratory valve The nebulizer The Flow Sensor (for the rinse flow and extended rinse flow) The oxygen cell (to provide a sample for measurement)

For information about the function of the tank in the context of the complete pneumatic system, see Section 3.3.2.5, Gas flow through tank, on page 3-8. 4.4.2

Placement The tank screws into a fitting on the pneumatic block, and is situated in the center of the RAPHAEL. You can see the tank in its position in RAPHAEL in Figure 3-10 on page 3-8; you can see it dismantled in Figure 4-5 on page 4-7.

4-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Tank

4.4.3

Description and function The tank is a simple aluminium vessel holding two liters of gas at approximately 1000 mbar (in other words, 1000 mbar above atmospheric pressure, or twice atmospheric pressure). This is equivalent to approximately four liters at atmospheric pressure. Because of its relatively large volume, the tank has a buffering effect on the flow of gas through it, thereby ensuring that the outflow to the inspiratory valve is much smoother than the inflow from the mixer valves that control the gas input into RAPHAEL. This buffering effect can be quantified, and is expressed as compliance. RAPHAEL’s tank has a compliance of about 2 ml/mbar. This means that to raise the pressure in the tank by 1 mbar, 2 ml of gas must flow into the tank. In addition, the tank provides a place for the inlet gases (air and oxygen) to mix, and enables RAPHAEL to deliver high flows of gas to the patient, over short periods of time. Gas inlet to the tank is by means of an inlet pipe with a permeable plastic nipple through which the gas is forced. (Figure 4-5.) This arrangement ensures thorough mixing of the gases, and silencing of the gas flow.

Gas inlet nipple

Pneumatic block Inspiratory valve

Figure 4-5. The tank, unscrewed from the pneumatic block

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-7

4 Details of gas flow components

Gas outlet to the pneumatic block is through an orifice in the base of the mounting, as shown in Figure 4-5.

Inlet pipe screws into place here

Gas outlet from tank

Figure 4-6. Pneumatic block, showing gas outlet from tank

4.4.4

Further information and specifications The tank is not a critical item in RAPHAEL. Minor dents occurring during servicing are not important. However, it is important that the tank is turned fully home in its housing and makes a gas-tight seal with the pneumatic block.

4.5 4.5.1

Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve Purpose The purpose of the tank overpressure valve is: • To stop pressure in the tank from being able to reach dangerously high pressures in the case of RAPHAEL malfunctioning • To enable the RAPHAEL to purge the tank with oxygen or air when the changes the air/oxygen ratio setting (excess gas is vented through the tank overpressure valve) The purpose of the patient overpressure valve is to stop the patient breathing circuit from being able to reach dangerously high pressures in the case of RAPHAEL misfunctioning. For information about the function of the tank overpressure valve in the context of the complete pneumatic system, see Section 3.4.2, Components, on page 3-10. For more information about the patient overpressure valve, see Section 3.5.2, Components, on page 3-14.

4-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve

4.5.2

Placement Both the overpressure valve for the tank, and the overpressure valve for the patient breathing circuit are contained in the safety valve block. This is attached directly to the pneumatic block as shown in Figure 3-13 on page 3-11, and in Figure 4-7 below.

Gas flow

Figure 4-7. Gas flow in the safety valve block

WARNING Gas from the safety valve block exits through the chassis, underneath RAPHAEL. If the exit holes are blocked (for instance, by placing RAPHAEL on a soft surface) the patient overpressure and tank overpressure valve cannot operate properly.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-9

4 Details of gas flow components

4.5.3

Description and function As you can see from Figure 4-8, both valves are of a simple mechanical construction, each allowing a flow of gas in one direction only.

Gas flow in

Seal at orifice

Patient overpressure valve Tank overpressure valve Ball bearing Setting collar for ing spring Spring

Gas flow out through chassis Figure 4-8. Details of construction and gas flow in the safety valve block

Each valve comprises: • A spring held in position by a collar • A ball-bearing • An orifice The tank overpressure valve has a thicker spring than the patient overpressure valve. 4.5.4

Further information and specifications The valves are adjusted in the factory by screwing the collar in or out. The collar is then sealed in place (old type) or locked in place with a grub screw (new type). WARNING Valves must not be adjusted in the field.

4-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Inspiratory valve and ambient valve

4.6 4.6.1

Inspiratory valve and ambient valve Purpose The purpose of the inspiratory valve is to deliver the air and oxygen mixed in the tank to the breathing circuit, at the required pressure. The purpose of the ambient valve is to open the breathing circuit to the outside atmosphere in event of RAPHAEL completely failing, thereby allowing the patient to inhale. In this situation, the expiratory valve, functioning ively, allows the patient to exhale. In event of such a complete ventilator failure, these two valves therefore allow the patient to breath for himself (if he can) but offer no active assistance. For information about the function of the inspiratory valve in the context of the complete pneumatic system, see Section 3.5.2.1, Gas flow to patient, on page 3-15.

4.6.2

Placement The inspiratory and ambient valves are combined in one assembly normally referred to as the “inspiratory valve”. This is situated immediately behind the pneumatic block, as shown in Figure 2-4 on page 2-8 and Figure 3-15 on page 3-15.

4.6.3

Description and function The inspiratory valve is a sophisticated, electronically-operated valve, capable of being controlled very precisely. The ambient valve is a simple, mechanical device, with a very low opening pressure. Figure 4-9 on page 4-12 shows a photograph of an inspiratory valve assembly that has been cut open to reveal details of both the inspiratory and ambient valves inside. The inspiratory valve is in the closed position — it is not activated, and gas cannot flow through it. Similarly, the ambient valve is in its normal, ive, closed position.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-11

4 Details of gas flow components

Magnet Coil Plunger Gas seal Spring Gas entry port from pneumatic block (partly obscured)

Rubber seal between upper and lower parts Upper chamber Gas seal and bearing Cutaway in plunger

Gas exit port to pneumatic block (partly obscured)

Sintered disk filter and sound absorber Lower chamber Exit toward to-patient port

Ambient valve

Figure 4-9. Details of the inspiratory valve

During normal ventilation, the inspiratory valve functions as follows: • Gas enters

Gas from the tank flows through the pneumatic block and enters the upper chamber of the inspiratory valve at the gas entry port shown in Figure 4-9.

• Valve is activated

When a higher pressure is required in the patient circuit, RAPHAEL activates the coil, making the plunger move very slightly upward. Gas flows from the upper chamber, through the cutaway in the plunger, through the sintered disk filter, and into the lower chamber. RAPHAEL controls the flow of gas very precisely. Activation and deactivation are not simple open/close actions.

• Gas exits

Gas flows out of the valve through the to-patient port and then to the patient circuit. In some circumstances, gas can also flow out of the valve through the gas exit port to the pneumatic block and the patient overpressure valve. (For more information, see Section 4.5, Tank overpressure valve and patient overpressure valve, on page 4-8.) The gas exit port also supplies the gas pressure for the Pvent pressure sensor.

4-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Flow Sensor

If normal ventilation is not possible (because the RAPHAEL cannot function for some reason) but the patient has some ability to breath independently, he can do so through the ambient valve that is built into the inspiratory valve.

Air flow when ambient valve open

Figure 4-10. Demonstrating the action of the ambient valve using a screwdriver

In this case, the breathing effort of the patient causes the ambient valve to open, and air is drawn into the valve from under the RAPHAEL casing, as shown in Figure 4-10. Note The ambient valve does not assist a patient’s breathing in any way. It only permits a patient to inhale if the patient already has some ability to do so.

4.6.4

Further information and specifications WARNING • •

Never apply oil to the inspiratory or ambient valves. Never block the ventilation slot in the base of RAPHAEL, as this is required by the ambient valve when RAPHAEL is in the ambient state.

For details of maintaining the inspiratory valve, see Section 15.3, Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves, on page 15-3.

4.7 4.7.1

Flow Sensor Purpose The purpose of the Flow Sensor is to enable RAPHAEL to measure the flow and pressure of the gases moving to and from the patient’s airway. For information about the function of the Flow Sensor in the context of the complete pneumatic system, see Section 3.5.2.2, Airway gas flow, on page 3-16.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-13

4 Details of gas flow components

4.7.2

Placement The Flow Sensor is placed in the patient tubing in a spur coming off the patient circuit, connecting to the patient. (In other words, between the patient and the Y-piece.) We say that the Flow Sensor is proximal to the patient. You can see a diagram of this in Figure 3-2 on page 3-3. Notice that while gas flow in the patient circuit is in one direction only, flow in the spur (and through the Flow Sensor) is in two directions. Details of the connections are shown in Figure 4-11. Blue (patient side) and clear (ventilator side) tubes to pressure sensor inside RAPHAEL

Pressure difference to RAPHAEL

Gas to/from RAPHAEL

Y-piece

Airway gas to/from patient

Figure 4-11. The Flow Sensor connections

Figure 4-12 shows a photograph of the Flow Sensor in position.

Blue (patient side) and clear (ventilator side) tubes to pressure sensors inside RAPHAEL

Flow Sensor Patient breathing circuit

Figure 4-12. The Flow Sensor in position

4-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Flow Sensor

4.7.3

Description and function There are two types of Flow Sensor: single-use and reusable (although, in some countries, only one type is available). Both are for adult and pediatric use. (Figure 4-13.)They are very similar in

PN 279362 pediatric/adult reusable

PN 279331 pediatric/adult single-use

Figure 4-13. The two Flow Sensors available

appearance and they function identically. The following description therefore applies to both kinds. The Flow Sensor is a plastic module comprising two chambers separated by a flexible plastic membrane into which a variable orifice is cut. (Figure 4-14.)

Variable orifice in membrane

Gas flow during expiration Higher pressure

Lower pressure

Gas flow during inspiration Lower pressure

Higher pressure

Figure 4-14. Operation of all Flow Sensors

The movement of airway gases during respiration causes pressure differences between the two chambers of the Flow Sensor. These differences are increased by the slight resistance of the variable orifice, which has strongest effect at the low gas flows that are otherwise most difficult to accurately measure. As RAPHAEL ventilates the patient, the gas flow continually changes direction. This causes a process in which the higher-pressure side of the Flow Sensor becomes the lower-pressure side, and then again becomes the higher-pressure side. (Figure 4-14.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-15

4 Details of gas flow components

Because there is a known relationship between the rate of flow through the sensor, and the pressure difference across the two chambers, RAPHAEL can calculate the rate and direction of the gas flow. This measurement does not take place at the Flow Sensor. It takes place inside RAPHAEL at the dPptm sensor (shown in Figure 3-19 on page 3-17). The connection between the Flow Sensor and this pressure sensor is through the two small tubes, one clear and one blue, as shown in Figure 3-18 on page 3-17. Note The Flow Sensor does not require a flow of gas through the small connecting tubes to measure airway gas flow; it uses instead the pressure difference between the connecting tubes. (There is a flow of gas through the tubes, but this is for a different reason, as described in Section 3.6, Components managing minor gas flows from the tank, on page 3-21.)

4.7.4

Further information and specifications Because of the very accurate monitoring of airway gases that is possible with the Flow Sensor, RAPHAEL is able to accurately synchronize its ventilation with patient breaths.

4.8 4.8.1

Expiratory valve Purpose The purpose of the expiratory valve is to: • Enable gas to escape from the patient breathing circuit in a controlled manner, so as to allow the patient to exhale • Maintain PEEP/AP if required To do this, the action of the expiratory valve is closely synchronized with that of the inspiratory valve. For information about the function of the expiratory valve in the context of the complete pneumatic system, see Section 3.5.2.3, Gas flow from patient, on page 3-18.

4.8.2

Placement The expiratory valve is mounted on the chassis at the front of RAPHAEL. You can see this clearly in Figure 4-15 on page 4-17, as well as in Figure 2-5 on page 2-13.

4.8.3

Description and function As shown in Figure 4-15, Figure 4-16, and Figure 4-17, the expiratory valve comprises: • A plastic case that includes the from-patient port and exhaust port • A large silicone membrane, positioned in the plastic case, that covers the inlet orifice of the from-patient port • A positioning coil, positioned outside the plastic case, that controls the opening of the silicone membrane

4-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Expiratory valve

Exhaust port From-patient port

Figure 4-15. The expiratory valve in position

The parts of the valve through which gas flows (the plastic case and membrane) are external to RAPHAEL, while the positioning coil driving the plunger is inside the RAPHAEL enclosure.

Front cover

Expiratory valve positioning coil

Chassis

Membrane inside plastic housing

Exhaust port (gas exits into environment here) From-patient port (gas enters here)

Figure 4-16. The complete expiratory valve

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-17

4 Details of gas flow components

Silicone membrane

Gas flow into environment at exhaust port

Gas flow into valve at from-patient port

Figure 4-17. External parts of the expiratory valve

Figure 4-18 shows details of the gas flow through the expiratory valve:

Metal plunger of positioning coil (coil not shown) Silicone membrane

Plastic casing From-patient port orifice

From-patient port

Exhaust port

Figure 4-18. Details of gas flow through the expiratory valve

The most critical part of the flow is the point at which the silicone membrane seals the from-patient port orifice. When the valve is ive, the patient can freely exhale through it. This is important in the case of a complete RAPHAEL failure, in which case the patient can inspire through the ambient valve (if he is able to do so — he receives no active assistance from RAPHAEL). In normal use, the expiration valve: • Synchronizes with the inspiratory valve to enable patient inspiration • Synchronizes with the inspiratory valve to enable patient expiration • Maintains a positive airway pressure (PEEP/AP) in the patient circuit, if required

4-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Expiratory valve

4.8.4

Further information and specifications The design of the expiratory valve allows expired gas to through the valve and into the room without entering the body of the RAPHAEL. Therefore, by replacing the patient tubing, the plastic valve body, and the membrane, you can replace all parts with which expiration gases come into . WARNING Never attach a spirometer or any other device or tube to the exhaust port. A spirometer attached to the exhaust port gives inacurate readings, and causes RAPHAEL to lose full control of PEEP/AP. WARNING When fitting the silicone membrane, make sure it is positioned as shown in Figure 4-17, External parts of the expiratory valve. The expiratory valve is easy to maintain, is autoclavable, and is very competitively priced. The RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent contains details of sterilizing procedures.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

4-19

4 Details of gas flow components

4-20

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

5

5

Electronic components

5.1

Introduction This section describes RAPHAEL’s electronic components: • • • • • • • •

Section 5.2.1, Mainboard, on page 5-1 Section 5.2.2, Display Control Unit (DCU) board, on page 5-11 Section 5.2.3, Communication interface board, on page 5-12 Section 5.2.4, dc/ac board, on page 5-12 Section 5.2.5, Power supply board and backup batteries, on page 5-13 Section 5.3, Oxygen cell, on page 5-16 Section 5.4, Pressure sensors, on page 5-20 Section 5.5, Fan, on page 5-23

Apart from the fan, the ancillary components such as the keyboards and on/off switch are not discussed in this section, but are covered briefly in Section 2.3.1, Chassis, on page 2-4. This section is version-specific: where different models of RAPHAEL, RAPHAEL Silver, and RAPHAEL Color contain different components, these are all discussed.

5.2

Printed circuit boards In this section we briefly describe the functions of each circuit board. We do not look at the boards at component level, since boards cannot be repaired in the field.

5.2.1

Mainboard Note The mainboard described here is the latest model. Older versions of the mainboard are similar, but not necessarily identical. For full details, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility and Appendix F, Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility.

5.2.1.1

Placement The mainboard is mounted on the top of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4.

5.2.1.2

Overview The principle function of the mainboard is to: • • • •

June 9, 2006

Take the analog output signals from RAPHAEL’s pressure sensors Convert these analog signals to digital signals Apply logic to the digital signals Generate digital signals to control RAPHAEL’s solenoid valves

PN 61067/05

5-1

5 Electronic components

• Generate analog signals to control RAPHAEL’s inspiratory valve and expiratory valve In addition to this, the mainboard also provides: • Two separate systems for continuously monitoring alarm conditions • Electronic for the RS232 port The following sections look at the various aspects of the mainboard’s functions. Each section corresponds to one of the schematics included in Appendix J, Spare parts and schematics. 5.2.1.3

Processing and alarm monitoring systems The following description corresponds to the schematic BD614196 Blatt 1. Check the schematic against the similar image displayed in Figure 5-1.

5-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Printed circuit boards

Figure 5-1. BD614196 Blatt 1

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-3

5 Electronic components

The two processing systems The mainboard contains two complimentary but independent processing systems: • Microprocessor C167CR and related components

This is the main processor in RAPHAEL. Its primary function is to monitor anaputs from the pressure sensors, and to generate digital outputs to control the valves. Its secondary function is to manage a sophisticated alarm-condition monitoring system.

• Alarm monitor ASIC and related components

This ASIC has one function: to manage an alarm-condition monitoring system that functions completely independently of the more sophisticated alarm system managed by μP C167CR. This backup alarm system triggers in the event of near or total system failure, including times at which μP C167CR cannot function. (In practice, some alarm conditions trigger both alarm systems. For more information about alarms, see Section 14.2, Understanding RAPHAEL alarms, on page 14-1, and the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent.)

5-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Printed circuit boards

Details of the microprocessor C167CR processing system Microprocessor C167CR is ed by the following physical and logical components: • EPROM 27C4002 #1

Contains the software program that controls μP C167CR.

• EPROM 27C4002 #2

On second generation of board only. For holding graphics definitions for the color TFT display.

• RAM HM62128

On first generation of board only. Provides memory for μP C167CR.

• RAM HM62512

Installed on some boards as an aid to research and development.

• RAM with clock DS1746P

Provides memory for μP C167CR, and contains the real-time clock (RTC). On second generation boards onward.

• RAM HY628400

Can provide memory for μP C167CR. However, is not used, except in development.

• UART TL16C550B

Provides the RS232 port electronics. The port is connected to the mainboard at connector P20.

• P8 “Debug” connector

A connector for use only by research and development.

• P12 Testconnector 3

A set of test pins used with the test software accessed in test mode. (See Figure 9-7, Test pin values for test connectors 3 and 1, on page 9-7.)

• Power Supply Status

A piece of logic positioned physically on the power supply. It is used to inform μP C167CR and the alarm monitor ASIC of the status of the power supply. Any problem with the power supply causes an alarm.

• p-source / Exp Valve

A regulatory loop on the mainboard that manages the inspiratory valve. Its task is to keep the pressure of the gases in the patient airway at the required level.

• SW Status

A set of four LEDs controlled by μP C167CR, positioned on the mainboard. The LEDs indicate software status.

• EEPROM serial

Provides the configuration settings for μP C167CR.

• S1 DIP-Switch

A set of four micro-switches that enable the to put RAPHAEL into test mode.

• μP Startup Config

Determines aspects of the way in which μP C167CR runs. For instance, the bus system.

• Loudspeaker

Provides the alarm sounds for the main alarm system based on μP C167CR. It s the mainboard at connector P5. Its volume is adjusted with jumper P6.

Details of the ASIC alarm monitor processing system The alarm monitor ASIC PN 157249 is ed by the following physical and logical components: • Buzzer

June 9, 2006

Provides the alarm sound used by the alarm monitor system. It functions completely independently of the loudspeaker controlled by μP C167CR. See also 5 V Backup power supply on page 5-6.

PN 61067/05

5-5

5 Electronic components

• μP Watchdog

Monitors the microprocessor, and informs the alarm monitor ASIC of alarm conditions.

• Backup Reset

A piece of logic that watches over the 5 V Backup power supply on page 5-6. It generates a reset if the 5 V supply drops below 4.75 V.

• 32.768 KHz

The clock that sets the frequency for the alarm monitor ASIC.

• 5 V Backup power supply

Because the alarm monitor system functions totally independently of μP C167CR, it must have its own power source. This is provided by two high-performance capacitors that can power the buzzer for more than two minutes of continuous sound. (See also Buzzer above.)

• 12 V Fan

This logical component continually monitors the ventilation fan. Electronic failure or physical interruption causes an alarm.

• p-source / Exp Valve

The process named p-source / Exp Valve (explained in Details of the microprocessor C167CR processing system on page 5-5) is continually monitored. In fact, the current to the inspiratory valve and expiratory valve is monitored.

5.2.1.4

• Power Supply Status

This logical component continually monitors the status of the power supply for μP C167CR.

• Power Supervisor

This logical component continually monitors the outputs from the power supply.

Pressure sensors and valves management on microprocessor C167CR The following description corresponds to the schematic named Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael Sensor/Valves, and numbered BD614196 Blatt 2. Check the schematic against the similar image displayed in Figure 5-2.

5-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Printed circuit boards

Figure 5-2. BD614196 Blatt 2

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-7

5 Electronic components

Sensing devices On the left of the schematic are the four symbols shown in Figure 5-3.

Pressure sensors

Oxygen cell

Figure 5-3. Sensing devices shown in schematic BD614196 Blatt 2

These symbols represent the following sensing devices: • Ptank pressure sensor

Measures the pressure in the tank (or reservoir).

• dPblende pressure sensor (also called dPmixer)

Measures the differential pressure across the sintered disk flow restrictor placed at the inlet to the tank. (This is labelled (13) in schematic ZCH614186 Blatt 2.) RAPHAEL calculates the flow of gas to the tank from this measurement.

• Pprox pressure sensor

Measures the pressure proximal to the patient airway. (This is near to valve (16) in schematic ZCH614186 Blatt 2.)

• dPptm pressure sensor

Measures the differential pressure between the two chambers of the Flow Sensor. (This is near to valve (16) in schematic ZCH614186 Blatt 2.) From this measurement, RAPHAEL calculates the flow of gas to and from the patient.

• oxygen cell

Measures the partial pressure of oxygen in the mixture in the tank.

The four pressure sensors connect to the mainboard at connector J5. The oxygen cell connects at connector P4. (See Figure 5-7 on page 5-11.) Each sensor outputs an analog electrical signal.

5-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Printed circuit boards

Preprocessing of sensor signals The following two columns of symbols (Figure 5-4) represent processes and components that affect the input signals before they are fed into microprocessor C167CR.

Voltage to frequency converter symbol

Bessel low- filter symbol

Test pin symbol Amplifier symbol

Figure 5-4. Input processes shown in schematic BD614196 Blatt 2

As can be seen, all signals are amplified. Some also require a low- Bessel filter. The signal from the dPblende pressure sensor is converted to a frequency. At this point, you can test all signals at the test pins shown in Figure 5-5.

Front cover

Test pins

Figure 5-5. The mainboard, showing test pins

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-9

5 Electronic components

Processing of sensor signals The signals are fed into the microprocessor, where the following processes take place: • Conversion of the input signals from analog to digital • Application of the logic contained in EPROM 27C4002 • Output of digital control signals for the inspiratory valve, expiratory valve, and the solenoid valves on the pneumatic block (the digital signals for the inspiratory and expiratory valves are converted to analog signals on the mainboard before being fed to the valves) Processing of control signals Each control signal now es through an output transistor, which has the effect of amplifying it to the 15 V necessary to operate the valves. (Figure 5-6.)

Figure 5-6. Output amplification in schematic BD614196 Blatt 2

The final control signals are output to the following connectors (Figure 5-7 on page 5-11): • P17: Flow Sensor autozero valves, Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve, extended rinse flow valves • P18: mixer valves, nebulizer valve • P19: inspiratory valve • P7: expiratory valve

5-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Printed circuit boards

Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board

J5 (pressure sensor inputs)

Front cover

P19

P18

P17 P7

Figure 5-7. The mainboard, showing input and output connectors for

microprocessor C167CR 5.2.2 5.2.2.1

Display Control Unit (DCU) board Placement The Display Control Unit (DCU) board, or graphics controller board, is positioned on top of the mainboard, as shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4 and Figure 5-7.

5.2.2.2

Description and function The DCU board is a standard display card that can be used for many purposes. The windows you see on the RAPHAEL display comprise predefined graphical elements and text that are ed into the PROM memory on the board at the factory and during some software updates. The display windows and text are then called up, by number, over a serial interface, in response to: • The operating the press-and-turn knob or keys • The patient breathing (the patient determines many of the numerics displayed) All operating languages and graphics are built into each Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. Therefore, if you need to replace a board, there is only one DCU board part number to consider. In software versions 1.x and 2.*C, text and graphics can be ed to the DCU board from the software PROM during the boot procedure in the event of an error on the DCU board, or after you have performed a software upgrade. With other software versions, this is not the case.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-11

5 Electronic components

5.2.3 5.2.3.1

Communication interface board Placement Where fitted, the communication interface board is mounted on the rear of the chassis, so that the two ports protrude at the rear of RAPHAEL. This is shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4.

5.2.3.2

Description and function The communication interface board is an option that the customer can order from the factory with RAPHAEL, or that you can fit in the field. However, if fitting in the field, note that the communication interface board can only function with the mainboards PN 157265 and PN 157373, as these boards are fitted with a suitable interface board connector. The communication interface board mounts directly on the chassis, and provides two ports: • The RS232 port can communicate with peripherals such as a computer or monitor. It is used for patient data, including waveforms. • The Special port can be used to activate an external nurse alarm, external nebulizer, or external nitric oxide device. For full information, see Section 6, The optional communication interface. For details of the RS232 communication protocols, see Appendix A, RS232 port configuration settings and messages.

5.2.4 5.2.4.1

dc/ac board Placement The dc/ac board is mounted under the front cover, immediately above the display, as shown in Figure 2.3.6 on page 2-14.

5.2.4.2

Description and function The function of the dc/ac board is to provide a high voltage to illuminate the monochrome display in RAPHAEL, or the color display RAPHAEL Color and RAPHAEL XTC. The board takes its input from the 5 V supply. WARNING Output from the board is approximately 1700 V unloaded.

5-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Printed circuit boards

There are three types of dc/ac board. They are similar in appearance, and are mounted in an identical manner. (Figure 5-8.)

The HITACHI board used in all RAPHAELs apart from RAPHAEL Color and RAPHAEL XTC. (PN 396150)

The TDK board used in RAPHAEL Color. (PN 396167)

The TDK board used in RAPHAEL XTC. (PN 396193)

Figure 5-8. The three types of dc/ac board

5.2.5 5.2.5.1

Power supply board and backup batteries Placement The power supply board is located on a drawer that slides into the main body of RAPHAEL, in approximately the middle of the unit. Both it and the batteries are completely covered by RAPHAEL’s outer casing. You can see photographs of these components in their positions in RAPHAEL in: • Power supply board on page 2-6 • Backup batteries on page 2-7.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-13

5 Electronic components

You can see the power supply board alone in Figure 5-9, and one of the backup batteries in Figure 5-10.

Figure 5-9. The power supply board

Figure 5-10. BB 12 V backup battery

5-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Printed circuit boards

5.2.5.2

Description and function Power supply board This unit is a standard modern switched power supply that provides power to RAPHAEL at a number of voltages. (Figure 5-11.) Nominal 28 V supply

+5 V 220V or 110V

Second stage of power supply

First stage of power supply

+15 V -15 V

Test measurement point Nominal 26 V supply to charge battery Two 12 V backup batteries, wired in series Figure 5-11. Simplified diagram of power supply

The power supply has two stages. Mains input voltages to the first stage of the power supply are: • 100 V to 125 V (50 to 60 Hz at 0.7 A) • 200 V to 240 V (50 to 60 Hz at 0.35 A) Output voltages from the second stage of the power supply are: • +5 V • +15 V • -15 V The output voltages are generated from a supply of 24 to 28 V. This can come from: • The primary side of the switching power supply • The backup batteries The wide flexibility of input voltages means that RAPHAEL can function in a wide range of countries without the need for additional power supply boards. The Test measurement point shown in Figure 5-11 on page 5-15 is where voltage is measured in: • Test 14: Supply Voltages, on page 11-85 • Test 15: Supply Voltages, on page 12-111 • Test 15: Supply Voltages, on page 13-113 Backup batteries The backup batteries comprise two sealed 12 V lead/acid batteries that can keep RAPHAEL functioning for between 30 minutes and two hours without mains power. You do not have to service the batteries, but you must replace them approximately every three years, depending on their usage and operating environment.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-15

5 Electronic components

While connected to a mains supply (whether RAPHAEL is switched on or off) RAPHAEL continuously charges the batteries. During mains operation, RAPHAEL performs a battery check every 20 minutes (with software version 1.x and 2.*) or 30 minutes (with software version 3.*). The sees no evidence of this check providing the batteries are in good condition.

5.3

Oxygen cell WARNING Do not dispose of oxygen cells in fire.

5.3.1

Placement The oxygen cell is mounted in the oxygen cell holder, which screws into the chassis immediately beneath the front cover. This is shown in Figure 2-5 on page 2-13 and in O2 cell holder on page 2-15.

5.3.2

Description and function The oxygen cell measures the partial pressure of oxygen in the gas in the tank, and therefore the gas supplied from the tank to the patient circuit. Because the cell is not physically positioned in the tank, it must be continuously supplied with a small flow of gas from the tank. This is documented in Section 3.6, Components managing minor gas flows from the tank, on page 3-21. Because of the very small flow of gas used for sampling, and because the oxygen cell is open to the room air, sampling takes place at ambient pressure. The synchronizing of the opening of the mixer valves to enable the inflow of oxygen and air is not dependent upon the measurement of the oxygen cell (see Section 3.3.2.3, Gas flow through mixer valves, on page 3-6 and Section 3.3.2.4, Gas flow through sintered disk flow restrictor, on page 3-7). For this reason, RAPHAEL can function without the oxygen cell. WARNING Although RAPHAEL can funtion without its oxygen cell, the cell serves a safety function by enabling the to monitor the level of oxygen delivered to the patient. For this reason, RAPHAEL must never be used without the oxygen cell present, and oxygen monitoring configured as “on”.

There are two oxygen cells available for RAPHAEL, produced by the following manufacturers: • MSA (Catalyst research) • Teledyne (Sensor technologies) Both units are Galvanic fuel cells that produce a voltage (around 10 mV, depending on the oxygen concentration) in response to a chemical reaction with oxygen. 5.3.3

Further information Considerations for use The oxygen cell and holder are reliable devices, but if misused can fail to function properly. Make sure that you and the hospital staff you are aware of the information in the following warning.

5-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Oxygen cell

WARNING • • • •

To function properly, the oxygen cell holder must have its O-ring present, and must be fully tightened into place. The gas exhausts in the oxygen cell holder must not be blocked. If RAPHAEL cannot calibrate an oxygen cell, you must replace the cell with a new one. An oxygen cell must not be used immediately it is taken from cold storage. It must first be allowed to come up to ambient temperature to prevent condensation forming.

Working life Because of the build-up of lead at the anode, both types of cell supplied by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG have a limited working life and must be replaced when RAPHAEL can no longer calibrate them. Typically, this is about a year for a new cell (although lifespan depends on the oxygen concentration at which they are used: the higher the concentration, the shorter the working life). Table 5-1, which displays manufacturers’ figures, compares the cells: Feature

MSA

Teledyne

Measurement range

0 to 100% O2

0 to 100% O2

Operating temperature

-5° C to 50° C

0° C to 50° C

Table 5-1. Oxygen cell characteristics

Storage life At HAMILTON MEDICAL AG, we have found that the storage life of all cells depends largely on temperature. When kept refrigerated and in their original packing, storage life increases significantly. CAUTION Do not open the container in which the cell is packed, until you want to use the cell. The container holds a special gas that lengthens the storage life of the cell.

Warranty period The oxygen cell is a disposable item, and as such does not have a warranty. However, an active lifetime of at least 1 year, beginning at the date marked on the cell, can be anticipated. This date is embossed in the rim of the MSA cell, as shown in Figure 5-12. It is printed on the Teledyne cell, as shown in Figure 5-13:

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-17

5 Electronic components

Date stamp

Figure 5-12. Date stamp on the MSA oxygen cell PN 396008

Date stamp

Figure 5-13. Date stamp on the Teledyne oxygen cell PN 396009

5-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Oxygen cell

The code shown on the following tables is used for the date stamp on both kinds of oxygen cell: Letter

Month

A

January

B

February

C

March

D

April

E

May

F

June

G

July

H

August

I

September

J

October

K

November

L

December

Table 5-2. Code for month on oxygen cell

Number

Year

4

2004

5

2005

6

2006

7

2007

8

2008

9

2009

10

201

Table 5-3. Code for year on oxygen cell

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-19

5 Electronic components

5.4 5.4.1

Pressure sensors Placement RAPHAEL uses five pressure sensors, all of which are mounted directly on the pneumatic block. These are shown in schematic ZCH157276 Blatt 1, a part of which is displayed in Figure 5-14, and in the photograph in Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-14. The gas pressure sensors on the pneumatic block

5-20

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Pressure sensors

dPptm

Pprox (under metal cover)

Ptank

Pvent

dPmixer

Figure 5-15. The gas pressure sensors on the pneumatic block 5.4.2

Description and function The five pressure sensors are: • dPptm

Tachometer differential pressure. (Differential pressure across Flow Sensor.) This is shown in detail in Figure 5-16.

• Pprox

Proximal pressure. (Pressure at Flow Sensor.) This is shown in detail in Figure 5-17. Note The following pressure sensors look very similar to the Pprox sensor. However, they not exchangeable.

• Ptank

Tank pressure.

• dPmixer

Mixer differential pressure. (Differential pressure across sintered disk flow restrictor.)

• Pvent

Patient circuit pressure, as measured at the inspiratory valve outlet.

The pressure sensors have no moving parts, require no servicing, and are extremely reliable. However, they can be damaged by electro-static discharge (ESD). Because they are sealed units, pressure sensors cannot be repaired, and must be replaced if they fail.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-21

5 Electronic components

You cannot adjust the pressure sensors directly. Instead, you calibrate RAPHAEL to compensate for performance changes in the pressure sensors over time. You do this by running the test software in RAPHAEL’s test mode. Radio interference shield

Sealing rings

Radio interference shield top

Pressure sensor

PC Board

Push-fit connections to pneumatic block

spring

Figure 5-16. The dPptm pressure sensor assembly

Screw connection to pneumatic block

Figure 5-17. The Pprox pressure sensor

5-22

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Fan

5.5 5.5.1

Fan Placement The fan is mounted on the chassis, at the rear of RAPHAEL. It is covered by the top enclosure, on which are fitted the fan filter, and the filter cover. (Figure 5-18 and Figure 5-19).

Figure 5-18. The fan, top enclosure removed

Filter

Gauze

Cover

Figure 5-19. The fan filter, gauze, and filter cover, top enclosure in place

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

5-23

5 Electronic components

5.5.2

Description and function The purpose of the fan is: • To stop oxygen accumulating inside RAPHAEL, and thereby stop the risk of explosion. • To provide cooling to the electrical circuits. The fan draws room air through a filter, and blows it into RAPHAEL. The air circulating inside RAPHAEL is therefore always clean. WARNING To prevent oxygen accumulation in the ventilator, and the associated risk of fire, never block the air exit holes for the fan.

Figure 5-20. The fan air exit holes

5.5.3

Further information As with many parts of RAPHAEL, the fan is connected to both alarm systems. Electrical failure or physical mechanical interruption causes an alarm. You or a member of hospital staff must replace (or wash) the filter regularly as indicated in the maintenance schedule in the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent.

5-24

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

6

6

The optional communication interface

6.1

Introduction This section describes the functions, pin locations and pin assignments of the RS232 and the Special ports of the communication interface. For more information about the protocols used by the RS232 port, see Appendix A, RS232 port configuration settings and messages. For general information about the communication interface board, see Section 5.2.3, Communication interface board, on page 5-12.

6.2 6.2.1

RS232 port Overview The RS232 port enables RAPHAEL to send patient data and patient waveforms, ventilation modes, control settings, and alarms to a patient monitor or a computer. When sent to a patient monitor, s have the advantage of being able to read all patient data and patient waveforms from one display. However, alarms are not always displayed identically on the patient monitor to the manner in which they are displayed on RAPHAEL. (For information about alarm message limitations, see Appendix A.3, Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems, on page A-2.) When sent to a computer, data can be manipulated using software such as Microsoft Excel. This is useful for data management and clinical studies. To use the RS232 port with an external device, you require additional hardware. This is documented in Section 6.2.2, Sending data to a patient monitor and Section 6.2.3, Sending data to a computer, on page 6-2. Pin locations and assignments are documented in Section 6.2.4, RS232 pin locations and assignments, on page 6-3.

6.2.2

Sending data to a patient monitor The RS232 port s a number of patient monitors in addition to HAMILTON MEDICAL’s LEONARDO. WARNING Not all monitors provide detailed alarm message information. For more information, see Appendix A.3, Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems.

Using the RAPHAEL with a patient monitor requires the hardware shown in Figure 6-1. Suitable interfacing hardware, specific to the manufacturers’ monitors, must be ordered directly from the monitor manufacturer.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

6-1

6 The optional communication interface

Full details of patient monitors ed, and hardware required are available in RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent.

RS232C

Monitor module suitable for HAMILTON MEDICAL ventilators Patient monitor

9- to 25-pin adaptor

RAPHAEL

Communications cable (shielded and grounded on one side only) Figure 6-1. RAPHAEL connected to a patient monitor

6.2.3

Sending data to a computer Sending data requires the hardware shown in Figure 6-2. It also requires the RAPHAEL Data Logger software and manual, which can be ed from the HAMILTON MEDICAL website, in the “Science” section (www.hamilton-medical.com). WARNING Any computer connected to the RAPHAEL must be for medical use, and must meet the requirements of IEC 60601-1. Do not connect an ordinary personal computer, because such computers do not fulfill the requirements of the standard. Consult a technical specialist or safety inspector in your hospital for more information.

RS232C Computer

RAPHAEL

Printer 9- to 25-pin adaptor Communications cable (shielded and grounded on one side only) Figure 6-2. RAPHAEL connected to a computer

6-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

RS232 port

6.2.4

RS232 pin locations and assignments Figure 6-3 shows the locations of the RS232 port connector pins. Table 6-1 lists the pin assignments.

Pin 1

Pin 6

Pin 5 Pin 9

Figure 6-3. RS232 port connector pin locations

RS232 port connector Pin

Signal

1

GND

2

RXD

3

TXD

4

DTR

5

GND (signal ground)

6

DSR

7

RTS

8

CTS

9

--

Shield

Chassis ground

Table 6-1. RS232 port connector pin assignments

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

6-3

6 The optional communication interface

6.3 6.3.1

Special port Overview The 15-pin Special port can be used to send inspiratory:expiratory timing signals for istering nitric oxide or for controlling an external nebulizer. It can also be used for activating a remote nurse alarm. The remote alarm (nurse’s call) capability allows alarm conditions to be indicated at locations away from the ventilator (for example, when the ventilator is in an isolation room). To use the Special port with an external device, you require additional hardware. This is documented in Section 6.3.2, Sending inspiratory:expiratory (I:E) timing signals and Section 6.3.3, Sending a remote nurse alarm. Pin locations and assignments are documented in Section 6.3.4, Special port pin locations and assignments, on page 6-5.

6.3.2

Sending inspiratory:expiratory (I:E) timing signals To use inspiratory:expiratory timing signals for controlling external equipment, you must fit the hardware shown in Figure 6-4.

Communications cable (shielded and grounded on one side only)

RAPHAEL 15-pin male connector

External device

Figure 6-4. RAPHAEL connected to an external device through the Special port

6.3.3

Sending a remote nurse alarm The remote alarm capability is based on a relay inside the RAPHAEL. CAUTION The functionality of this relay was changed in March 2004, to make it consistent with GALILEO. • For revision 00 interface boards (PN 157269/00), the non-alarm and alarm positions of the relay are shown in Figure 6-5. • For revision 01 interface boards (PN 157269/01), the non-alarm and alarm positions of the relay are shown in Figure 6-6.

6-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Special port

In both cases, you can use either pins 7 and 14, or pins 7 and 6, depending on the logic of your nurse call system.

14

14 Output

Output 6

6

7

7

Relay position in alarm condition, (alarm not silenced)

Relay position in non-alarm condition, or alarm silenced, or ventilator unpowered

Figure 6-5. Remote alarm relay positions on interface board PN 157269/00

14

14 Output

Output 6

6

7

7

Relay position in non-alarm condition, or alarm silenced

Relay position in alarm condition (alarm not silenced) or ventilator unpowered

Figure 6-6. Remote alarm relay positions on interface board PN 157269/01

Note The RAPHAEL alarm silence key silences the audible portions of the alarms at both the ventilator and the remote alarm device.

6.3.4

Special port pin locations and assignments Figure 6-7 shows the locations of the Special port connector pins. Table 6-2 lists the pin assignments.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

6-5

6 The optional communication interface

CAUTION • Do not use any of the undescribed pins of the Special port. • The maximum allowable voltage and current between the relay s is 48 V and 0.5 A.

Pin 1

Pin 9

Pin 6 (Remote alarm return) Pin 7 (Remote alarm) Pin 8 (I:E relay)

Pin 14 (Remote alarm return) Pin 15 (I:E relay return)

Figure 6-7. Special port connector pin locations

6-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Special port

Special port connector Pin

Signal Interface board PN 157269/00

Interface board PN 157269/01

1

None

None

2

None

None

3

None

None

4

None

None

5

None

None

6

Remote alarm return (Closed in non-alarm condition.)

Remote alarm return (Open in non-alarm condition.)

7

Remote alarm

Remote alarm

8

I:E relay

I:E relay

9

None

None

10

None

None

11

None

None

12

None

None

13

None

None

14

Remote alarm return (Open in non-alarm condition.)

Remote alarm return (Closed in non-alarm condition.)

15

I:E relay return

I:E relay return

Table 6-2. Special port connector pin assignments 6.3.5

Electrical specifications of Special port Parameter

Value

Maximum voltage between relay s

48 V

Maximum current through relay s

0.5 A

Table 6-3. Electrical specifications of the Special port

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

6-7

6 The optional communication interface

6-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Part 2: Preventative maintenance and testing

PN 61067/05

Section

7

7

Overview of preventive maintenance and testing

7.1

Introduction WARNING • •

• • • • •

You must perform all preventive maintenance and testing once a year. To do this, you perform all the steps shown in Table 7-2. You must complete a service training course for RAPHAEL ventilators with HAMILTON MEDICAL before undertaking the maintenance, testing or replacement procedures described in this manual. If the pneumatic block fails, replace it. Never attempt to repair the pneumatic block. Never clean the pneumatic block. Never allow alcohol near the pneumatic block. To reduce risk of fire, never use the self-emptying water trap on the oxygen inlet. To prevent disease transmission, you must use personal protective equipment when handling contaminated bacterial filters or other patient accessories. Refer to one of the operator’s manuals for instructions on sterilizing patient system parts.

CAUTION Make sure to take full ESD (electrostatic discharge) precautions before handling any EPROM, or before opening RAPHAEL. For more information, see Appendix G, Maintenance tools and test equipment.

7.2

Check your software level In general, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG recommend that you always update to the latest software available. Software is shown in Appendix D, Upgrade routes and kits, although for the latest changes you must look on the HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Partner Website (http://www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site). WARNING You must upgrade immediately if you have software version 1.0. Note There is a particular recommendation to update if you have software version 2.2*. The reason for this is that under very specific conditions, the precision of RAPHAEL's adaptive volume controller can be impaired. As a result, RAPHAEL sometimes fails to fully compensate for compliance and resistance changes. Note, however, that the functionality of the alarms is at no time affected; there is therefore no risk to the patient, providing the operates the ventilator in accordance with the manual.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

7-1

7 Overview of preventive maintenance and testing

7.3

Check you have all the items you require For normal maintenance and testing (not repairing) you require the following parts: Step

Items required, or possibly required

• Hospital preventive maintenance

• Fan filter PN 281264 • Flow Sensor: PN 279331, pediatric/adult, single-patient use PN 155362, pediatric/adult, reusable • Oxygen cell: PN 396008 from Catalyst PN 396009 from Teledyne

• Engineer preventive maintenance

• BERULUB OX 40 EP or similar grease suitable for pneumatic fittings. • Gas supply microfilters: PN 279676 • In addition, the following tubing can be useful for the self-emptying water trap: PN 7249057 Tube, 4 mm ID x 7 mm OD. (Order by meter.)

• Backup battery and voltage tests • Running version 1.x test software

• Service tools, as shown in Appendix G, Maintenance tools and test equipment.

• Running version 2.* test software

• Glass of water.

• Running version 3.* test software

Table 7-1. Items required for maintenance and testing

7-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Procedure

7.4

Procedure Work methodically through the sections shown in Table 7-2.

Repeat until all tests run correctly

WARNING Maintenance and testing is not complete until all steps are successfully performed.

Step

Task

1

Perform (or assure yourself that someone else has performed) the preventive maintenance normally undertaken by hospital staff.

Section 8.1, Hospital preventive maintenance, on page 8-1.

5–15 min

2

Perform the engineer preventive maintenance.

Section 8.2, Engineer preventive maintenance, on page 8-1.

10 min

3

Perform the backup battery and voltage tests.

Section 9, Backup battery and voltage tests.

15 min

4

Perform the electrical safety tests.

Section 10, Manual electrical safety tests.

10 min

Perform the tests and calibrations in the test software built into RAPHAEL.

Depending on the software installed in your RAPHAEL, these are described in:

5

Where found

Time Required

Optionally, if you have the necessary equipment, also perform the tests shown in Appendix I, Automated electrical safety tests. 90 min

• Section 11, Running version 1.x test software • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software

6

Perform any replacements necessary.

Section 15, Maintenance and replacement procedures

Unknown

7

Lock all the potentiometer adjustment screws in place using proprietary locking paint or nail varnish.

No special description included in manual.

2 min

8

Finish the testing of the unit by completing the tasks documented in the Tests and calibrations section of the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual.

RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994).

10 min

Table 7-2. Overview of maintenance and testing

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

7-3

7 Overview of preventive maintenance and testing

7-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

8

8

Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance

8.1

Hospital preventive maintenance Perform (or assure yourself that someone else has performed) all preventive maintenance normally undertaken by hospital staff. This is detailed in the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) and local-language equivalents, and also outlined below in Table 8-1. Part/accessory

Procedure

Breathing circuit (including inspiratory filter, Flow Sensor, expiratory valve housing and membrane).

Replace with sterilized or new single-patient use parts. Run the tightness test and Flow Sensor test, as required.

Breathing circuit.

Empty any water from hoses or water traps. Inspect parts for damage. Replace as necessary.

Air-inlet water trap, gas-inlet water trap.

Empty any water.

Air-inlet self-emptying water trap (where fitted).

None.

Fan filter (rear ).

Check for dust and lint. If needed, clean or replace. (Details in operating manual.)

Oxygen cell.

Replace if exhausted. If exhausted, one of the following messages appears on screen during normal operation: • O2 cell defective • No O2 cell in use

Table 8-1. Hospital preventive maintenance tasks

8.2 8.2.1 8.2.1.1

Engineer preventive maintenance Dealing with water traps Do you need a self-emptying water trap? Some RAPHAELs in the field have a self-emptying water trap fitted to the high-pressure air inlet. If the RAPHAEL that you are maintaining does not have a self-emptying trap, consider fitting one. WARNING To reduce risk of fire, never use the self-emptying water trap on the oxygen inlet.

Deciding whether to fit the self-emptying water trap In most countries in the world, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG has experienced no problems with water entering RAPHAEL through the air inlet when the normal (non-self-emptying) water trap is fitted.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

8-1

8 Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance Nevertheless, you must give consideration to fitting the self-emptying water trap included with RAPHAEL. Table 8-2offers guidance: Reasons for fitting the self-emptying water trap • The self-emptying water trap does not require manual emptying, and is therefore particularly suited to operation with damp air supplies. • You use VENTILAIRII as your air supply. • You operate RAPHAEL in Asia, or in a hot and humid country. • You know that the RAPHAEL air supply is damp.

Reasons for not fitting the self-emptying water trap • The self-emptying water trap dumps water vigorously. • The water from the self-emptying trap must be channeled with a pipe to a suitable receptacle. The receptacle could be a nuisance. • The self-emptying trap is larger than the normal water trap, and requires that the shelf mount (but not the trolley) be adapted to house it. • Cleaning the self-emptying water trap lengthens the yearly maintenance.

Table 8-2. Considerations for fitting the self-emptying water trap

If you have decided not to fit the self-emptying water trap, go now to Section 8.2.1.2, General maintenance of water traps. If you have decided to fit the self-emptying water trap, go now to Section , Fitting the self-emptying water trap. Fitting the self-emptying water trap 1. Unscrew the non-self-emptying water trap from the air inlet, as shown in Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1. Unscrewing the non-self-emptying water trap from the air inlet

8-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Engineer preventive maintenance

2. Screw in the self-emptying water trap to the air inlet, as shown in Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2. Screwing the self-emptying water trap into the air inlet

Preparing the self-emptying water trap for use Before operating the ventilator with the self-emptying water trap, make sure the drain screw is turned fully clockwise (the thread is fully extended) as shown in Figure 8-3. This action activates the automatic self-emptying function. Note The thread is reversed: turning clockwise unscrews it.

Clockwise

Fully extended (open)

Figure 8-3. Activating the self-emptying function

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

8-3

8 Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance

8.2.1.2

General maintenance of water traps This section applies to both the standard and to the self-emptying water trap. 1. Inspect the microfilters on the water traps. • Details of the standard water trap are shown in Figure 8-4 on page 8-4. • Details of the self-emptying water trap are shown in Figure 8-5 on page 8-5. 2. Replace the microfilters if dirty or discolored. Note You require only one type of filter, PN 279676. It fits all types of water trap: standard air, standard oxygen, and self-emptying air trap. If the microfilters are very discolored, consider: • Changing the filters more regularly than during yearly maintenance only. • Improving the cleanliness of the hospital gas supplies. 3. Clean the filter housings if necessary.

Gas flows into RAPHAEL here Gas from hospital supply enters at connector

Screw thread on PN 279808 (PN 279808 available as a separate part) Gas flow through microfilter

High-level mark for water

Microfilter (ed by black plastic assembly)

Bowl

Water release/pressure check valve

Figure 8-4. Details of the standard water trap (with air connector)

8-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Engineer preventive maintenance

Gas flows into RAPHAEL here Gas from hospital supply enters at connector

Gas flow through filter

Screw thread on PN 279808 (PN 279808 available as a separate part) Microfilter (ed by black plastic assembly)

Bowl

Drain screw (Must be turned fully clockwise for automatic draining)

Figure 8-5. Details of the self-emptying water trap (only available for air) 8.2.1.3

Special maintenance of the self-emptying water trap If there is a self-emptying water trap fitted to RAPHAEL’s air inlet, perform the maintenance described in this section. If there is no self-emptying water trap, go to Section 8.2.2, Internal cable and tubing checks, on page 8-9. During cleaning and maintenance, use Figure 8-6 as a reference.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

8-5

8 Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance

Figure 8-6. Exploded view of water trap self-emptying mechanism

8-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Engineer preventive maintenance

Perform the following steps: 1. Unscrew nut 5 using a 17 mm wrench (spanner), and remove the complete self-emptying mechanism from the bowl.

Figure 8-7. Unscrewing nut 5

2. Pull the float assembly 11, 10 and 1, from the main body assembly. (These assemblies snap apart.)

Figure 8-8. Pulling float assembly from main body

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

8-7

8 Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance

3. Separate main body parts 8 and 2. (These snap apart.)

Figure 8-9. Separating body parts

4. Clean washers 15 and 16, and filters 13 and 14. 5. Apply pneumatic grease to washers 15 and 16. 6. Reassemble, making sure that: • Seal 6 is positioned with the black washer facing downwards (Figure 8-10). • The shallow, wide cutouts on main body 8 and cap 11 are facing forwards (Figure 8-11).

Pin 10

Seal 6

Black washer

Figure 8-10. Position of seal 6

8-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Engineer preventive maintenance

Cap 11

Wide cut-outs at front

Body 8

Pin 10

Figure 8-11. Position of cut-outs

CAUTION Before operating the ventilator with the self-emptying water trap, make sure the drain screw 17 is turned fully clockwise to activate automatic, periodic dumping. You may replace the drain tube using ordinary tubing with an internal diameter of 4-5 mm and a length not exceeding 2 m.

8.2.2

Internal cable and tubing checks 1. Disconnect all tubing and cables (pneumatic and electric) from the RAPHAEL. 2. Using a 2.5mm hexagonal (Allen) key, remove the 8 screws that secure the closure. Four screws are at the rear of RAPHAEL, four are underneath. (Figure 8-12.) 3. Remove the closure. 4. that all cables and tubing in RAPHAEL are in good condition, connected, and in the right place.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

8-9

8 Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance

Figure 8-12. Positions of the 8 screws you remove to open RAPHAEL

5. Make sure the tubing for the oxygen cell measurement is not squeezed between the tank and the white inspiratory tube. (Figure 8-13.)

Oxygen measurement tube

Patient outlet

Figure 8-13. The position of the oxygen measurement tube

6. Check all assemblies for damage and incorrect installation.

8-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Engineer preventive maintenance

8.2.3

External checks 1. Make sure the expiratory valve ring turns smoothly and that the valve plunger pin is clean and moves up and down easily (Figure 8-14). If cleaning is required, see Section 15.3.3, Cleaning the expiratory valve, on page 15-14.

Valve plunger pin

Expiratory valve ring

Figure 8-14. The expiratory valve ring and plunger pin

2. Make sure the oxygen cell holder is in place and the O-ring is present. (Figure 8-15.)

O-ring

Figure 8-15. The oxygen cell holder O-ring

3. Make sure the air and oxygen inlet connectors are mounted correctly. 4. Go to Section 9, Backup battery and voltage tests.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

8-11

8 Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance

8-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

9

9

Backup battery and voltage tests

9.1

Introduction For this series of tests you require: • A multimeter • A watch, clock, or timer displaying seconds The tests you perform are: • Section 9.3, Mainboard voltages test: You make sure that the required voltages are available at the mainboard. • In Section 9.4, 12 V batteries condition test: You measure the performance of the two 12 V backup batteries under load and over time. • Section 9.5, Connector condition test: You test the quality of the connections between the 12 V backup batteries and mainboard.

9.2 9.2.1

Backup battery replacement Checking the age of the backup batteries 1. Partially remove the batteries from the RAPHAEL, so that the date stamps are visible. (Figure 9-1.)

Figure 9-1. The date stamp on the top of each battery

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

9-1

9 Backup battery and voltage tests

2. Determine type of the batteries: • BB: The latest battery type used in RAPHAEL. (Figure 9-2.) • YUASA: An intermediate battery type used in RAPHAEL. (Figure 9-3.) • MICROLYTE Plus: The original battery type used in RAPHAEL. (Figure 9-4.)

Figure 9-2. BB 12 V backup battery

Figure 9-3. YUASA 12 V backup battery

Figure 9-4. MICROLYTE Plus 12 V backup battery

9-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Backup battery replacement

3. Locate the date stamp. Figure 9-5 shows the stamp on a BB battery. Other date stamps are similarly placed.

Date code on top of battery

Figure 9-5. Detail of date stamp on BB battery type

4. Read the date, according to the battery type. • For BB backup batteries, read the date using Table 9-1. • For YUASA batteries made in Taiwan, read the date using Table 9-2. • For YUASA batteries made in Japan, read the date using Table 9-3. • For YUASA batteries made in the UK and USA, read the date stamp using Table 9-4. • For MICROLYTE Plus batteries, read the date stamp using Table 9-5. Code key

ppyymmdd

Explanation

Example for code AA031209

• p p is a code indicating an internal product line.

• AA Meaning unknown.

• y y is a pair of numerals, and indicates the year of manufacture.

• 03 The year 2003.

• m m is a pair of numerals, and indicates the month of manufacture.

• 12 The twelfth month of year: December.

• d d is a pair of numerals, and indicates the day of the month of manufacture.

• 09 The ninth day of the month.

Table 9-1. Codes for BB 12 V backup batteries

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

9-3

9 Backup battery and voltage tests

Code key

yymmddfc

Explanation

Example for code 0206133Q

• y y is a pair of numerals, and indicates the year of manufacture.

• 02 The year 2002.

• m m is a pair of numerals, and indicates the month of manufacture.

• 06 The sixth month of year: June.

• d d is a pair of numerals, and indicates the day of the month of manufacture.

• 13 The thirteenth day of the month.

• f is a numeral, and indicates a factory (unimportant for HAMILTON MEDICAL AG).

• 3 The factory code 3 (unimportant).

• c is an upper case alphabetic character, and indicates a code associated with manufacture (unimportant for HAMILTON MEDICAL AG).

• Q The code 3 (unimportant).

Table 9-2. Codes for YUASA Taiwan 12 V backup batteries

Code key yymmddc

Explanation

Example for code 9703211

• y y is a pair of numerals, and indicates the year of manufacture.

• 97 The year 1997.

• m m is a pair of numerals, and indicates the month of manufacture.

• 03 The third month of year: March.

• d d is a pair of numerals, and indicates the day of the month of manufacture.

• 21 The twenty-first day of the month.

• c is a numeral, and indicates a code associated with manufacture (unimportant for HAMILTON MEDICAL AG).

• 1 The code 1 (unimportant).

Table 9-3. Codes for YUASA Japan 12 V backup batteries

Code key ymmddcc

Explanation

Example for code 7032152

• y is a numeral, and indicates the year of manufacture.

• 7 The year 1997.

• m m is a pair of numerals, and indicates the month of manufacture.

• 03 The third month of year: March.

• d d is a pair of numerals, and indicates the day of manufacture.

• 21 The twenty-first day of the month.

• c c is a pair of numerals, and indicates a manufacturing code (unimportant for HAMILTON MEDICAL AG).

• 52 The manufacturing code 52 (unimportant).

Table 9-4. Codes for YUASA UK and USA 12 V backup batteries

9-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Backup battery replacement

Code key ywwd

Explanation • y is one of the following upper case alphabetic characters, and indicates the year of manufacture: • • • • • •

Example for code I132 • I The year 1999.

H (1998) I (1999) J (2000) K (2001) L (2002) M (2003)

• w w is a pair of numerals, and indicates the week of manufacture.

• 13 The thirteenth week of the year.

• d is a numeral, and indicates the day of manufacture.

• 2 The second day of the week: tuesday.

Table 9-5. Codes for MICROLYTE Plus 12 V backup batteries

5. If the batteries are more than three years old, replace them now according to Section 15.5, Changing the 12V batteries, on page 15-17.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

9-5

9 Backup battery and voltage tests

9.3 9.3.1

Mainboard voltages test Overview In this test, you make sure that all the voltages on the mainboard are correct. Some of these voltages represent power supplied directly from the power supply, some are created on the mainboard itself.

9.3.2

Procedure WARNING Be careful not to inadvertently short pins together. 1. Make sure the backup batteries are correctly connected to the power supply board. 2. Connect mains power and switch the unit on. 3. Locate test connectors 3 and 1 on the mainboard. (Figure 9-6 on page 9-6.) Use a multimeter to check all voltages on both connectors, as shown in Figure 9-7 on page 9-7. Always measure between the ground (GND) and the corresponding signal. Test connector 1

Test connector 3

Figure 9-6. The position of test connectors 3 and 1 on all mainboards (details of

other components can vary) 4. If you have mainboard PN 157373, locate the three-pin test connector on the mainboard. (Figure 9-8 and Figure 9-9 on page 9-8.) Use a multimeter to check both voltages, as shown in Figure 9-9, Test pin values for the three-pin test connector (on mainboard PN 157373 only), on page 9-8. Always measure between the ground (GND) on Test connector 1 and the corresponding signal. Note Do not use the middle pin on the three-pin test connector.

9-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Mainboard voltages test

Test connector 3

Test connector 1 GND (Ground) You measure from this point for all tests on connector 1

GND (Ground) You measure from this point for all tests on connector 3

+5 V BACKUP (4.8 to 5.2 V) -10 V (-9.98 to -10.02 V) +10 V (9.98 to 10.02 V) +24 V (26.6 to 30.0 V) -15 V (-13.5 to -16.5 V) +15 V (13.5 to 15.75 V)

+5.0 V Ref (4.99 to 5.01 V)

+5 V (4.95 to 5.25 V)

Figure 9-7. Test pin values for test connectors 3 and 1

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

9-7

9 Backup battery and voltage tests

The three-pin test connector Microswitches

Figure 9-8. The position of the three-pin test connector (on

mainboard PN 157373 only)

Microswitches

3.3 V BACKUP (+3.2 to +3.4 V)

3.3 V (+3.2 to +3.4 V) Figure 9-9. Test pin values for the three-pin test connector (on

mainboard PN 157373 only)

9-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Mainboard voltages test

9.3.3

Troubleshooting mainboard voltages test

Test connectors 3 and 1

Failed Pin

Actions

+5 V

1.

Check cabling from power supply board to the test connectors.

+15 V

2.

If the cabling is in order, replace the power supply board.

-15 V +5 V Ref + 5 V BACKUP -10 V

If voltages shown above (+5 V, +15 V and -15 V) are in order, replace the mainboard. Otherwise, check the power supply board.

Three-pin test connector (Mainboard PN 157373 only.)

+10 V +24 V

Go to Section 9.4, 12 V batteries condition test, on page 9-10.

+3.3 V BACKUP

If voltages shown at top of this table (+5 V, +15 V and -15 V) are in order, replace the mainboard. Otherwise, check the power supply board.

+3.3 V

1.

Remove the power supply from the display to determine whether their is a fault in the display.

2.

Replace the mainboard.

Table 9-6. Mainboard voltage test troubleshooting

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

9-9

9 Backup battery and voltage tests

9.4 9.4.1

12 V batteries condition test Overview In this test, you measure battery voltage against time, while at the same time activating valves within RAPHAEL to create current drain. You test two completely separate performance characteristics: • The absolute battery voltage after a first, 2-minute period of battery use. This voltage must be greater than, or equal to 23.5 V (≥23.5 V). • The drop in battery voltage after a second, 3-minute period of battery use. This drop must be less than, or equal to 0.5 V (≤0.5 V). Figure 9-10 shows the performance characteristics of three imaginary battery pairs. 3 minutes operation

2 minutes operation Battery pair A: Fail

Battery Voltage (V)

25 24.9 V (Good) Drop of 0.7 V (Fail)

Battery pair B: Drop of 0.1 V (Good)

24

24.1 V (Good)

Battery pair C: Fail

23.4 V (Fail)

23 0

1

2

3 Time (min)

4

5

Figure 9-10. Examples of acceptable and unacceptable 12 V

batteries • Battery pair A displays more than 23.5 V after the first period of use. However, it has a drop of more than 0.5 V after the second period of use. It therefore fails. • Battery pair B displays more than 23.5 V after the first period of use. It has a drop of less than 0.5 V after the second period of use. It therefore es. • Battery pair C displays less than 23.5 V after the first period of use. It therefore fails. 9.4.2

Procedure Note You can only perform this test when RAPHAEL is at room temperature (20–30°C).

9-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

12 V batteries condition test

9.4.2.1

Overview The overview in Figure 9-11 exactly matches the detailed description in Section 9.4.2.2, Detailed instructions. You might find it useful to refer to while performing these instructions. Replace batteries

8. Note voltage.

0

1

2

≥ 23.5 V

Timed period

3

4

Drop ≤ 0.5 V

Next test

Timed period

Drop >0.5 V 9. Note voltage drop.

7. Remove mains cable.

6. Activate V1 to V5.

< 23.5 V 5. Enter test 5 or test 6.

4. Enter test software mode.

3. Connect mains cable.

2. Connect multimeter to 12 V batteries.

1. Switch RAPHAEL off.

Charge or replace batteries

5

Minutes

Figure 9-11. 12 V batteries condition test procedure

9.4.2.2

Detailed instructions 1. Ensure RAPHAEL is switched off. 2. Connect a multimeter, set to measure voltage, across the two 12 V batteries, as shown in Figure 9-12. Note Be sure to connect the probes directly on the battery s, and not on any other part of RAPHAEL.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

9-11

9 Backup battery and voltage tests

Positive (+) 24 V

Probes directly connected to battery s

Negative (-) Multimeter probes

Figure 9-12. Test meter probes connected directly to battery

s 3. Ensure that the mains cable is attached to RAPHAEL, and is supplying power. 4. Enter test software mode. 5. Enter, but do not perform, one of the following tests: • Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul., on page 11-35 of Section 11, Running version 1.x test software • Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul., on page 12-47 of Section 12, Running version 2.* test software. 6. Activate : V1, : V2, : V3, : V4, : V5. 7. Remove the mains cable and wait exactly 2 minutes. 8. Make a note of the voltage displayed on the multimeter. • If the voltage is ≥23.5 V, wait exactly 3 minutes, and go to step (9) below. • If the voltage is <23.5 V, stop the test and go to Section 9.4.2.3, If the voltage is too low, on page 9-13. 9. Make a note of the voltage displayed on the multimeter. • If the voltage drop between step (8) and step (9) is ≤0.5 V, the batteries are in good condition. Go to Section 9.5, Connector condition test. • If the voltage drop between step (8) and step (9) is >0.5 V, the batteries are not in good condition. Replace the batteries, and repeat Section 9.4.2.2, Detailed instructions, on page 9-11. 10. Remove the multimeter probes from the batteries.

9-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

12 V batteries condition test

9.4.2.3

If the voltage is too low If the voltage of the batteries is <23.5 V when measured in step (8) on page 9-12, perform Section 9.5, Connector condition test. If this does not resolve the problem, you can do one of two things: • Charge the batteries for 6 hours and repeat Section 9.4.2, Procedure, on page 9-10. (To charge the batteries, you simply leave RAPHAEL attached to mains power. It is not necessary to switch it on.) • Replace the batteries, and repeat Section 9.4.2, Procedure, on page 9-10.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

9-13

9 Backup battery and voltage tests

9.5

Connector condition test Note This test assumes that you have just performed Section 9.4, 12 V batteries condition test, that the five valves are still active, and that the mains power supply is disconnected. If this is not the case, perform step (1) on page 9-11 to step (6) on page 9-12 now.

9.5.1

Overview In this test you check the condition of all electrical connections between the batteries and the mainboard. You do this by measuring the voltage differences between the batteries and the mainboard.

9.5.2

Procedure 1. Check the voltage difference between the battery negative and the mainboard ground: a. Connect the positive multimeter probe to the ground pin on test connector 1. (Figure 9-13 on page 9-14.) b. Connect the negative multimeter probe to the negative of the batteries. (Figure 9-12 on page 9-12.) c. Ensure that the difference in voltage between battery negative and test pin ground is equal or smaller than 0.5 V (≤ 0.5 V). d. Disconnect the multimeter.

Ground test pin

≤ 0.5 V Ω

ON OFF

V dc V ac 200 mA 10 A A VΩ com mA Negative battery Figure 9-13. Connections for negative/ground test

2. Check the voltage difference between the battery +24 V and the mainboard: a. Connect the negative multimeter probe to the +24 V on test connector 1. (Figure 9-14 on page 9-15.) b. Connect the positive multimeter probe to the +24 V of the batteries. c. Ensure that the difference in voltage between battery 24 V and test pin 24 V is equal or smaller than 0.7 V (≤ 0.7 V). d. Disconnect the multimeter.

9-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Connector condition test

≤ 0.7 V Ω +24 V test pin

ON OFF

V dc V ac 200 mA 10 A A VΩ mA com

Positive battery

Figure 9-14. Connections for battery positive/+24 V test

3. If either of the values from step (1) or step (2) above are out of range, test and correct all connections between batteries and mainboard. Repeat this test as necessary. 4. Go to one of the following sections: • Section 11, Running version 1.x test software • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

9-15

9 Backup battery and voltage tests

9-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

10 Manual electrical safety tests 10

WARNING To comply with EN 60601-1 and EN 60601-2, you must perform these electrical safety tests after: • Performing test software • Replacing the power supply • Removing any earth (ground) from RAPHAEL

10.1

Introduction HAMILTON MEDICAL AG performs a set of electrical safety tests, according to Norm EN 60601-1 and EN 60601-2, on all the ventilator and compressor units that it manufactures. HAMILTON MEDICAL AG performs these tests automatically, using the Metron Safety Analyzer (Figure I-1, The Metron Safety Analyzer, on page I-1). It is a legal necessity that you too, after performing a repair or adjustment that includes replacing the power supply or removing any of the internal earth connectors, perform similar tests on your RAPHAEL. It is a HAMILTON MEDICAL recommendation, that even if you do not make a repair, you perform such tests. These tests are described in this section. If you have an automated safety device such as the Metron used by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG, it is recommended that you also perform the more sophisticated, automated tests shown in Appendix I, Automated electrical safety tests in addition to the tests shown in this section.

10.2

Procedure 1. Check the ground (earth) wires for proper connection. (Figure 10-1 and Figure 10-2.)

Ground connectors Backup battery

Figure 10-1. Ground connectors by batteries

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

10-1

10 Manual electrical safety tests

Ground connectors

Fan

Figure 10-2. Ground connectors by fan

2. Make sure that the two screws that secure and ground (earth) the mainboard are in place and are tight. (Figure 10-3.)

Figure 10-3. The two screws that secure and earth the mainboard

3. Check the resistance between the ground (earth) pin on RAPHAEL’s power inlet socket, and: • The potential equalization terminal (Figure 10-4) • The tank (Figure 10-5) • The two screws securing the motherboard to the chassis (Figure 10-3 and Figure 10-6) In all cases, the resistance must be less than 1 Ohm (<1Ω).

10-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Procedure

Figure 10-4. Measuring the earth pin to potential equalization

terminal resistance

Figure 10-5. Measuring the earth pin to tank resistance

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

10-3

10 Manual electrical safety tests

Figure 10-6. Measuring earth pin to mainboard resistance

10-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

11 Running version 1.x test software 11

11.1

Introduction This section explains how to use each of the test units comprising the RAPHAEL software version 1.x test software. The expression “RAPHAEL software version 1.x” refers to the following software releases: • 1.0 • 1.1 • 1.2 Note Software version 1.x can only function with mainboard PN 157250. In general, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG recommend that you always update to the latest software available. Software is shown in Appendix D, Upgrade routes and kits, although for the latest changes you must look on the HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Partner Website (http://www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site). WARNING If you are running software version 1.0, update it to the latest available version immediately.

On a few occasions, different software versions require different test procedures. Where necessary, these are noted.

11.2

Checklist Before starting, be sure that you: • Are familiar with the Typographic conventions and Expressions on page Conventions-2 • Have the necessary equipment (Appendix G, Maintenance tools and test equipment) • Have prepared RAPHAEL by performing actions described in the following sections: • Section 8, Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance • Section 9, Backup battery and voltage tests • Have compressed air and oxygen attached to the rear of the RAPHAEL • Have sufficient time (testing takes approximately 90 minutes) Consider also whether you must write a test report. Some hospitals require that you do this. If you do not have a suitable form, you can photocopy and use the one named RAPHAEL version 1.x test software report at the back of this manual.

11.3

Functions of the test software test units The test units in the test software perform the following functions: • They display information • They enable you to run checks on RAPHAEL hardware and software • They enable you to calibrate RAPHAEL hardware and software

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-1

11 Running version 1.x test software

11.4

Sequence of test software units Table 11-1 lists each of the units found in the test software in software version 1.x. WARNING •

•

Always perform all “Must do” tests, in the prescribed sequence, as shown in Table 11-1. (Earlier tests confirm the functioning of certain RAPHAEL components that are then used in later tests to configure other components.) If one of the tests indicates that you must replace a part or perform another test, do this immediately, then repeat the test you are on. Then repeat the complete series of tests.

CAUTION Air and oxygen must be connected to the high pressures inlets at the rear of the ventilator from test 5 onwards. Failure to do so can damage the inspiratory valve.

Must do?

Software version 1.x

Comment

Yes

Test 1 Memory

None.

Yes

Test 2 Display

None.

Yes

Test 3 Front

None.

Yes

Test 4 Alarm monitor

None.

Yes

Test 5 Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

None.

Yes

Test 6 Pressure Sensors

None.

Yes

Test 7 Mixer and Tank Pressure

None.

Yes

Test 8 I-Valve and E-Valve

None.

Yes

Test 9 Tightness and Overpressure

None.

Yes

Test 10 O2 Cell Measurement

None.

Yes

Test 11 Calibration + Scaling Values

This unit does not enable you to test RAPHAEL, but enables you to check that the calibration values you set in previous test units appear correct.

No

Test 12 Gas Delivery Controls

No

These tests are performed at HAMILTON MEDICAL AG only. Instructions are not included in this manual.

Test 13 Sensor Values

Yes

Test 14 Supply Voltages

None.

No

Test 15 Alarm Messages

This test is performed at HAMILTON MEDICAL AG only. Instructions are not included in this manual.

Table 11-1. Sequence of test software units

11-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Entering test software mode

11.5

Entering test software mode To enter test software mode: 1. Make sure RAPHAEL is switched off. 2. Set microswitch S1 on the main circuit board to the ON position using a pen or suitable tool. (Figure 11-1.)

Figure 11-1. Setting microswitch S1 to ON

WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.) 3. Connect the RAPHAEL to the mains power supply. 4. Switch on the RAPHAEL. The RAPHAEL starts in test software mode. 5. that the AC power indicator LED on the front is illuminated. (Figure 11-2.)

Figure 11-2. AC power indicator LED

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-3

11 Running version 1.x test software

6. that the display shows Test 1: Memory. (Figure 11-3.)

Figure 11-3. The Test 1: Memory test, as first displayed

7. that LED 1 on the mainboard starts blinking. (Figure 11-4.)

Switch S1 Off On

Blinking LED 1

Figure 11-4. Switch S1 and LED 1

11.6

How to use the test software Turn the P&T-knob to scroll to the required test, then press the knob to activate the test. When you first enter test software mode, Test 1: Memory is selected (but not activated) as shown in Figure 11-3. After finishing each test, select and activate Close.

11-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

How to use the test software

11.6.1

Alarms during test software mode While in test software mode, no alarms are displayed except for Technical Fault 1 (TF 1 Code *). You can find further information in the alarms section in the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent, and in Section 14, Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting.

11.6.2

Exiting test software mode To exit the test software, switch off the RAPHAEL and set switch S1 on the main circuit board to the “off” position. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-5

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 1: Memory Test 1.1

Overview This series of tests checks: • The memory function • The setting of the altitude • The reading of operating hours It also lets you reset the scaling values and configuration data if required.

Test 1.2

Preparation Activate Test 1: Memory. You see a screen similar to the one shown Figure 11-5.

Operating Hours shown here when setting required

Figure 11-5. The Memory test screen

Note • If you run this test directly after installing a new software PROM, but not a new “Flash” PROM, you see a message similar to the following: Graphics Module needs to be reprogrammed Please press button to reprogram Graphics Module 168 blocks need to be programmed Respond to this by pressing the P&T-knob. For more information, see screen. on page 14-17. • If you run this test directly after installing new software, it is very likely that you will see the following message: Checksum error while reading data from EEPROM. Execute memory test and set factory settings. In this case, perform Test 1: Memory in the normal way, making sure to activate: Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings. • If the screen does not display text clearly, check the contrast adjustment as described in Test 2.4, Checking and adjusting display contrast, on page 11-15.

11-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Troubleshooting Symptom

June 9, 2006

Action

Cannot activate test.

Replace P&T-knob.

Screen is not clear.

Perform Test 2.4, Checking and adjusting display contrast, on page 11-15.

PN 61067/05

11-7

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 1.3

Checking and setting the scaling Values that Scaling Values (the field near the bottom of the screen) reads OK. If the reading is Not OK, activate Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings (the field near the top of the screen). WARNING •

•

Only activate Scaling Values to Factory Settings or Configuration Data to Factory Settings if the corresponding value reads Not OK. This action sets these parameters to their factory-default, precalibration values. While these values make an appropriate starting point for performing these tests, they are not correct for ventilating a patient. If you set the scaling values to the factory settings, you must perform all the tests in this section.

Troubleshooting Symptom

11-8

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Activate Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings.

Scaling Values: Not OK

• If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.4

Checking and setting the configuration data that Configuration Data reads OK. If the reading is Not OK, activate Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings.

Troubleshooting Symptom

June 9, 2006

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Activate Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings.

Configuration Data: Not OK

• If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

PN 61067/05

11-9

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 1.5

Checking and adjusting the altitude setting The altitude setting is for compensation of the flow measurement at the Flow Sensor. This measurement influences RAPHAEL’s calculation of flow and volume. Altitude is set to the operating height of the RAPHAEL, measured in meters above sea level. If required, adjust the value with the P&T-knob. (The factory setting is 700m. You can adjust it in increments of 100m.) WARNING You must adjust the altitude setting for the location in which RAPHAEL will operate. This is not necessarily the same as the altitude at which you are performing this test.

11-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.6

Checking and setting the number of operating hours The Operating Hours value is displayed near the bottom of the screen, and shows the total number of hours that the unit has been in operation (Figure 11-5 on page 11-6). Unless you have just changed the mainboard, ensure that the value displayed approximates the number of hours RAPHAEL has been in operation. (For help in this, see Test 1.6.1.) If you have just changed the mainboard, use the P&T-knob to reset the operating hours as closely as possible to the original value displayed on RAPHAEL. Note If you have not just changed the mainboard, you cannot reset the operating hours value. Go to Test 2, Display.

Test 1.6.1

Determining the operating hours value To estimate the time RAPHAEL has been in operation, you must answer two questions: • How long has the RAPHAEL been in the hospital? • What sort of regimen does the hospital practice — are the machines left on all day and night, or are they turned off between patients? If the RAPHAEL is in a hospital where it is kept running continuously, the number of operating hours is 720 multiplied by the number of months the ventilator was in the hospital. In hospitals in which RAPHAEL is not kept running continuously, an average number of operating hours is 400 a month. In this case, the number of operating hours is 400 multiplied by the number of months of use. Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

The following error message is displayed at the bottom of the screen: Operating Hours: Not OK

• Reset the operating hours. • If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

In addition the following message is shown in the middle of the screen: Operating Hours: 0 The value for the number of operating hours is unreasonably high. (For example, 100000.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]) for a solution.

11-11

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 2: Display Test 2.1

Overview This series of tests checks the display, and enables you to adjust the screen contrast to the required value.

Test 2.2

Preparation Activate Test 2: Display. You see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 11-6.

Figure 11-6. The Display test screen

11-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display

Test 2.3

Testing the display 1. Activate Display Test. A grid of dots is displayed. Make sure that the pattern is regular and no lines are missing. (Figure 11-7 shows an approximation to the grid, but is limited in accuracy because of the printing process.)

Figure 11-7. The first black-and-white test grid

2. Press the P&T-knob again. The a grid of a darker shade is displayed. Again, make sure that the pattern remains regular and no lines are missing. (Figure 11-8 shows an approximation to the grid, but is limited in accuracy because of the printing process.)

Figure 11-8. The second black-and-white test grid

3. Press the P&T-knob again. The Test 2: Display screen is displayed (Figure 11-6).

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-13

11 Running version 1.x test software

Troubleshooting Symptom Display is dark.

Action • Replace dc/ac converter board. • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

Lines missing on display.

• Replace Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. (Section 15.4, Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-15.) • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

11-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display

Test 2.4

Checking and adjusting display contrast Note • The monochrome display is temperature-sensitive. Perform this test and adjustment in conditions that approximate the temperature in which the RAPHAEL is normally used. • During normal operation, you can adjust the contrast of the monochrome display in the Utilities window. 1. Activate Screen Contrast and check that the contrast can be adjusted with the P&T-knob. 2. Set the reading to 22.0. 3. Use the potentiometer on the mainboard (Figure 11-9) to adjust the screen contrast to be most easily readable. While doing this, look at the screen from the place at which the operator normally uses the RAPHAEL. (This could be slightly below or above the screen, depending on where the RAPHAEL is placed.)

Figure 11-9. Potentiometer for adjusting screen contrast

4. Activate Close.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-15

11 Running version 1.x test software

Troubleshooting Symptom Contrast not adjustable with P&T-knob. Contrast not adjustable with potentiometer.

Screen is not bright and clear and easily readable, even after adjustment.

11-16

Action • Replace Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. (Section 15.4, Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-15.) • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type. • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Test 3: Front Test 3.1

Overview This series of tests checks the loudspeaker, the buzzer, and the entire interface.

Test 3.2

Preparation Activate Test 3: Front. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-10.

Figure 11-10. The Front test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-17

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 3.3

Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time 1. Press the alarm silence key on the front . (Figure 11-11). The alarm LED illuminates and Alarm Silence is activated on the screen. Alarm LED

Figure 11-11. Alarm silence key with alarm LED

2. that the alarm LED remains illuminated while the Alarm Silence Time counts up to 120 ±5 seconds. At this time, the light must extinguish (must go out). 3. Activate : Buzzer using the P&T-knob. 4. that the buzzer alarm sounds after Backup Buzzer Time displays 60 ±5 seconds. 5. Deactivate † Buzzer.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Alarm LED does not illuminate after alarm silence key is pressed.

• Replace front keyboard. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Timer does not start after alarm silence key is pressed.

• Replace front keyboard. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

11-18

Backup buzzer does not function after 60 seconds.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Buzzer sounds after ≠ 60 seconds.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Alarm silence time ≠ 120 seconds.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Test 3.4

Checking the nebulizer, trigger, and alarm LEDs 1. Activate : Nebulizer and that the nebulizer LED on the front illuminates. 2. Repeat this procedure for : Trigger and : Alarm, making sure the corresponding front LED illuminates in each case.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Nebulizer LED does not function.

• Replace front keyboard.

Trigger LED does not illuminate.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Alarm LED does not illuminate.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-19

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 3.5

Checking the alarm tones Activate the three alarm level tests in turn, and check that the corresponding number of beeps sound. • Alarm low (low priority): One sequence of two beeps. • Alarm medium (medium priority): One sequence of three beeps. • Alarm high (high priority): Two sequences of three-beeps-followed-by-two-beeps.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Alarm (low, medium, or high) does not function.

• Replace loudspeaker. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

11-20

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Test 3.6

Testing the display and front keyboards Switch on and off each key on the display and the front . (Figure 11-12.)

Display keys

Front keys

Figure 11-12. Display and front keys

that the display indicates each use of each key. (Figure 11-13 shows the screen with the Mode key active.)

Figure 11-13. The Front test screen with the Mode key active

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-21

11 Running version 1.x test software

Troubleshooting Symptom Display keys do not operate.

Action • Check display keyboard cable. • Replace graphic controller board. • Replace display keyboard.

Front keys do not operate.

• Check front keyboard cable. • Replace graphic controller board. • Replace front keyboard.

11-22

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Test 3.7

Testing the P&T-knob 1. Turn the P&T-knob clockwise, and that the field named P&T-Knob Clicks modulo 16 counts from 0 to 15. 2. Turn the P&T-knob anticlockwise, and that the field named P&T-Knob Clicks modulo 16 counts from 0 to -15. 3. Activate Close to return to the main menu.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

P&T-knob does not count step-by-step.

June 9, 2006

• Replace P&T-knob.

PN 61067/05

11-23

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 4: Alarm monitor Test 4.1

Overview This series of tests checks the various different alarm conditions.

Test 4.2

Preparation Activate 4: Alarm monitor. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-14.

Figure 11-14. The Alarm monitor test screen

11-24

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.3

Checking for error signals the following indicators remain inactive at all times during the tests you perform in Test 4: Alarm monitor: † Voltage error † mP clock † P-Source fail

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Voltage error activated.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

mP clock activated. P-source fail activated.

June 9, 2006

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type. Inspiratory valve current too high.

• Replace inspiratory valve.

Expiratory valve current too high.

• Replace expiratory valve.

PN 61067/05

11-25

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 4.4

Testing the power down status flag For background information about this test, see Appendix B.2, on page B-1. 1. Check that : Power down is activated. (This flag indicates that RAPHAEL was correctly powered down, by using the switch at the back of the unit, the last time it was powered down.) 2. Activate : Run status. (This simulates the start of normal ventilation.) 3. that † Power down is now deactivated. (This indicates that RAPHAEL has correctly reset this field at the start of normal ventilation.) Note You cannot reactivate this field except by switching off and switching on RAPHAEL. Note Alarm sound is not used in this test. Do not activate this field.

Troubleshooting Symptom

11-26

Action

Power down not activated at start of test.

• Switch RAPHAEL off and on.

Power down cannot be deactivated by Run status.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.5

Checking the alarm LED 1. Activate : Alarm light. 2. that the alarm LED starts blinking. (Figure 11-11 on page 11-18.) 3. Deactivate † Alarm light.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Alarm silence LED does not blink.

• Replace front cable. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-27

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 4.6

Testing the alarm silence function 1. Activate : Alarm silence. 2. that the alarm LED on the front illuminates (turns on). (Figure 11-11 on page 11-18.) 3. Deactivate † Alarm silence. 4. Press the alarm silence key on the front . 5. that the alarm LED illuminates. 6. Activate : New alarm. 7. that the alarm LED extinguishes (turns off). 8. Activate the alarm silence key on the front . The LED must not illuminate. 9. Deactivate † New alarm. 10. Press the alarm silence key again to silence future alarms (the alarm LED illuminates again).

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

New alarm does not cancel the alarm silence LED. Alarm silence key does not function.

11-28

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.7

Checking the expiratory valve unpowered position 1. Activate : Valves off. As you do this, that the expiratory valve plunger pin moves down to its unpowered (de-energized) position. (Figure 11-15.)

Pin in unpowered position

Pin in normal position

Figure 11-15. The expiratory valve plunger in normal and unpowered positions

2. Deactivate † Valves off.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Expiratory valve does not move down to its unpowered position.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type. • Replace expiratory valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-29

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 4.8

Testing the front LEDs 1. Activate : Lamp test. 2. that each LED on the front illuminates and that the buzzer sounds. 3. Deactivate † Lamp test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Alarm, nebulizer or trigger LED does not function. Backup buzzer does not function.

11-30

Action • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.9

Testing the watchdog 1. Activate : Stop Watchdog. 2. that: • The expiratory valve plunger sinks to its unpowered (de-energized) position (Figure 11-15) • The alarm LED blinks (turns on and off repeatedly) • The buzzer sounds • One of the following messages is displayed: • Watchdog working correctly (in later software) • Watchdog error (in earlier software) 3. Switch the unit off and on. 4. Activate Test 4: Alarm monitor again, and go to Test 4.10.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Stop watchdog has no effect.

June 9, 2006

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

PN 61067/05

11-31

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 4.10

Testing backup battery operation 1. that: • † Battery operation is not activated • † Battery low is not activated • The ac power indicator LED on the front is illuminated (switched on) (Figure 11-2 on page 11-3) 2. Disconnect the power cord from the unit. 3. that: • : Battery operation is activated • † Battery low is not activated • The ac power indicator LED on the front extinguishes (switches off) (Figure 11-2 on page 11-3) 4. Reconnect the unit to mains power.

Troubleshooting Symptom Battery operation activated while mains connected.

Action • Replace fuse. • Replace power supply. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Battery low activated.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

ac power indicator LED malfunctions.

• Replace front keyboard. • Replace power supply.

Not possible to activate Battery operation by removing power cord.

11-32

• Replace power supply.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.11

Testing the fan

Test 4.11.1

Fan test 1 1. Carefully stop the fan from rotating by applying light pressure to the center of rotor. 2. that : Fan error activates. 3. Release the fan. 4. that † Fan error deactivates.

Test 4.11.2

Fan test 2 1. Disconnect the fan cable from the mainboard (plug P16/Fan). 2. that : Fan error activates. 3. Reconnect the fan cable. 4. that † Fan error deactivates. Troubleshooting Symptom

Action • Replace fan. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Fan error activated while fan is running.

• Replace fan. Fan error deactivated while fan is not running.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

11-33

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 4.12

Checking again for error signals the following indicators are still inactive: † Voltage error † mP clock † P-Source fail Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Voltage error activated.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

mP clock activated. P-source fail activated.

11-34

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type. Inspiratory valve current too high.

• Replace inspiratory valve.

Expiratory valve current too high.

• Replace expiratory valve.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul. Test 5.1

Overview This series of tests checks each of the following: • • • •

The Flow Sensor autozero valves The extended rinse flow valves The Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve Thenebulizer valve

The schematics displayed in Table 11-2 show the positions of these components. You can find these schematics in Appendix J, Spare parts and schematics. Valve description

Valve names used in different places This test

Schematic ZCH157276 Blatt 1

Schematic ZCH614186 Blatt 2

Flow Sensor autozero valve on side proximal to patient.

V1

AZ dPptm proximal (V1)a

6 Autozero valve proximal

Flow Sensor autozero valve on side distal to patient.

V2

AZ dPptm distal (V2)a

7 Autozero valve distal

Extended rinse flow valve on side proximal to patient.

V3

Ext. AZ dPptm proximal (V3)b

4 Extended rinse flow valve

Extended rinse flow valve on side distal to patient.

V4

Ext. AZ dPptm distal (V4)b

5 Extended rinse flow valve

Autozero valve for the Pvent pressure sensor.

V5

AZ Pvent (V5)

16 Autozero valve Pvent

Valve controlling flow of gas from the tank to the nebulizer outlet.

Nebulizer

Nebulizer

3 Nebulizer valve

Table 11-2. Valve naming conventions a. dPptm stands for “differential pressure of the pneumatic tachometer” (Flow Sensor). b. Despite the name used in this schematic, this is not an autozero valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-35

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 5.2

Preparation 1. Connect the air and oxygen supplies to the unit. (Figure 11-16.)

Figure 11-16. The gas supplies connected to the unit

2. Activate Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-17.

This field reads Extended Autozero Valves Test with software version 1.0

Figure 11-17. The Ext. Autozero and Nebul. test screen

11-36

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 5.3

Autozeroing the dPptm, Pprox and Pvent pressure sensors 1. Activate Autozero (not Autozero Valves Test). 2. that Autozero procedure successful is displayed at the bottom of the screen after a short time. 3. that dPptm reads 0.0±0.1 mbar.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

dPptm ≠0.0±0.1 mbar

• Check for unequal rinse flows by performing Test 9.5, Testing the rinse flow “pills”, on page 11-71. If the flow is uneven, replace the valve that appears to be defective (indicated by an excessive flow of bubbles, or too few bubbles).

The following message is displayed: Autozero procedure NOT successful

• Replace each pressure sensor in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Perform test Test 5.4, Testing the autozero valves, to see if the autozero valves are defective. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-37

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 5.4

Testing the autozero valves 1. Activate Autozero Valves Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-18.

Figure 11-18. The screen you see by activating Autozero Valves Test

The Flow Sensor autozero valves V1 and V2 switch on and off in the following sequence: • † V1 and † V2 (5 seconds) • : V1 and : V2 (5 seconds) • † V1 and † V2 (5 seconds) • and so on 2. Seal the silver Flow Sensor outlet with a finger or thumb as shown in Figure 11-19.

blue

Figure 11-19. Sealing the silver Flow Sensor outlet

11-38

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

3. With Autozero Valves Test still running, the pressure reading dPptm according to Table 11-3. Field

Blue connector sealed

Silver connector sealed

V1 deactivated

V1 activated

V2 deactivated

V2 activated

-----.--

-0.6 to 0.6

-----.--

-0.6 to 0.6

dPptm

Table 11-3. Values for dPptm reading during autozero valve test

(dPptm is the differential pressure at the pneumatic tachometer, normally called the Flow Sensor.) 4. Unseal the silver Flow Sensor, and seal the blue Flow Sensor outlet. 5. With Autozero Valves Test still running, the pressure reading dPptm according to Table 11-3. 6. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Autozero valves V1 & V2 do not switch on and off in sequence.

Action • Replace each autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type. • Check gas is connected and supply is sufficient (no low pressure or flow).

dPptm ≠ -----.-- while autozero valve deactivated.

• Check for internal tubing leak or disconnection (including nebulizer tubing). • Check dPptm pressure sensor cable. • Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace pneumatic block.

Inspiratory valve zero point out of range. dPptm ≠ 0±0.6 while autozero valve activated.

Perform Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 11-58 to recalibrate the inspiratory valve, then return to Test 5.4, Testing the autozero valves. • Check dPptm pressure sensor cable. • Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace each autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-39

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 5.5

Testing the extended rinse flow valves 1. Connect a Flow Sensor and stopper to RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 11-20. (Note that the stopper must be in place.)

Stopper

Figure 11-20. The tubing setup for Test 5.5, Testing the extended rinse flow

valves 2. Activate Extended Rinse Flow Valves Test (this is Extended Autozero Valves Test in software revision 1.0). You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-21.

These fields activate alternately

Figure 11-21. The screen you see by activating Extended Rinse Flow Valves

Test or Extended Autozero Valves Test The extended rinse flow valves : V3 and : V4 switch in the sequence: • : V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and : V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • and so on

11-40

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

3. Using Table 11-4, that whichever valve is active (: V3 or : V4), pressure reading dPptm displays the correct corresponding pressure. Field

With V3 active, RAPHAEL must display

With V4 active, RAPHAEL must display

dPptm

≥ 0.8 mbar

≤ -0.8 mbar (-0.8, -2... -∞ mbar)

Table 11-4. Values for dPptm reading in extended rinse flow valve test

(dPptm is the differential pressure at the pneumatic tachometer, normally called the Flow Sensor.) 4. Activate Stop running test. 5. Leave the stopper and Flow Sensor in place.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Extended autozero valves V3 & V4 do not function.

• Replace each extended autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

• dPptm < 0.8 mbar while V3 active.

• Replace pneumatic block

• dPptm > -0.8 mbar while V4 active.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-41

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 5.6

Checking the Pprox and dPptm sensors 1. Activate Sensor Validation. 2. Validate that the following messages are both displayed at the bottom of the screen: • Pprox: Sensor OK • Dpptm: Sensor OK

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Sensor validation not performed is displayed.

• Check that stopper is in place during test. • Check that gases are connected. • Check for leak in the gas mixer components.

Pprox: Sensor defect is displayed.

• Replace Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace each autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace each extended rinse flow valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement.

Dpptm: Sensor defect is displayed.

• Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace each autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace each extended rinse flow valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement.

11-42

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 5.7

Checking the Flow Sensor 1. Connect the Flow Sensor and the tubing as shown in Figure 11-22.

Figure 11-22. Tubing setup for Test 5.7, Checking the Flow Sensor

2. Activate Flow Sensor Check. After a short period, the message Sensor deviation: xx% is displayed. 3. that the value of xx is in the range -20% to 20%. 4. Disconnect both the tubing and the Flow Sensor.

Troubleshooting Symptom Sensor deviation >±20%.

June 9, 2006

Action • Replace Flow Sensor.

PN 61067/05

11-43

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 5.8

Testing the nebulizer valve 1. Activate the Nebulizer (: Nebulizer) as shown in Figure 11-23.

Figure 11-23. The Ext. Autozero and Nebul. screen with Nebulizer active

2. that while the nebulizer is activated (: Nebulizer), a flow is provided at the nebulizer outlet. (Figure 11-24.)

Flow of air from nebulizer outlet

Figure 11-24. The flow of gas at the nebulizer outlet

3. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom No flow at nebulizer outlet.

Action • Check internal tubing for leaks or disconnections. • Replace nebulizer valve. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

11-44

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Pressure Sensors

Test 6: Pressure Sensors Test 6.1

Overview This series of tests checks and calibrates the following pressure sensors: • dPptm (the sensor measuring pneumatic tachometer differential pressure—the pressure differential across the Flow Sensor) • Pprox (the sensor measuring pressure in the patient circuit at the Flow Sensor) • Pvent (the sensor measuring pressure in the patient circuit at the inspiratory valve)

Test 6.2

Preparation Activate Test 6: Pressure Sensors. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-25.

Figure 11-25. The Pressure Sensors test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-45

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 6.3

Autozeroing dPptm, Pprox and Pvent Activate Perform Autozero to perform zero-point calibrations for the dPptm, Pprox, and Pvent pressure sensors. After a short time, you must see the message Autozero procedure successful at the bottom of the screen. In addition, Perform Autozero is replaced by Gain adjustment OK. (You will use this confirmation text later.)

Troubleshooting Symptom

11-46

Action

One of the following messages is displayed:

• Check dPptm, Pprox and Pvent pressure sensor cables.

• Autozero procedure for dPPTM NOT successful

• Replace dPptm, Pprox and Pvent pressure sensors in turn, performing this test after each replacement.

• Autozero procedure for Pprox NOT successful

• Replace autozero valves in turn, performing this test after each replacement.

• Autozero procedure for Pvent NOT successful

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Pressure Sensors

Test 6.4

Checking and adjusting dPptm gain WARNING During this procedure you must be sure to work to an accuracy of ±0.01 mbar. This means you must have a pressure gauge capable of this accuracy. Any RAPHAEL adjusted less accurately will give an incorrect volume of gas to the patient.

1. Leave the message Gain adjustment OK. 2. Connect the tubing system as shown in Figure 11-26. The bottle should be one liter or larger. (For an alternative system, see Appendix B.3, on page B-2.)

Stopper

Flow regulator Flow regulator

Pressure controller Pressure gauge

1 liter

Figure 11-26. Tubing setup for Test 6.4, Checking and adjusting dPptm gain

3. Provide a pressure of 2.0 to 2.5 mbar (as measured by the pressure gauge) to the silver Flow Sensor outlet on the front , by adjusting the flow regulator. (The pressure is generated by the rinse flow.) dPptm zoom displays ----Note Do not apply a pressure of more than 2.5 mbar.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-47

11 Running version 1.x test software

4. that dPptm displays the correct value (Table 11-5). Field

RAPHAEL must display

dPptm

With silver Flow Sensor outlet

With blue Flow Sensor outlet

Pressure gauge value ±0.02 mbar (shown as a negative value on RAPHAEL)

Pressure gauge value ±0.02 mbar (shown as a positive value on RAPHAEL)

Table 11-5. Values for dPptm gain adjustment

If the value is not in range, adjust it by using the dPptm gain potentiometer. (Figure 11-27.)

Figure 11-27. Position of dPptm gain potentiometer

5. If dPptm shows the correct value, reduce the pressure to 0.8 to 0.9 mbar by adjusting the flow regulator. 6. that dPptm zoom displays the correct value. (Table 11-6). Field

RAPHAEL must display

dPptm zoom

With silver Flow Sensor outlet

With blue Flow Sensor outlet

dPptm value ±0.01 mbar

dPptm value ±0.01 mbar

Table 11-6. Values for dPptm zoom gain adjustment

7. Repeat step (2) to step (6), using the blue Flow Sensor outlet. It must not be necessary to make any adjustments. 8. Confirm the gain adjustment is correct by activating Gain adjustment OK. (The text changes to Pvent reading OK. You will use this confirmation later.)

11-48

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Pressure Sensors

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Pressure sensor signal dPptm ≠ dPptm zoom.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Pressure sensor dPptm not adjustable.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-49

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 6.5

Checking the Pvent zero calibration 1. Disconnect all tubing. 2. that Pvent (on the left of the screen) reads 0.0±0.2 mbar. 3. Confirm the Pvent zero calibration is correct by activating Pvent reading OK. (The text changes to Pvent gain adjustment OK. You will use this confirmation later.)

Troubleshooting Symptom Pvent ≠ 0±0.2 mbar

Action • Check and adjust the inspiratory valve. Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 11-58. Then return to Test 6.5Checking the Pvent zero calibration, on page 11-50. • Check Pvent pressure sensor cable. • Replace Pvent pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

11-50

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Pressure Sensors

Test 6.6

Checking and adjusting Pvent gain 1. Prepare the RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 11-28. Pressure controller Pressure gauge

Pressure connector

Figure 11-28. Tubing setup for Test 6.6, Checking and adjusting Pvent gain

2. Keep the Flow Sensor sealed with a finger or stopper while the system generates a pressure of approximately 50 mbar. (Check this on the pressure gauge.) 3. that Pvent (on the left of the screen) reads the same as the pressure gauge, within the tolerances given in Table 11-7. Field

Pressure gauge

RAPHAEL must display

Pvent

45 to 55

Pressure gauge value ±0.5

Table 11-7. Values for Pvent gain check

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-51

11 Running version 1.x test software

If the value is not in range, adjust it by using the Pvent gain. (Figure 11-29.)

Figure 11-29. Position of the Pvent gain potentiometer

4. Confirm the Pvent gain calibration is correct by activating Pvent gain adjustment OK. RAPHAEL now calibrates the Pprox gain so that it is in accordance with the Pvent gain. After a short time, the message Calibration successful must be displayed.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Pvent gain cannot be adjusted into the correct range.

• Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

RAPHAEL cannot generate 45 to 55 mbar.

• Check for leak in tubing setup. • Check ambient valve is tightly fitted, without leak. • Check patient overpressure valve is tightly fitted, without leak. • Perform Test 8.4, Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve, on page 11-62 to recalibrate expiratory valve, then return to Test 6.6, Checking and adjusting Pvent gain. • Replace expiratory valve.

The following message is displayed: Calibration not successful

11-52

Repeat the test, making sure that the pressure is in the correct range.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Test 7: Mixer and Tank Pressure Test 7.1

Overview This series of tests checks the gas mixer system and tank pressure. During the tests, both the oxygen and the air mixer solenoid valves are activated separately for individual testing. Throughout the tests the nebulizer valve remains open to allow you to measure the tank pressure at the nebulizer outlet.

Test 7.2

Preparation Note During this test series, RAPHAEL automatically switches on the nebulizer valve. If you switch the valve off by using the nebulizer key on the front , you will obtain false readings. 1. Activate 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-30.

Figure 11-30. The Mixer and Tank Pressure test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-53

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 7.3

Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves 1. Set your pressure gauge to measure in a range of approximately 0 to 2 bars. 2. Connect the pressure gauge to the nebulizer outlet as shown in Figure 11-31. Pressure Pressurecontroller gauge

Range: 0 to 2 bars

Stopper Figure 11-31. The tubing setup for Test 7.3, Testing the air and oxygen mixer

valves 3. Close the patient outlet with a stopper. 4. Activate Air Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-32.

Figure 11-32. The screen you see by activating Air Test

5. the Ptank max, Ptank min, and Offset frequency readings according to Table 11-8. Field

RAPHAEL must display

Ptank max

950 to 1100

Ptank min

840 to 860

Offset frequency Hz

4720 to 7080

Table 11-8. Values for the air and O 2 tests

11-54

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Mixer and Tank Pressure

6. Activate Stop running test. 7. Activate O2 Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-33.

Figure 11-33. The screen you see by activating O2 Test

8. the Ptank max, Ptank min, and Offset frequency readings again, also according to Table 11-8. 9. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Offset frequency outside specification and mixer valve leak

Action • Replace dPmixer pressure sensor cable. • Replace dPmixer pressure sensor. • Replace rubber mounting block. • Replace air and oxygen mixer valves. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Ptank Max pressure outside specification

• Check gas is connected and supply is sufficient (no low pressure or flow). • Check internal tubing for leak or disconnection (including nebulizer tubing). • Perform Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 11-58 to recalibrate the inspiratory valve, then return to Test 7.3, Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves, on page 11-54. • Replace the mixer valves in turn, performing this test after each replacement.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-55

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 7.4

Testing the tank overpressure valve 1. Activate : Air Valve. 2. the tank pressure reading according to Table 11-9. (During this test the tank overpressure valve opens with a rasping sound.) Field

Pressure Gauge

Ptank

1200 to 1600

RAPHAEL must display Pressure gauge value ±300

Table 11-9. Values for tank overpressure test

3. Deactivate † Air Valve. 4. Remove the pressure gauge.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Ptank pressure sensor outside specification

• Replace Ptank pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

Ptank measured on gauge > 1.6 bar

• Replace tank overpressure valve.

Ptank measured on gauge < 1.2 bar

• Check that gas supply is sufficient (low pressure or flow). • Replace tank overpressure valve.

11-56

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Test 7.5

Testing the air and oxygen inlet mixer valves for leakage 1. Activate : Air Valve and then deactivate † Air Valve to bring the tank up to a high pressure. 2. Reduce the pressure in the tank to very approximately 100 mbar, as displayed by Ptank. (Figure 11-1 on page 11-3.) You do this by activating and then deactivating the Nebulizer key on the front . 3. Wait approximately 5 seconds, while the pressure in the tank stabilizes. 4. Monitor the pressure for a period of approximately 30 seconds. Make sure that the pressure decreases during this time. 5. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom Ptank displays a constant or a rising pressure.

Action • Replace one of the mixer valves and perform this test again. • If necessary replace the second mixer valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-57

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve Test 8.1

Overview This series of tests checks and adjusts the electronic and mechanical functioning of the inspiratory and expiratory valves.

Test 8.2

Preparation Activate Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-34.

Figure 11-34. The I-Valve and E-Valve test screen

11-58

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Test 8.3

Calibrating the inspiratory-valve control signal for zero flow 1. Connect the Flow Sensor as shown in Figure 11-35.

Blue tube Blue tube Figure 11-35. Tubing setup for Test 8.3, Calibrating the inspiratory-valve

control signal for zero flow 2. Activate I-Valve zero. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-36.

Figure 11-36. The screen you see by activating I-Valve zero

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-59

11 Running version 1.x test software

3. that the base of the flow curve is centered between points a and b. Adjust the curve with potentiometer V‘zero if required. (Figure 11-37.) Note It does not matter if the top of the curve lies in a position outside of the window.

V’zero potentiometer

Figure 11-37. The position of the V’zero potentiometer

4. Check that the width of the curve is at no point is greater than the distance from a to b. Figure 11-36 on page 11-59 shows a curve that is in range. Figure 11-38 shows a curve that is out of range.

Figure 11-38. An incorrect I-Valve zero curve

5. Check V’aw min is in accordance with Table 11-10. Value V’aw min ml/s

RAPHAEL must display 10 to 66

Table 11-10. Values for I-Valve leak flow

11-60

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

6. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Width of curve is greater than distance from a to b, as shown in Figure 11-38.

• Check inspiratory valve is clean. (See Section 15.3.2, Cleaning the inspiratory valve, on page 15-3.) • Replace inspiratory valve.

V’aw_min too large or too small.

• Adjust potentiometer V’zero. • Replace inspiratory valve.

Curve has bad shape.

• Check inspiratory valve is clean. (See Section 15.3.2, Cleaning the inspiratory valve, on page 15-3.) • Replace inspiratory valve.

No signal.

• Check Flow Sensor is connected in the correct direction. • Replace inspiratory valve. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-61

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 8.4

Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve Checking expiratory valve signal at zero pressure 1. Set your pressure gauge to read in a range of approximately 0 to 100 mbar. 2. Connect the Flow Sensor and the tubing as shown in Figure 11-39. Pressure Pressuregauge controller

Pressure connector

Figure 11-39. Tubing setup for Test 8.4, Testing and calibrating the

expiratory valve 3. Activate E-Valve test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-40.

Figure 11-40. The screen you see by activating E-Valve test

4. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper. RAPHAEL generates a range of different pressures at intervals of 5 seconds.

11-62

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

5. When the PEEP pressure is at 0.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 0.0 mbar continuously.) 6. Check that the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 11-11. Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

Table 11-11. Pprox zero-check tolerance

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps.

Setting expiratory valve signal gain 7. Activate Continue. 8. When the PEEP pressure rises to 25.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 25.0 mbar continuously.) 9. Turn the Exp. Gain potentiometer (Figure 11-41) until the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 11-12. This sets the gain applied to the expiratory valve. Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

24.5 to 25.5 mbar

24.8 to 25.2

Table 11-12. Pprox gain tolerance

Figure 11-41. Exp. Gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250

10. Activate Stop running test.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-63

11 Running version 1.x test software

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Pprox does not display correct zero value

Check the voltage between Pin 6 and Pin 7 on the mainboard. This is the connector marked P11, shown in Figure 11-42. To do this, do not remove the connector from the mainboard, but use the test probes on the connector itself. If the voltage difference is greater than 20 mV (>20 mV) replace each of the following in turn, testing after each replacement. • Cable P11. • The mainboard. • The power supply.

Pprox cannot be adjusted to required offset or gain values

• Check for leak in patient tubing. • Check expiratory valve cover and membrane for leaks and defects. • Replace expiratory valve. • Replace mainboard.

8

7 6

5 4 3

2

1

Figure 11-42. Connector P11

11-64

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Test 8.5

Testing the inspiratory valve controller Note You do not use the I-Valve controller (static) test. 1. Disconnect the transparent tube of the Flow Sensor from the RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 11-43.

Flow sensor tube disconnected

disconnect flow sensor tube

Figure 11-43. Tubing setup for Test 8.5, Testing the inspiratory valve

controller 2. Activate I-Valve controller (dynamic). You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-44.

Figure 11-44. The screen you see by activating I-Valve controller (dynamic)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-65

11 Running version 1.x test software

3. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper as shown in Figure 11-43. 4. that each Pprox value is in range at all the different pressures generated by the unit (Table 11-13). Because of the speed at which the display changes, it is helpful to activate Hold at each step to enable you to better read the screen. RAPHAEL must display Pprox target

Pprox

Pprox peak

5 mbar

4 to 6 mbar

≤ 7 mbar

10 mbar

8.5 to 11.5 mbar

≤ 12 mbar

25 mbar

23.5 to 26.5 mbar

≤ 30 mbar

50 mbar

48.5 to 51.5mbar

≤ 60 mbar

Table 11-13. Values for I-Valve controller test

5. Activate Stop running test. 6. Activate Close. 7. Disconnect all the tubing.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pprox_peak out of range.

Action • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type. • Replace inspiratory valve.

11-66

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure Test 9.1

Overview This test checks: • • • • •

Test 9.2

The patient overpressure valve The “pills” that protect from rinse flow overpressure The “pills” that control the normal rinse flow For leaks in internal and external tubing The ambient valve

Preparation 1. Obtain a glass of water. You require this for Test 9.5, Testing the rinse flow “pills”, on page 11-71. 2. Activate Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-45.

Figure 11-45. The Tightness and Overpressure test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-67

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 9.3

Testing the patient overpressure valve 1. Close the patient outlet with a stopper as shown in Figure 11-46.

Rubber bung Stopper

Figure 11-46. Patient outlet closed with a stopper for Test 9.3, Testing the

patient overpressure valve 2. Activate Internal Pneumatic Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-47.

Figure 11-47. The screen you see by activating Internal Pneumatic Test

3. Activate : Mixer. 4. that the Pvent value lies in the range 80.0 to 120.0 mbar. 5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.4.

11-68

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Troubleshooting Symptom Pvent < 80 mbar.

Action • Check for internal leak. • Replace patient overpressure valve. • Replace pneumatic block.

Pvent > 120 mbar.

• Check patient overpressure valve is not blocked. • Replace patient overpressure valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-69

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 9.4

Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” WARNING During this test, make sure the pressure measured by the pressure gauge does not increase above 350 mbar. (Disconnect the gauge if necessary!) If it does, the dPptm pressure sensor will be damaged, and must be replaced.

1. that the patient outlet is still closed with the stopper. 2. that : Mixer is still active. 3. Connect the pressure gauge as shown in Figure 11-48, and wait for the pressure to rise and stabilize.

Pressure gauge

Stopper

Rubber bung Figure 11-48. Pressure gauge connected to Flow Sensor connector for Test 9.4,

Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” 4. that the value on the pressure gauge lies in the range 100.0 to 300.0 mbar. 5. Remove the pressure gauge and the stopper. 6. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.5.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pressure gauge reading out of range.

11-70

Action • Replace pneumatic block.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9.5

Testing the rinse flow “pills” 1. Connect two identical tubes to the Flow Sensor connectors as shown in Figure 11-49. Immerse the tubes in the glass of water as shown in the diagram.

Identical tubes of equal length Equal length

Approximately equal number ofequal bubbles number of bubbles

Figure 11-49. Setup for Test 9.5, Testing the rinse flow “pills”

2. that the Internal Pneumatic Test and : Mixer are still activated. 3. that bubbles appear at both tube outlets, and that the number of bubbles (indicating the rate of flow) is approximately equal on each outlet. 4. Disconnect the two tubes. You do not require them or the water again. 5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.6.

Troubleshooting Symptom Number of bubbles not equal.

June 9, 2006

Action • Replace pneumatic block.

PN 61067/05

11-71

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 9.6

Testing for internal leaks 1. Connect a piece of tubing between the two Flow Sensor connectors as shown in Figure 11-50.

Tubing

Stopper Figure 11-50. Tubing setup for Test 9.6, Testing for internal leaks

2. Close the patient outlet with a stopper as shown in Figure 11-50. 3. that : Mixer is still active. 4. Deactivate † Mixer and measure the time required for the pressure to drop at Ptank. that the leakage of the tank is in the range displayed in Table 11-14. Value

RAPHAEL display must drop

Time span must be

Ptank

from 700 to 500 mbar

≥8 seconds

Table 11-14. Values for tank-pressure drop

5. Activate Stop running test. 6. Disconnect the tube and the stopper.

Troubleshooting Symptom Tank pressure drops too fast.

Action • Check inspiratory valve for leak. • Check tank overpressure valve for leak. • Check for leak between pneumatic block and attached component. • Check nebulizer valve for leak. • Replace pneumatic block.

11-72

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9.7

Testing for external leaks 1. Connect the tubing as shown in Figure 11-51.

Figure 11-51. Tubing setup for Test 9.7, Testing for external leaks

2. Activate External Tightness Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-52.

Figure 11-52. The screen you see by activating External Tightness Test

3. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper, as shown in Figure 11-51, and that the pressure displayed on RAPHAEL stays within the range 32.0 to 38.0 mbar. 4. Do not disconnect the Flow Sensor or tubing. 5. Activate Stop running test.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-73

11 Running version 1.x test software

Troubleshooting Symptom Pprox out of range.

Action • Check for leak in patient tubing. • Check for internal leak. • Check for ambient valve leak.

11-74

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9.8

Testing the ambient state 1. Connect your personal bacteria filter to the tubing as shown in Figure 11-53. Note An example of a suitable filter is shown on page G-5.

ÕÖ Bacteria Bacteriafilter filter Figure 11-53. The bacteria filter connected for Test 9.8, Testing the ambient

state 2. Activate Ambient Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-54.

Figure 11-54. The screen you see by activating Ambient Test

3. that inspiration and expiration are possible, by breathing through the filter.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-75

11 Running version 1.x test software

4. Disconnect the Flow Sensor and tubing. 5. Activate Stop running test. 6. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom Cannot inhale or exhale.

Action • Check that ambient valve is not blocked or defective. • Check that expiratory valve is not blocked or defective.

11-76

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement Test 10.1

Overview This series of tests checks and adjusts oxygen measurement and the calibration of the oxygen cell. Note If there is no oxygen supply connected to the unit, you cannot perform these tests.

Test 10.2

Preparation 1. Make sure you have an oxygen cell available. 2. Connect RAPHAEL to both an oxygen and an air supply. 3. Activate Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement. You see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 11-55 or Figure 11-56.

Figure 11-55. The O2 Cell Measurement test screen for 1.0 and 1.1

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-77

11 Running version 1.x test software

Figure 11-56. The O2 Cell Measurement test screen for 1.2

The difference between the two screens is that the later software enables you to perform a zero offset calibration for the oxygen cell in addition to the gain calibration.

11-78

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement

Test 10.3

Calibrating the oxygen measurement zero offset Note You can only perform this test if you have software version 1.2. (If you have software version 1.0 or 1.1, go to Test 10.4, Calibrating the oxygen measurement full-scale gain.) 1. Make sure the oxygen cell is disconnected from the unit. 2. Wait 15 seconds for the FiO2 ADU signal to stabilize (it must not fluctuate by more than plus or minus one digit). 3. Activate O2 Offset (at the top left of the screen). 4. the value displayed for O2 offset (near the bottom of the screen). The dashes displayed when the screen first opened must now be replaced by numerics (the value is not important) as shown in Figure 11-57.

Dashes replaced by value (Here shown as 10 However, any value can be shown.)

Figure 11-57. The O2 Cell Measurement test screen after O2 offset calibration

5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 10.4.

Troubleshooting Symptom Screen displays --- ADU’s.

Action • Check oxygen cell is disconnected. • Replace mainboard with one of same type (PN 157250). Alternatively, upgrade mainboard and software to latest type.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-79

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 10.4

Calibrating the oxygen measurement full-scale gain Note This test can only run immediately after performing Test 10.3. 1. Install the oxygen cell. 2. Activate O2 Calibration. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-58. This remains for two minutes during which time calibration takes place.

Figure 11-58. The screen you see by activating O2 Calibration

3. You see the original Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement screen again. (Figure 11-56.) that the message Calibration successful is displayed near the bottom of this screen. 4. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 10.5.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Check oxygen cell is connected.

Calibration not OK

• Check oxygen is connected. • Check sintered disk flow restrictor is not blocked. • Check oxygen cell is not old or defective.

11-80

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement

Test 10.5

Checking the oxygen measurement 1. Activate FiO2 target (in the top part of the screen) and adjust it to the first of the two readings (25%) displayed in Table 11-15. RAPHAEL must display FiO2 target vol%

FiO2 vol%

25

22.0 to 28.0

40

37.0 to 43.0

Table 11-15. Values for the oxygen measurement test

2. that the FiO2 reading (in the center part of the screen) is in range after two minutes. (Table 11-15.) 3. Repeat the activation, adjustment and check for the 40% value. 4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom FiO2 is out of range

Action • Check oxygen cell is connected. • Check oxygen is connected. • Check sintered disk flow restrictor is not blocked. • Check oxygen cell is not old or defective.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-81

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 11: Calibration + Scaling Values Test 11.1

Overview This is not a true test, but a display of the numerous calibration and scaling values you set in earlier test units. The figures enable you to confirm, with reasonable certainty, that you performed the earlier test units satisfactorily.

Test 11.2

Preparation Activate one Test 11: Calibration + Scaling Values. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 11-59.

T e s t 1121 : C a l i b r a t i o n + S c a l i n g V a l u e s Pprox gain 1.012 Pprox zoom gain 1.016 O2 offest/gain –6 0.800 Flow Insp/Exp 96 96 Insp:Exp 1.0 2.0 Monitoring 1 1 Monitoring 2 2 Monitoring 3 3 Mode 1 Sigh 0 Backup 1 Trigger 6 Available 000000011111

70 40 2 15 50 10 14 22.0

Curves Language O2 Cell Flow Sensor ASV enabled

0 1 1 1 0

6026 9 700

Weight kg Pmax mbar PEEP mbar Psupp mbar FiO2 vol% VT ml/kg Rrmax bpm Screen Contrast -V Run Time min Altitude m

Close Figure 11-59. The Calibration + Scaling Values test screen

11-82

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 11: Calibration + Scaling Values

Test 11.3

Checking calibration values Check that the following values are not at their factory defaults, and are therefore probably correctly calibrated. (Table 11-16.) Parameter

Factory default value

Pprox gain

1.000

Pprox zoom gain

1.000

O2 offset

These values are displayed together as O2 offset/gain

O2 gain Flow Insp

These values are displayed together as Flow Insp/Exp

Flow Exp

0 1.000

Action

Check that factory default value is not displayed.

100 100

Table 11-16. Calibrated values to check

If the values appear to be correctly calibrated, go to Test 14: Supply Voltages, on page 11-85.

Troubleshooting If all or most of the values are still at their factory defaults as shown on Table 11-16, you did not perform the full series of tests correctly as described in Section 11.4, Sequence of test software units, on page 11-2. In this case, repeat all tests, starting from Test 1: Memory, on page 11-6.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-83

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 12: Gas Delivery Controls Test 13: Sensor Values Note These tests are for HAMILTON MEDICAL internal use only. Descriptions are not included in this document.

11-84

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 14: Supply Voltages

Test 14: Supply Voltages Test 14.1

Overview This test enables you to check that RAPHAEL’ s power supply can recognize and can automatically switch to battery use when mains voltage is too low or unavailable. The test uses — and therefore checks — the mechanism RAPHAEL uses automatically during normal ventilation to test the battery every 20 minutes (with software version 1.x).

Test 14.2

Preparation Activate Test 14: Supply Voltages. You see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 11-60.

Figure 11-60. The Supply Voltages test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-85

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 14.3

Checking the power supply 1. Ensure that when † Mains off is not activated, the Battery voltage shows a value in the range 26.6 to 30 V. This tells us that either the first part of the power supply, or the backup batteries, is supplying a voltage in the acceptable range to the second part of the power supply. 2. Ensure that the +5 V, +15 V and -15 V values are within the range shown in Table 11-17. This confirms that the second part of the power supply is working correctly at the input voltage shown in the Battery field. Field

Range

+5

4.95 to 5.25V

+15

13.5 to 15.75V

-15

-13.5 to -16.5V

Table 11-17. Voltages

3. Activate : Mains off and make sure that the battery voltage reads 24 to 26.5 V. This shows the voltage of the backup battery. 4. Check that the +5 V, +15 V and -15 V values are within the range shown in Table 11-17. This confirms that the second part of the power supply is working correctly with the input voltage shown in the Battery field. Note You have now completed all required test software tests. (You cannot perform Test 15.)

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Battery voltage out of range when Mains off not activated.

Compare the voltage shown on screen with the voltage at the 24 V test point, as described in Section 9.3, Mainboard voltages test, on page 9-6.

+5 V, +15 V or -15 V value out of range.

Compare the voltages shown on screen with the voltages at the test points, as described in Section 9.3, Mainboard voltages test, on page 9-6.

If the voltage is out of range, replace the power supply. If the voltage is in range, but the values shown on screen is wrong, replace the mainboard.

If the voltages are out of range, replace the power supply. If the voltages are in range, but the screen values are wrong, replace the mainboard. Battery voltage out of range when Mains off activated.

• Check the backup batteries are connected. • Unless the batteries have not been charged for a long time (perhaps RAPHAEL has not been attached to the mains power supply for several months) replace the batteries. • If RAPHAEL has not been connected to the mains for a long time, connect it to the mains power supply for at least six hours, and then perform this test again.

Table 11-18. Troubleshooting Test 14: Supply Voltages

11-86

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 14: Supply Voltages

Test 14.4

Mandatory completion point for test software 1. Exit the test software by setting microswitch S1 to the “off” position and restarting the unit. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.) 2. Go to Section 7.4, Procedure, on page 7-3 to determine your next action.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

11-87

11 Running version 1.x test software

Test 15: Alarm Messages Note This test is for HAMILTON MEDICAL internal use only. A description is not included in this document.

11-88

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

12 Running version 2.* test software 12

12.1

Introduction This section explains how to use each of the test units comprising the RAPHAEL software version 2.* test software. The expression “RAPHAEL software version 2.*” refers to the following software releases: • • • • • • • • •

2.0 and 2.0S 2.01 and 2.01S 2.1 (Japan only) 2.21 and 2.21S 2.2, 2.2S, and 2.2C 2.22, 2.22S, and 2.22C 2.23, 2.23S, and 2.23C 2.24CU 2.25CU

Note • There is a particular recommendation to update if you have software version 2.2*. The reason for this is that under very specific conditions, the precision of RAPHAEL's adaptive volume controller can be impaired. As a result, RAPHAEL sometimes fails to fully compensate for compliance and resistance changes. Note, however, that the functionality of the alarms is at no time affected; there is therefore no risk to the patient, providing the operates the ventilator in accordance with the manual. • Software version 2.* can function with all mainboard versions: PN 157250, PN 157265 and PN 157373. • If using software version 2.* with mainboard PN 157373, you must be sure to set the jumpers on the mainboard correctly. For more information, see Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6. (Mainboard PN 157373 is fitted only to software version 3.* units in the factory, but can be fitted to software revision 2.* units as a field repair. For this reason, it might be necessary to change the jumper settings when performing a field repair.) In general, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG recommend that you always update to the latest software available. Software is shown in Appendix D, Upgrade routes and kits, although for the latest changes you must look on the HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Partner Website (http://www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site). On a few occasions, different software versions require different test procedures. Where necessary, these are noted.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-1

12 Running version 2.* test software

12.2

Messages While running test software, you can see any of the messages shown in Table 12-1: Message

Action Displays briefly

Mixer Valve Defect

Do nothing.

Displays continuously • Replace mixer valves. • Replace mainboard.

Tank Pressure High

Do nothing.

• Replace mixer valves. • Replace mainboard.

Tank Pressure Low

Do nothing.

• Ensure that both the high-pressure air and the high-pressure oxygen supply at the rear of RAPHAEL are functioning properly.

Air Missing

Do nothing.

• Ensure that the high-pressure air connection at the rear of RAPHAEL is functioning properly.

O2 Missing

Do nothing.

• Ensure that the high-pressure oxygen connection at the rear of RAPHAEL is functioning properly.

Baseline error

Do nothing.

• Start again at Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul., on page 12-47.

EEPROM Error: xxxx

Do nothing.

• Replace mainboard. Perform the tests described in Section 10, Manual electrical safety tests. Then perform all test software again.

Table 12-1. Test software messages and actions

12.3

Checklist Before starting, be sure that you: • Are familiar with the Typographic conventions and Expressions on page Conventions-2 • Have the necessary equipment (Appendix G, Maintenance tools and test equipment) • Have prepared RAPHAEL by performing actions described in the following sections: • Section 8, Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance • Section 9, Backup battery and voltage tests • Have compressed air and oxygen attached to the rear of the RAPHAEL • Have sufficient time (testing takes approximately 90 minutes) Consider also whether you must write a test report. Some hospitals require that you do this. If you do not have a suitable form, you can photocopy and use the one named RAPHAEL version 2.* and 3.* test software report at the back of this manual.

12.4

Functions of the test software test units The test units in the test software perform the following functions: • They display information • They enable you to run checks on RAPHAEL hardware and software

12-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Sequence of test software units

• They enable you to calibrate RAPHAEL hardware and software

12.5

Sequence of test software units Table 12-2 lists each of the units found in the test software in software version 2.*. WARNING •

•

Always perform all “Must do” tests, in the prescribed sequence, as shown in Table 12-2. (Earlier tests confirm the functioning of certain RAPHAEL components that are then used in later tests to configure other components.) If one of the tests indicates that you must replace a part or perform another test, do this immediately, then repeat the test you are on. Then repeat the complete series of tests.

CAUTION Air and oxygen must be connected to the high pressures inlets at the rear of the ventilator from test 5 onwards. Failure to do so can damage the inspiratory valve.

Must do?

Software version 2.*

Comments

Yes

Test 1 Memory

None.

Yes

Test 2 Display

None.

Yes

Test 3 Front

None.

Yes

Test 4 Alarm monitor

None.

Yes

Test 5 Mixer and Tank Pressure

None.

Yes

Test 6 Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

None.

Yes

Test 7 Pressure Sensors

None.

Yes

Test 8 I-Valve and E-Valve

None.

Yes

Test 9 Tightness and Overpressure

None.

Yes

Test 10 O2 Cell Measurement

None.

Yes

Test 11 Interface

You only perform this test if the optional communication interface is installed on RAPHAEL.

Yes

Test 12 Calibration + Scaling Values

There are two slightly different versions of this test:

Test 12 EEPROM Values

• Test 12 Calibration + Scaling Values is for Software version 2.0* • Test 12 EEPROM Values is for Software version 2.2* This unit does not enable you to test RAPHAEL, but enables you to check that the calibration values you set in previous test units appear correct.

No

Test 13: Gas Delivery Controls

No

Test 14: Sensor Values

These tests are performed at HAMILTON MEDICAL AG only. Instructions are not included in this manual.

Table 12-2. Sequence of test software units

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-3

12 Running version 2.* test software

Must do?

Software version 2.*

Comments

Yes

Test 15 Supply Voltages

None.

No

Test 16: Alarm Messages

This test is performed at HAMILTON MEDICAL AG only. Instructions are not included in this manual.

No

Test 17 Event Log

These tests are not compulsory. However, you can perform them if you wish.

No

Test 18 Trend Data

Table 12-2. Sequence of test software units

12.6

Entering test software mode To enter test software mode: 1. Make sure RAPHAEL is switched off. 2. Set microswitch S1 on the main circuit board to the ON position using a pen or suitable tool. (Figure 12-1.)

Figure 12-1. Setting microswitch S1 to ON

WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.) 3. Connect the RAPHAEL to the mains power supply. 4. Switch on the RAPHAEL. The RAPHAEL starts in test software mode.

12-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Entering test software mode

5. that the AC power indicator LED on the front is illuminated. (Figure 12-2.)

Figure 12-2. AC power indicator LED

6. that the display shows Test 1: Memory. (Figure 12-3.)

Figure 12-3. The Test 1: Memory test, as first displayed

7. that LED 1 on the mainboard starts blinking. (Figure 12-4.)

Blinking LED 1

Figure 12-4. Position of LEDs on mainboard PN 157373. (Other

mainboards are similar.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-5

12 Running version 2.* test software

12.7

How to use the test software Turn the P&T-knob to scroll to the required test, then press the knob to activate the test. When you first enter test software mode, Test 1: Memory is selected (but not activated) as shown in Figure 12-3. After finishing each test, select and activate Close.

12.7.1

Alarms during test software mode While in test software mode, no alarms are displayed except the Technical Fault 1 (TF 1 Code *), and gas delivery alarms. You can find further information in the alarms section in the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent, and in Section 14, Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting.

12.7.2

Exiting test software mode To exit the test software, switch off the RAPHAEL and set switch S1 on the main circuit board to the “off” position. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.)

12-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1: Memory Test 1.1

Overview This series of tests checks: • • • •

The memory function The setting of the altitude The reading of operating hours The real-time clock

It also lets you reset the scaling values and configuration data if required. Test 1.2

Preparation Activate Test 1: Memory. You see a screen similar to the one shown Figure 12-5.

Operating Hours shown here when setting required

These fields only with mainboard PN 157265 and PN 157373

:

ASV enabled or † ASV enabled shown here, depending on software version

Displays “None” with mainboard PN 157250 Figure 12-5. The Memory test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-7

12 Running version 2.* test software

Note • If you run this test directly after installing a new software PROM with software version 2.*C, but you did not install a new “Flash” PROM, you see a message similar to the following: Graphics Module needs to be reprogrammed Please press button to reprogram Graphics Module 168 blocks need to be programmed Respond to this by pressing the P&T-knob. For more information, see screen. on page 14-17. • If you run this test directly after installing any new software, it is very likely that you will see the following message: Checksum error while reading data from EEPROM. Execute memory test and set factory settings. In this case, perform Test 1: Memory in the normal way, making sure to activate: Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings. • If any other message is displayed, look for the message in Section 14.6, General troubleshooting, on page 14-13. • If the screen does not display text clearly, check the contrast adjustment as described in Test 2.4, Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only), on page 12-20. (You cannot do this with RAPHAEL Color.)

Troubleshooting Symptom

12-8

Action

Cannot activate test.

Replace P&T-knob.

Screen is not clear.

Perform Test 2.4, Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only), on page 12-20.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.3

Checking and setting the scaling values that Scaling Values (the field near the bottom of the screen) reads OK. If the reading is Not OK, activate Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings (the field near the top of the screen). WARNING •

•

Only activate Scaling Values to Factory Settings or Configuration Data to Factory Settings if the corresponding value reads Not OK. This action sets these parameters to their factory-default, precalibration values. While these values make an appropriate starting point for performing these tests, they are not correct for ventilating a patient. If you set the scaling values to the factory settings, you must perform all the tests in this section.

Troubleshooting Symptom

June 9, 2006

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Activate Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings.

Scaling Values: Not OK

• If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

PN 61067/05

12-9

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 1.4

Checking and setting the configuration data that Configuration Data reads OK. If the reading is Not OK, activate Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings.

Troubleshooting Symptom

12-10

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Activate Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings.

Configuration Data: Not OK

• If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.5

Checking and adjusting the altitude setting The altitude setting is for compensation of the flow measurement at the Flow Sensor. This measurement influences RAPHAEL’s calculation of flow and volume. Altitude is set to the operating height of the RAPHAEL, measured in meters above sea level. If required, adjust the value with the P&T-knob. (The factory setting is 700m. You can adjust it in increments of 100m.) WARNING You must adjust the altitude setting for the location in which RAPHAEL will operate. This is not necessarily the same as the altitude at which you are performing this test.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-11

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 1.6

Checking and setting the number of operating hours The Operating Hours value is displayed near the bottom of the screen, and shows the total number of hours that the unit has been in operation (Figure 12-5 on page 12-7). Unless you have just changed the mainboard, ensure that the value displayed approximates the number of hours that RAPHAEL has been in operation. (For help in this, see Test 1.6.1.) If you have just changed the mainboard, use the P&T-knob to reset the operating hours as closely as possible to the original value displayed on RAPHAEL. Note If you have not just changed the mainboard, you cannot reset the operating hours value. Go to Test 1.7, Date and Time.

Test 1.6.1

Determining the operating hours value To estimate the time RAPHAEL has been in operation, you must answer two questions: • How long has the RAPHAEL been in the hospital? • What sort of regimen does the hospital practice — are the machines left on all day and night, or are they turned off between patients? If the RAPHAEL is in a hospital where it is kept running continuously, the number of operating hours is 720 multiplied by the number of months the ventilator was in the hospital. In hospitals in which RAPHAEL is not kept running continuously, an average number of operating hours is 400 a month. In this case, the number of operating hours is 400 multiplied by the number of months of use. Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

The following error message is displayed at the bottom of the screen: Operating Hours: Not OK

• Reset the operating hours. • If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

In addition the following message is shown in the middle of the screen: Operating Hours: ---The value for the number of operating hours is unreasonably high. (For example, 100000.)

12-12

HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]) for a solution.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.7

Date and Time If these fields are present, both are correct. If required, adjust them using the P&T-knob. Note Only RAPHAEL units with serial numbers higher than 2000 were fitted in the factory with a real-time clock on their mainboard (PN 157265 or PN 157373). Earlier units, with serial numbers below 2000, were fitted with mainboard PN157250, and, unless later changed, do not have a real-time clock. They therefore do not show this field. For more information, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility.

Troubleshooting Symptom Date or time incorrect.

Action • Reset the date and time. • If the date or time become incorrect again, change the real-time clock battery. (Section 15.6, Changing the real-time lithium clock battery, on page 15-19.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-13

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 1.8

ASV enabled Note With software versions 2.2S and 2.2C, this field is not displayed. This field, when present, displays either ASV enabled or ASV disabled, depending upon the way RAPHAEL is configured. 1. If the ASV field is displayed, that it reads: • † ASV enabled if you are in the USA • : ASV enabled if you are in the rest of the world If necessary, activate or deactivate this field using the P&T-knob. 2. Activate Close.

12-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.9

Checking the clock battery Note Only RAPHAEL units with serial numbers higher than 2000 were fitted in the factory with a real-time clock on their mainboard (PN 157265 or PN 157373). Earlier units, with serial numbers below 2000, were fitted with mainboard PN157250, and, unless later changed, do not have a real-time clock. They therefore show Clock Battery None. For more information, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility. that the value of Clock Battery is OK or None.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

You have mainboard PN 157265 or PN 157373, and, the value of Clock Battery is None or Low.

June 9, 2006

Replace clock battery and set the date and time as shown in Section 15.6, Changing the real-time lithium clock battery, on page 15-19.

PN 61067/05

12-15

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 2: Display Test 2.1

Overview This series of tests checks the display, and enables you to adjust the screen contrast to the required value on monochrome instruments. The color and monochrome versions of this test differ slightly from one another.

Test 2.2

Preparation Activate Test 2: Display. If you have a RAPHAEL or RAPHAEL Silver, you see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 12-6.

This field not displayed in RAPHAEL Color

Figure 12-6. The Display test screen for RAPHAEL basic and Silver

Note If you have a RAPHAEL Color, the Screen Contrast field is not displayed.

12-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display

Test 2.3

Testing the display 1. Activate Display Test. A grid of dots is displayed. Make sure that the pattern is regular and no lines are missing. (Figure 12-7 shows an approximation to the grid, but is limited in accuracy because of the printing process.) If you have a RAPHAEL Color, make sure that the screen is only black and white: there should not be any colored pixels.

Figure 12-7. The first black-and-white test grid

2. Press the P&T-knob again. The a grid of a darker shade is displayed. Again, make sure that the pattern remains regular and no lines are missing. (Figure 12-8 shows an approximation to the grid, but is limited in accuracy because of the printing process.) If you have a RAPHAEL Color, also make sure that the screen is only black and white: there should not be any colored pixels.

Figure 12-8. The second black-and-white test grid

3. Press the P&T-knob again. If you do not have a RAPHAEL Color, the Test 2: Display screen is displayed (Figure 12-6 on page 12-16). In this case, go now to Test 2.4, Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only), on page 12-20.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-17

12 Running version 2.* test software

If you have a RAPHAEL Color, the following screen is displayed. (Figure 12-9.)

Figure 12-9. The first color test screen

Make sure that all colors are clearly displayed as in the picture. There must be no wrongly illuminated pixels, and there must be no more than 5 unilluminated pixels. 4. If you have a RAPHAEL Color, press the P&T-knob again. You see the same screen, but inverted. (Figure 12-10.)

Figure 12-10. The second color test screen

5. Make sure that all colors are displayed as in the picture. There must be no wrongly illuminated pixels, and there must be no more than 5 unilluminated pixels.Press the P&T-knob again. You have now finished this test. You cannot perform Test 2.4, Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only), because you have a color display. Go to Test 3: Front, on page 12-22.

12-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display

Troubleshooting Symptom Color pixels are visible on the black and white screen grids.

Display is dark.

Action You might decide that minor imperfections in the TFT color screen are acceptable. However, if the imperfections make the screen in any way difficult to read, replace the screen as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21. • Replace dc/ac converter board. • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

Lines missing on display.

• Replace Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. (Section 15.4, Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-15.) • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-19

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 2.4

Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only) Note • You cannot perform this test and adjustment if you have a RAPHAEL Color. However, RAPHAEL Color has a more sophisticated screen that can be viewed from a wide range of angles without the need for adjustment. • The monochrome display is temperature-sensitive. Perform this test and adjustment in conditions that approximate the temperature in which the RAPHAEL is normally used. • During normal operation, you can adjust the contrast of the monochrome display in the Utilities window. 1. Activate Screen Contrast and check that the contrast can be adjusted with the P&T-knob. 2. Set the reading to 22.0. 3. Use the potentiometer on the mainboard (Figure 12-11) to adjust the screen contrast to be most easily readable. While doing this, look at the screen from the place at which the operator normally uses the RAPHAEL. (This could be slightly below or above the screen, depending on where the RAPHAEL is placed.)

Buzzer

Figure 12-11. Potentiometer for adjusting screen contrast on all mainboards

4. Activate Close.

12-20

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Contrast not adjustable with P&T-knob.

• You have a color display, with which it is (correctly) not possible to adjust the contrast. No action is possible.

Contrast not adjustable with potentiometer.

• Replace Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. (Section 15.4, Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-15.) • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21. • Replace mainboard.

Screen is not bright and clear and easily readable, even after adjustment.

June 9, 2006

• Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

PN 61067/05

12-21

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 3: Front Test 3.1

Overview This series of tests checks the loudspeaker, the buzzer, and the entire interface.

Test 3.2

Preparation Activate Test 3: Front. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-12.

Figure 12-12. The Front test screen

12-22

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Test 3.3

Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time 1. Press the alarm silence key on the front . (Figure 12-13). The alarm LED illuminates and Alarm Silence is activated on the screen. Alarm LED

Figure 12-13. Alarm silence key with alarm LED

2. that the alarm LED remains illuminated while the Alarm Silence Time counts up to 120 ±5 seconds. At this time, the light must extinguish (must go out). 3. Activate : Buzzer using the P&T-knob. 4. that the buzzer alarm sounds after Backup Buzzer Time displays 60 ±5 seconds. 5. Deactivate † Buzzer.

Troubleshooting Symptom

June 9, 2006

Action

Alarm LED does not illuminate after alarm silence key is pressed.

Replace front keyboard.

Timer does not start after alarm silence key is pressed.

Replace front keyboard.

Backup buzzer does not function after 60 seconds.

Replace mainboard.

Buzzer sounds after ≠ 60 seconds.

Replace mainboard.

Alarm silence time ≠ 120 seconds.

Replace mainboard.

PN 61067/05

12-23

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 3.4

Checking the nebulizer, trigger, and alarm LEDs 1. Activate : Nebulizer and that the nebulizer LED on the front illuminates. 2. Repeat this procedure for : Trigger and : Alarm, making sure the corresponding front LED illuminates in each case.

Troubleshooting Symptom Nebulizer LED does not function.

Action • Replace front keyboard. • Replace mainboard.

Trigger LED does not illuminate. Alarm LED does not illuminate.

12-24

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Test 3.5

Checking the alarm tones Activate the three alarm level tests in turn, and check that the corresponding number of beeps sound. • Alarm low (low priority): One sequence of two beeps. • Alarm medium (medium priority): One sequence of three beeps. • Alarm high (high priority): Two sequences of three-beeps-followed-by-two-beeps.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Alarm (low, medium, or high) does not function.

• Replace loudspeaker. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-25

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 3.6

Testing the display and front keyboards Switch on and off each key on the display and the front . (Figure 12-14.)

Display keys

Front keys

Figure 12-14. Display and front keys

that the display indicates each use of each key. (Figure 12-15 shows the screen with the Mode key active.)

Figure 12-15. The Front test screen with the Mode key active

12-26

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Troubleshooting Symptom Display keys do not operate.

Action • Check display keyboard cable. • Replace graphic controller board. • Replace display keyboard.

Front keys do not operate.

• Check front keyboard cable. • Replace graphic controller board. • Replace front keyboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-27

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 3.7

Testing the P&T-knob 1. Turn the P&T-knob clockwise, and that the field named P&T-Knob Clicks modulo 16 counts from 0 to 15. 2. Turn the P&T-knob anticlockwise, and that the field named P&T-Knob Clicks modulo 16 counts from 0 to -15. 3. Activate Close to return to the main menu.

Troubleshooting Symptom P&T-knob does not count step-by-step.

12-28

Action Replace P&T-knob.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4: Alarm monitor Test 4.1

Overview This series of tests checks the various different alarm conditions.

Test 4.2

Preparation Activate 4: Alarm monitor. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-16.

Figure 12-16. The Alarm monitor test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-29

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 4.3

Checking for error signals the following indicators remain inactive at all times during the tests you perform in Test 4: Alarm monitor: † Voltage error † uP clock † P-Source fail

Troubleshooting Symptom Voltage error activated.

Action • Replace mainboard.

uP clock activated. P-source fail activated.

12-30

• Replace mainboard. Inspiratory valve current too high.

• Replace inspiratory valve.

Expiratory valve current too high.

• Replace expiratory valve.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.4

Testing the power down status flag For background information about this test, see Appendix B.2, on page B-1. 1. Check that : Power down is activated. (This flag indicates that RAPHAEL was correctly powered down, by using the switch at the back of the unit, the last time it was powered down.) 2. Activate : Run status. (This simulates the start of normal ventilation.) 3. that † Power down is now deactivated. (This indicates that RAPHAEL has correctly reset this field at the start of normal ventilation.) Note You cannot reactivate this field except by switching off and switching on RAPHAEL. Note Alarm sound is not used in this test. Do not activate this field.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Power down not activated at start of test.

• Switch RAPHAEL off and on. • Replace mainboard.

Power down cannot be deactivated by Run status.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-31

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 4.5

Checking the alarm LED 1. Activate : Alarm light. 2. that the alarm LED on the front blinks (turns on and off repeatedly). (Figure 12-13 on page 12-23.) 3. Deactivate † Alarm light.

Troubleshooting Symptom Alarm silence LED does not blink.

12-32

Action • Replace mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Testing the alarm silence function

Test 4.6

1. Activate : Alarm silence. 2. that the alarm LED on the front illuminates (turns on). (Figure 12-13 on page 12-23.) 3. Deactivate † Alarm silence. 4. Press the alarm silence key on the front . 5. that the alarm LED illuminates. 6. Activate : New alarm. 7. that the alarm LED extinguishes (turns off). 8. Activate the alarm silence key on the front . The LED must not illuminate. 9. Deactivate † New alarm. 10. Press the alarm silence key again to silence future alarms (the alarm LED illuminates again).

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

New alarm does not cancel the alarm silence LED.

• Replace mainboard.

Alarm silence key does not function.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-33

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 4.7

Checking the inspiratory and expiratory valve unpowered position Activate : Valves off. As you do this: 1. that the ambient state LED on the mainboard (if present) illuminates. (Figure 12-17.)

Ambient state LED

Figure 12-17. The ambient state LED on mainboard PN 157265

(Mainboard PN 157373 is very similar)

Note This LED is not present on mainboard PN 157250. 2. that the expiratory valve plunger pin moves down to its unpowered (de-energized) position. (Figure 12-18.)

Pin in normal position

Pin in unpowered position

Figure 12-18. The expiratory valve plunger in normal and unpowered positions

3. Deactivate † Valves off.

12-34

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Ambient state LED does not illuminate (fitted on mainboard PN 157265 and PN 157373 only) and expiratory valve does not move down to its unpowered position.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

• Replace mainboard. • Replace inspiratory valve. • Replace expiratory valve.

12-35

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 4.8

Testing the front LEDs 1. Activate : Lamp test. 2. that each LED on the front illuminates and that the buzzer sounds. 3. Deactivate † Lamp test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Alarm, nebulizer or trigger LED does not function.

Action • Replace mainboard.

Backup buzzer does not function.

12-36

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.9

Testing the watchdog 1. Activate : Stop Watchdog. 2. that: • The expiratory valve plunger sinks to its unpowered (de-energized) position (Figure 12-18) • The alarm LED on the front blinks (turns on and off repeatedly) • The buzzer sounds • The following message is displayed: Watchdog working correctly 3. Switch the unit off and on. 4. Activate Test 4: Alarm monitor again, and go to Test 4.10.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Stop watchdog has no effect.

June 9, 2006

• Replace mainboard.

PN 61067/05

12-37

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 4.10

Testing backup battery operation 1. that: • † Battery operation is not activated • † Battery low is not activated • The ac power indicator LED on the front is illuminated (switched on) (Figure 12-2 on page 12-5) 2. Disconnect the power cord from the unit. 3. that: • : Battery operation is activated • † Battery low is not activated • The ac power indicator LED on the front extinguishes (switches off) (Figure 12-2 on page 12-5) 4. Reconnect the unit to mains power.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Battery operation activated while mains connected.

• Replace fuse. • Replace power supply. • Replace mainboard.

Battery low activated.

• Replace mainboard.

ac power indicator LED malfunctions.

• Replace front keyboard. • Replace power supply.

Not possible to activate Battery operation by removing power cord.

12-38

• Replace power supply.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.11

Testing the fan

Test 4.11.1

Fan test 1 1. Carefully stop the fan from rotating by applying light pressure to the center of rotor. 2. that : Fan error activates. 3. Release the fan. 4. that † Fan error deactivates.

Test 4.11.2

Fan test 2 1. Disconnect the fan cable from the mainboard (plug P16/Fan). 2. that : Fan error activates. 3. Reconnect the fan cable. 4. that † Fan error deactivates. Troubleshooting Symptom

Action • Replace fan.

Fan error activated while fan is running.

• Replace mainboard.

Fan error deactivated while fan is not running.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

• Replace fan. • Replace mainboard.

12-39

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 4.12

Checking again for error signals the following indicators are still inactive: † Voltage error † uP clock † P-Source fail Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Voltage error activated.

• Replace mainboard.

uP clock activated. P-source fail activated.

12-40

• Replace mainboard. Inspiratory valve current too high.

• Replace inspiratory valve.

Expiratory valve current too high.

• Replace expiratory valve.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure Test 5.1

Overview This series of tests checks the gas mixer system and tank pressure. During the tests, both the oxygen and the air mixer solenoid valves are activated separately for individual testing. Throughout the tests the nebulizer valve remains open to allow you to measure the tank pressure at the nebulizer outlet. WARNING During this test series, RAPHAEL automatically switches on the nebulizer valve. If you switch the valve off by using the nebulizer key on the front , you will obtain false readings.

Test 5.2

Preparation 1. Connect the air and oxygen supplies to the unit. (Figure 12-19.)

Figure 12-19. The gas supplies connected to the unit

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-41

12 Running version 2.* test software

2. Activate 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-20.

Figure 12-20. The Mixer and Tank Pressure test screen

12-42

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Test 5.3

Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves 1. Set your pressure gauge to measure in a range of approximately 0 to 2 bars. 2. Connect the pressure gauge to the nebulizer outlet as shown in Figure 12-21. Pressure Pressurecontroller gauge

Range: 0 to 2 bars

Stopper Figure 12-21. The tubing setup for Test 5.3, Testing the air and oxygen mixer

valves 3. Close the patient outlet with a stopper. 4. Activate Air Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-22.

Figure 12-22. The screen you see by activating Air Test

5. the Ptank max, Ptank min, and Offset frequency readings according to Table 12-3. Field

RAPHAEL must display

Ptank max

950 to 1100

Ptank min

840 to 860

Offset frequency Hz

4720 to 7080

Table 12-3. Values for the air and O 2 tests

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-43

12 Running version 2.* test software

6. Activate Stop running test. 7. Activate O2 Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-23.

Figure 12-23. The screen you see by activating O2 Test

8. the Ptank max, Ptank min, and Offset frequency readings again, also according to Table 12-3 on page 12-43. 9. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Tank Pressure Low displayed

Action • Check the oxygen and the air supplies. • Check the tank and tank mounting for leaks.

Offset frequency outside specification and mixer valve leak

• Replace dPmixer pressure sensor cable. • Replace dPmixer pressure sensor. • Replace rubber mounting block. • Replace air and oxygen mixer valves. • Replace mainboard.

Ptank Max pressure outside specification

• Check gas is connected and supply is sufficient (no low pressure or flow). • Check internal tubing for leak or disconnection (including nebulizer tubing). • Perform Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 12-72 to recalibrate the inspiratory valve, then return to Test 5.3, Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves, on page 12-43. • Replace the mixer valves in turn, performing this test after each replacement.

12-44

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Test 5.4

Testing the tank overpressure valve 1. Confirm that the pressure gauge and stopper are still in place. (Figure 12-24.) Pressure Pressurecontroller gauge

Stopper Figure 12-24. The patient outlet closed for Test 6.3

2. Activate : Air Valve. 3. the tank pressure reading according to Table 12-4. (During this test the tank overpressure valve opens with a rasping sound.) Field

Pressure Gauge

Ptank

1200 to 1600

RAPHAEL must display Pressure gauge value ±300

Table 12-4. Values for tank overpressure test

4. Deactivate † Air Valve. 5. Remove the pressure gauge.

Troubleshooting Symptom Ptank pressure sensor outside specification

Action • Replace Ptank pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard.

Ptank measured on gauge > 1.6 bar Ptank measured on gauge < 1.2 bar

• Replace tank overpressure valve. • Check that gas supply is sufficient (low pressure or flow). • Replace tank overpressure valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-45

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 5.5

Testing the air and oxygen inlet mixer valves for leakage 1. Activate : Air Valve and then deactivate † Air Valve to bring the tank up to a high pressure. 2. Reduce the pressure in the tank to very approximately 100 mbar, as displayed by Ptank. (Figure 12-1 on page 12-4.) You do this by activating and then deactivating the Nebulizer key on the front . 3. Wait approximately 5 seconds, while the pressure in the tank stabilizes. 4. Monitor the pressure for a period of approximately 30 seconds. Make sure that the pressure decreases during this time. 5. Leave the stopper in place, and activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Ptank displays a constant or a rising pressure.

• Replace one of the mixer valves and perform this test again. • If necessary replace the second mixer valve.

12-46

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul. Test 6.1

Overview This series of tests checks each of the following: • • • •

The Flow Sensor autozero valves The extended rinse flow valves The Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve The nebulizer valve

The schematics displayed in Table 12-5 show the positions of these components. You can find these schematics in Appendix J, Spare parts and schematics. Valve description

Valve names used in different places This test

Schematic ZCH157276 Blatt 1

Schematic ZCH614186 Blatt 2

Flow Sensor autozero valve on side proximal to patient.

V1

AZ dPptm proximal (V1)a

6 Autozero valve proximal

Flow Sensor autozero valve on side distal to patient.

V2

AZ dPptm distal (V2)a

7 Autozero valve distal

Extended rinse flow valve on side proximal to patient.

V3

Ext. AZ dPptm proximal (V3)b

4 Extended rinse flow valve

Extended rinse flow valve on side distal to patient.

V4

Ext. AZ dPptm distal (V4)b

5 Extended rinse flow valve

Autozero valve for the Pvent pressure sensor.

V5

AZ Pvent (V5)

16 Autozero valve Pvent

Valve controlling flow of gas from the tank to the nebulizer outlet.

Nebulizer

Nebulizer

3 Nebulizer valve

Table 12-5. Valve naming conventions a. dPptm stands for “differential pressure of the pneumatic tachometer” (Flow Sensor). b. Despite the name used in this schematic, this is not an autozero valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-47

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 6.2

Preparation Activate Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-25.

Figure 12-25. The Ext. Autozero and Nebul. test screen

12-48

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 6.3

Testing the autozero valves 1. Activate Autozero Valves Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-26.

Figure 12-26. The screen you see by activating Autozero Valves Test

The Flow Sensor autozero valves V1 and V2 switch on and off in the following sequence: • † V1 and † V2 (5 seconds) • : V1 and : V2 (5 seconds) • † V1 and † V2 (5 seconds) • and so on 2. Seal the silver Flow Sensor outlet with a finger or thumb as shown in Figure 12-27.

blue

Figure 12-27. Sealing one Flow Sensor outlet

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-49

12 Running version 2.* test software

3. With Autozero Valve test still running, the pressure reading dPptm according to Table 12-6. Field

Silver connector sealed

Blue connector sealed

V2 deactivated

V2 activated

V1 deactivated

V1 activated

-.--

-0.6 to 0.6

-.--

-0.6 to 0.6

dPptm

Table 12-6. Values for dPptm reading during autozero valve test

(dPptm is the differential pressure at the pneumatic tachometer, normally called the Flow Sensor.) 4. Unseal the silver Flow Sensor, and seal the blue Flow Sensor outlet. 5. With Autozero Valve test still running, the pressure reading dPptm according to Table 12-6. 6. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Autozero valves V1 & V2 do not function.

• Replace each autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard. • Check gas is connected and supply is sufficient (no low pressure or flow).

dPptm ≠ -----.-- while autozero valve activated.

• Check internal tubing for leak or disconnection (including nebulizer tubing). • Check dPptm pressure sensor cable. • Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace pneumatic block.

Inspiratory valve zero point out of range.

dPptm ≠ 0±0.6 while autozero valve activated.

Perform Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 12-72 to recalibrate the inspiratory valve, then return to Test 6.3, Testing the autozero valves, on page 12-49. • Check dPptm pressure sensor cable. • Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace each autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard.

12-50

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 6.4

Testing the extended rinse flow valves 1. Connect a Flow Sensor to RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 12-28. (Note that the stopper must be in place.)

Stopper

Figure 12-28. The tubing setup for Test 6.4, Testing the extended rinse flow

valves 2. Activate Extended Rinse Flow Valves Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-29.

These fields activate alternately

Figure 12-29. The screen you see by activating Extended Rinse Flow Valves

Test The extended rinse flow valves : V3 and : V4 switch in the sequence: • : V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and : V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • and so on

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-51

12 Running version 2.* test software

3. Using Table 12-7, that whichever valve is active (: V3 or : V4), pressure reading dPptm displays the correct corresponding pressure. Field

With V3 active, RAPHAEL must display

With V4 active, RAPHAEL must display

dPptm

≥ 0.8 mbar

≤ -0.8 mbar (-0.8, -2... -∞ mbar)

Table 12-7. Values for dPptm reading in extended rinse flow valve test

(dPptm is the differential pressure at the pneumatic tachometer, normally called the Flow Sensor.) 4. Activate Stop running test. 5. Disconnect the Flow Sensor but leave the stopper in place.

Troubleshooting Symptom • dPptm < 0.8 mbar while V3 active.

Action • Replace pneumatic block.

• dPptm > -0.8 mbar while V4 active. Extended autozero valves V3 & V4 do not function.

• Replace each extended autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard.

12-52

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 6.5

Testing the Pvent autozero valve 1. Activate Pvent Autozero Valve Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-30 on page 12-53. Valve V5 switches on and off with an interval of 5 seconds.

Switches on and off with an interval of 5 seconds

Figure 12-30. The screen you see by activating Pvent Autozero Valves Test

2. that while valve 5 is active (: V5), Pprox = Pvent (±10.0). 3. that while valve 5 is inactive († v5), Pprox = 0.0 (±5.0), Pvent ≥ 80. 4. Disconnect the stopper. 5. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom • Pvent ≠ Pprox ±10.0 while V5 active. • Pprox ≠ 0 ±5 while V5 inactive.

Action • Check the Pprox pressure sensor cable. • Replace Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace the Pvent autozero valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-53

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 6.6

Testing the nebulizer valve 1. Activate the Nebulizer (: Nebulizer) as shown in Figure 12-31.

Figure 12-31. The Ext. Autozero and Nebul. screen with Nebulizer active

2. that while the nebulizer is activated (: Nebulizer), a flow is provided at the nebulizer outlet. (Figure 12-32.)

Flow of air from nebulizer outlet

Figure 12-32. The flow of gas at the nebulizer outlet

3. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom No flow at nebulizer outlet.

Action • Check internal tubing for leaks or disconnections. • Replace nebulizer valve. • Replace mainboard.

12-54

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Test 7: Pressure Sensors Test 7.1

Overview This series of tests checks and calibrates the following pressure sensors: • dPptm (the sensor measuring pneumatic tachometer differential pressure—the pressure differential across the Flow Sensor) • Pprox (the sensor measuring pressure in the patient circuit at the Flow Sensor) • Pvent (the sensor measuring pressure in the patient circuit at the inspiratory valve)

Test 7.2

Preparation Activate Test 7: Pressure Sensors. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-33.

Figure 12-33. The Pressure Sensors test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-55

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 7.3

Autozeroing dPptm, Pprox and Pvent 1. Connect the inspiratory tube and expiratory tube, and make sure that the Flow Sensor is not attached to the RAPHAEL. (Figure 12-34.)

Figure 12-34. Inspiratory and expiratory tube connected with Y-piece for

Test 7.3 2. Activate Autozero. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-35.

Figure 12-35. The test screen you see by activating Autozero

12-56

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

3. Activate Perform Autozero to perform a zero-point error compensation for the pressure sensors. Make sure that the screen displays the values shown in Table 12-8.

These rows added for information only.

Field

RAPHAEL must display

dPptm

0.00 ±0.1 mbar

Paw

OK

Vaw

OK

Pvent

OK

dPptm ADU

492 to 532

dPptm zoom ADU

412 to 612 (Version 3.0)

Table 12-8. Values for autozero test

4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Paw not OK

• Check Pvent pressure sensor cable.

Vaw not OK

• Check dPptm pressure sensor cable.

Pvent not OK

• Check Pprox pressure sensor cable.

dPptm out of range

• Replace Pvent pressure sensor. • Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace autozero valves in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-57

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 7.4

Checking and adjusting dPptm gain In this test, you calibrate the gain applied by RAPHAEL to the dPptm pressure sensor signal. You do this by adjusting a potentiometer. WARNING During this procedure you must be sure to work to an accuracy of ±0.01 mbar. This means you must have a pressure gauge capable of this accuracy. Any RAPHAEL adjusted less accurately will give an incorrect volume of gas to the patient.

1. Activate Adjust dPptm gain. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-36.

Figure 12-36. The screen you see by activating Adjust dPptm gain

2. Set your pressure gauge to read in a range of approximately 0 to 2.5 mbar.

12-58

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

3. Connect the tubing system as shown in Figure 12-37. The bottle should be one liter or larger. (For an alternative system, see Appendix B.3, on page B-2.)

Stopper

Flow Flowregulator regulator

Pressure controller Pressure gauge

1 liter

Figure 12-37. Tubing setup for Test 7.4

4. Provide a pressure of 2.0 to 2.5 mbar (as measured by the pressure gauge) to the silver Flow Sensor outlet on the front , by adjusting the flow regulator. (The pressure is generated by the rinse flow.) dPptm zoom displays ----Note Do not apply a pressure of more than 2.5 mbar. 5. that dPptm displays the correct value (Table 12-9). Field

dPptm

RAPHAEL must display With silver Flow Sensor outlet

With blue Flow Sensor outlet

Pressure gauge value ±0.02 mbar (shown as a negative value on RAPHAEL)

Pressure gauge value ±0.02 mbar (shown as a positive value on RAPHAEL)

Table 12-9. Values for dPptm gain adjustment

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-59

12 Running version 2.* test software

If the value is not in range, adjust it using the dPptm gain potentiometer. (Figure 12-38, Figure 12-39 or Figure 12-40.)

Figure 12-38. dPptm gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250

Figure 12-39. dPptm gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157265

12-60

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Figure 12-40. dPptm gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

6. If dPptm shows the correct value, reduce the pressure to 0.8 to 0.9 mbar by adjusting the flow regulator. 7. that dPptm zoom displays the correct value. (Table 12-10). Field

RAPHAEL must display With silver Flow Sensor outlet

With blue Flow Sensor outlet

dPptm value ±0.01 mbar

dPptm value ±0.01 mbar

dPptm zoom

Table 12-10. Values for dPptm zoom gain adjustment

If the value is not in range use the dPptm gain potentiometer for adjustment. 8. Repeat step (3) to step (7), using the blue Flow Sensor outlet. It must not be necessary to make any adjustments. 9. Remove the stopper and wait 5 seconds. 10. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom

June 9, 2006

Action

Pressure sensor signal dPptm ≠ dPptm zoom.

Replace mainboard.

Pressure sensor dPptm not adjustable.

Replace mainboard.

PN 61067/05

12-61

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 7.5

Checking Pvent zero adjustment 1. Make sure that no tubing is connected to the front of the RAPHAEL. 2. Activate Pvent Zero Check. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-41.

Figure 12-41. The screen you see by activating Pvent Zero Check

3. that Pvent (on the left of the screen) reads zero, as shown in Table 12-11. Field

RAPHAEL must display

Pvent

0.0 ±0.2

Table 12-11. Values for Pvent zero check

4. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pvent ≠ 0 mbar

Action • Check and adjust the inspiratory valve. Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 12-72. Then return to test Test 7.5Checking Pvent zero adjustment, on page 12-62. • Check Pvent pressure sensor cable. • Replace Pvent pressure sensor. • Replace Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard.

12-62

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Test 7.6

Checking and adjusting Pvent gain 1. Prepare the RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 12-42. Pressure controller Pressure gauge

Pressure connector

Figure 12-42. Tubing setup for Test 7.6, Checking and adjusting Pvent gain

2. Activate Adjust Pvent/Pprox gain. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-43.

Figure 12-43. The screen you see by activating Adjust Pvent/Pprox gain

3. Keep the Flow Sensor sealed with a finger or stopper while the system generates a pressure of approximately 50 mbar (check this on the pressure gauge).

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-63

12 Running version 2.* test software

4. that Pvent (on the left of the screen) reads the same as the pressure gauge, within the tolerances given in Table 12-12. Field

Pressure gauge

RAPHAEL must display

Pvent

45 to 55

Pressure gauge value ±0.5

Table 12-12. Values for Pvent gain adjustment

5. Use the Pvent gain potentiometer to adjust the reading if it is out of range. (Figure 12-44, Figure 12-45 or Figure 12-46.)

Figure 12-44. Pvent gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250

12-64

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Figure 12-45. Pvent gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157265

Figure 12-46. Pvent gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

6. Leave the tubing installation in place and continue to Test 7.7Adjusting Pprox gain.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Pvent gain cannot be adjusted into the correct range.

June 9, 2006

• Replace the Pvent pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard.

PN 61067/05

12-65

12 Running version 2.* test software

Symptom

Action

RAPHAEL cannot generate 45 to 55 mbar.

• Check for leak in tubing setup. • Check ambient valve is tightly fitted, without leak. • Check patient overpressure valve is tightly fitted, without leak. • Perform Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265, on page 12-77 or Test 8.5, Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373, on page 12-81 to recalibrate expiratory valve, then return to Test 7.6, Checking and adjusting Pvent gain, on page 12-63. • Replace expiratory valve.

12-66

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Test 7.7

Adjusting Pprox gain 1. Keep the Flow Sensor sealed as shown in Figure 12-42 on page 12-63. Remain on the screen shown in Figure 12-43 on page 12-63. 2. that pressure Pvent still reads approximately 50 mbar. (Refer again to Table 12-12 on page 12-64.) 3. Activate Adjust Pprox gain. 4. that the message Calibration successful appears. 5. Leave all tubing in place. 6. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom The following message is displayed: Calibration not successful

June 9, 2006

Action Repeat the test, making sure that the pressure is in the correct range.

PN 61067/05

12-67

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 7.8

Checking the automatic analysis of the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors 1. Disconnect the Flow Sensor body (but not the sensor tubing) and the pressure gauge as shown in Figure 12-47.

Figure 12-47. Tubing setup for Test 7.8, Checking the automatic analysis of

the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors 2. Activate Sensor Analysis. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-48.

Figure 12-48. The screen you see by activating Sensor Analysis

3. Activate Perform Sensor Analysis.

12-68

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

4. that Pprox and dPptm read Sensor OK, as shown on Table 12-13. Fields

RAPHAEL displays

Pprox and dPptm

Comment This is the expected and correct result.

Sensor OK

Table 12-13. Result from the Sensor Analysis test

5. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

One of the following error messages is displayed:

• Check the tubing for leaks.

• Sensor out of range • Sensor defect

• Check Pprox pressure sensor cable is connected and not defective.

• Problems with tubes

• Replace Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-69

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 7.9

Calibrating the Flow Sensor 1. Connect the Flow Sensor and the tubing as shown in Figure 12-49.

Figure 12-49. Tubing setup for Test 7.9, Calibrating the Flow Sensor

2. Activate Flow Sensor Calibration. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-50.

Figure 12-50. The screen you see by activating Flow Sensor Calibration

3. Activate Perform Inspiration Calibration. 4. Wait while the RAPHAEL displays Calibration running. After a time, the Inspiration deviation is displayed on the screen.

12-70

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

5. that the reading corresponds to Table 12-14. Field

RAPHAEL must display

Inspiration deviation

<±35%

Expiration deviation

<±35%

Table 12-14. Values for Flow Sensor calibration

6. Turn the Flow Sensor. 7. Activate Perform Expiration Calibration. 8. Wait while the RAPHAEL displays Calibration running. After a time, the Expiration deviation is displayed on the screen. 9. that the reading corresponds to Table 12-14. Note You do not use the 100% O2 test. 10. Disconnect all tubing and the Flow Sensor. 11. Activate Close twice.

Troubleshooting Symptom Calibration fails.

June 9, 2006

Action Replace Flow Sensor.

PN 61067/05

12-71

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve Test 8.1

Overview This series of tests checks and adjusts the electronic and mechanical functioning of the inspiratory and expiratory valves.

Test 8.2

Preparation Activate Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-51.

Figure 12-51. The I-Valve and E-Valve test screen

12-72

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Test 8.3

Calibrating the inspiratory-valve control signal for zero flow 1. Connect the Flow Sensor as shown in Figure 12-52.

Blue tube Blue tube Figure 12-52. Tubing setup for Test 8.3, Calibrating the inspiratory-valve

control signal for zero flow 2. Activate I-Valve zero. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-53.

Figure 12-53. The screen you see by activating I-Valve zero

3. that the base of the flow curve is centered between points a and b. Adjust the curve with potentiometer V‘zero if required. (Figure 12-54, Figure 12-55 or Figure 12-56.) Note It does not matter if the top of the curve lies in a position outside of the window.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-73

12 Running version 2.* test software

Figure 12-54. V’zero potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250

Figure 12-55. V’zero potentiometer on mainboard PN 157265

12-74

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Figure 12-56. V’zero potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

4. Check that the width of the curve is at no point is greater than the distance from a to b. Figure 12-53 on page 12-73 shows a curve that is in range. Figure 12-57 shows a curve that is out of range.

Figure 12-57. An incorrect I-Valve zero curve

5. Check V’aw min is in accordance with Table 12-15. Value

RAPHAEL must display

V’aw min ml/s

10 to 66

Table 12-15. Values for I-Valve leak flow

6. Activate Stop running test.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-75

12 Running version 2.* test software

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Width of curve is greater than distance from a to b, as shown in Figure 12-57.

• Check inspiratory valve is clean. (See Section 15.3.2, Cleaning the inspiratory valve, on page 15-3.) • Replace inspiratory valve.

V’aw_min too large or too small.

• Adjust potentiometer V’zero. • Replace inspiratory valve.

Curve has bad shape.

• Check inspiratory valve is clean. (See Section 15.3.2, Cleaning the inspiratory valve, on page 15-3.) • Replace inspiratory valve.

No signal.

• Check Flow Sensor is connected in the correct direction. • Replace inspiratory valve. • Replace mainboard.

12-76

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Test 8.4

Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265 Note • This test is for mainboards PN 157250 and PN 157265 only. • If you have mainboard PN 157373, go to Test 8.5, Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373, on page 12-81. In this test, you check and calibrate the expiratory valve by adjusting the control voltage gain. 1. Identify your mainboard. If you have mainboard PN 157373, do not perform this test. Instead, go to Test 8.5, Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373, on page 12-81. 2. Connect the Flow Sensor and the tubing as shown in Figure 12-58. Pressure Pressuregauge controller

Pressure connector

Figure 12-58. Tubing setup for Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with

mainboard PN 157250 or 157265

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-77

12 Running version 2.* test software

3. Activate E-Valve test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-59.

Figure 12-59. The screen you see by activating E-Valve test

4. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper. RAPHAEL generates a range of different pressures at intervals of 5 seconds. 5. When the PEEP pressure is at 0.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 0.0 mbar continuously.) 6. Check that the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 12-16. Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

Table 12-16. Pprox zero-check tolerance

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps. 7. Activate Continue. 8. When the PEEP pressure rises to 25.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 25.0 mbar continuously.) 9. Turn the Exp. Gain potentiometer (Figure 12-60) until the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 12-17. This sets the gain applied to the expiratory valve. Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

24.5 to 25.5 mbar

24.8 to 25.2

Table 12-17. Pprox gain tolerance

12-78

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Figure 12-60. Exp. Gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250 and PN 157265

10. Activate Stop running test. 11. Go to Test 8.6, Testing the inspiratory valve controller, on page 12-86

Troubleshooting Symptom Pprox does not display correct zero value

Action Check the voltage between Pin 6 and Pin 7 on the mainboard. This is the connector marked P11, shown in Figure 12-61. To do this, do not remove the connector from the mainboard, but use the test probes on the connector itself. If the voltage difference is greater than 20 mV (>20 mV) replace each of the following in turn, testing after each replacement. • Cable P11. • The mainboard. • The power supply.

Pprox cannot be adjusted to required offset or gain values

• Check for leak in patient tubing. • Check expiratory valve cover and membrane for leaks and defects. • Replace expiratory valve. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-79

12 Running version 2.* test software

8

7 6

5 4 3

2

1

Figure 12-61. Connector P11

12-80

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Test 8.5

Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373 Note If you do not have mainboard PN 157373, use Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265, on page 12-77 instead of this test. In this test, you check and calibrate the expiratory valve by adjusting the control voltage offset and gain. Checking expiratory valve signal at zero pressure 1. Identify your mainboard. If you have mainboard PN 157250 or PN 157256, do not perform this test. Instead, perform Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265, on page 12-77. 2. Set your pressure gauge to read in a range of approximately 0 to 100 mbar. 3. Connect the Flow Sensor and the tubing as shown in Figure 12-62. Pressure Pressuregauge controller

Pressure connector

Figure 12-62. Tubing setup for Test 8.5, Testing and calibrating the

expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-81

12 Running version 2.* test software

4. Activate E-Valve test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-63.

Figure 12-63. The screen you see by activating E-Valve test

5. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper. RAPHAEL generates a range of pressures at intervals of 5 seconds. 6. When the PEEP pressure is at 0.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 0.0 mbar continuously.) 7. Check that the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 12-18. Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

Table 12-18. Pprox zero-check tolerance

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps.

Setting expiratory valve signal offset 8. Activate Continue. 9. When the PEEP pressure rises to 5.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 5.0 mbar continuously.)

12-82

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

10. Turn the Exp. Zero potentiometer (Figure 12-64) until the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 12-19. This sets the offset applied to the expiratory valve. Note It is acceptable for the value to fluctuate momentarily outside of this range.

Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

4.7 to 5.3 mbar

4.7 to 5.3 mbar

Table 12-19. Pprox gain tolerance

Figure 12-64. Exp. Zero potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps.

Setting expiratory valve signal gain 11. Activate Continue. 12. When the PEEP pressure rises to 50.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 50.0 mbar continuously.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-83

12 Running version 2.* test software

13. Turn the Exp. Gain potentiometer (Figure 12-65) until the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 12-20. This sets the gain applied to the expiratory valve. Pprox field on screen

Pprox value on pressure gauge

49.5 to 50.5 mbar

49.8 to 50.2

Table 12-20. Pprox gain tolerance

Figure 12-65. Exp. Gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps. 14. Activate Continue. 15. Repeat step (9) on page 12-82 to step (13) until no further adjustment is needed. 16. Activate Stop running test.

12-84

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Pprox does not display correct zero value

Check the voltage between Pin 6 and Pin 7 on the mainboard. This is the connector marked P11, shown in Figure 12-66. To do this, do not remove the connector from the mainboard, but use the test probes on the connector itself. If the voltage difference is greater than 20 mV (>20 mV) replace each of the following in turn, testing after each replacement. • Cable P11. • The mainboard. • The power supply.

Pprox cannot be adjusted to required offset or gain values

• Check for leak in patient tubing. • Check expiratory valve cover and membrane for leaks and defects. • Replace expiratory valve. • Replace mainboard.

8

7 6

5 4 3

2

1

Figure 12-66. Connector P11

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-85

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 8.6

Testing the inspiratory valve controller 1. Disconnect the transparent tube of the Flow Sensor from the RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 12-67.

Flow sensor tube disconnected

disconnect flow sensor tube

Figure 12-67. Tubing setup for Test 8.6, Testing the inspiratory valve

controller 2. Activate I-Valve controller (dynamic). You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-68.

Figure 12-68. The screen you see by activating I-Valve controller (dynamic)

3. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper as shown in Figure 12-67.

12-86

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

4. that each Pprox value is in range at all the different pressures generated by the unit (Table 12-21). Because of the speed at which the display changes, it is helpful to activate Hold at each step to enable you to better read the screen. RAPHAEL must display Pprox target

Pprox

Pprox peak

5 mbar

4 to 6 mbar

≤ 7 mbar

10 mbar

8.5 to 11.5 mbar

≤ 12 mbar

25 mbar

23.5 to 26.5 mbar

≤ 30 mbar

50 mbar

48.5 to 51.5mbar

≤ 60 mbar

Table 12-21. Values for I-Valve controller test

5. Activate Stop running test. 6. Activate Close. 7. Disconnect all the tubing.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pprox_peak out of range.

Action • Replace mainboard. • Replace inspiratory valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-87

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure Test 9.1

Overview This test checks: • • • • •

Test 9.2

The patient overpressure valve The “pills” that protect from rinse flow overpressure The “pills” that control the normal rinse flow For leaks in internal and external tubing The ambient valve

Preparation 1. Obtain a glass of water. You require this for Test 9.5, Testing the rinse flow “pills”, on page 12-92. 2. Activate Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-69.

Figure 12-69. The Tightness and Overpressure test screen

12-88

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9.3

Testing the patient overpressure valve 1. Close the patient outlet with a stopper as shown in Figure 12-70.

Rubber bung Stopper

Figure 12-70. Patient outlet closed with a stopper for Test 9.3, Testing the

patient overpressure valve 2. Activate Internal Pneumatic Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-71.

Figure 12-71. The screen you see by activating Internal Pneumatic Test

3. Activate : Mixer. 4. that the Pvent value lies in the range 80.0 to 120.0 mbar. 5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.4.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-89

12 Running version 2.* test software

Troubleshooting Symptom Pvent < 80 mbar.

Action • Check for internal leak. • Replace patient overpressure valve. • Replace pneumatic block.

Pvent > 120 mbar.

• Check patient overpressure valve is not blocked. • Replace patient overpressure valve.

12-90

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9.4

Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” WARNING During this test, make sure the pressure measured by the pressure gauge does not increase above 350 mbar. (Disconnect the gauge if necessary!) If it does, the dPptm pressure sensor will be damaged, and must be replaced.

1. that the patient outlet is still closed with the stopper. 2. that : Mixer is still active. 3. Connect the pressure gauge as shown in Figure 12-72, and wait for the pressure to rise and stabilize.

Pressure gauge

Stopper

Rubber bung Figure 12-72. Pressure gauge connected to Flow Sensor connector for Test 9.4, Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” 4. that the value on the pressure gauge lies in the range 100.0 to 300.0 mbar. 5. Remove the pressure gauge and the stopper. 6. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.5.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pressure gauge reading out of range.

June 9, 2006

Action • Replace pneumatic block.

PN 61067/05

12-91

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 9.5

Testing the rinse flow “pills” 1. Connect two identical tubes to the Flow Sensor connectors as shown in Figure 12-73. Immerse the tubes in the glass of water as shown in the diagram.

Identical tubes of equal length Equal length

Approximately equal number ofequal bubbles number of bubbles

Figure 12-73. Setup for Test 9.5, Testing the rinse flow “pills”

2. that the Internal Pneumatic Test and : Mixer are still activated. 3. that bubbles appear at both tube outlets, and that the number of bubbles (indicating the rate of flow) is approximately equal on each outlet. 4. Disconnect the two tubes. You do not require them or the water again. 5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.6.

Troubleshooting Symptom Number of bubbles not equal.

12-92

Action • Replace pneumatic block.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9.6

Testing for internal leaks 1. Connect a piece of tubing between the two Flow Sensor connectors as shown in Figure 12-74.

Tubing

Stopper Figure 12-74. Tubing setup for Test 9.6, Testing for internal leaks

2. Close the patient outlet with a stopper as shown in Figure 12-74. 3. that : Mixer is still active. 4. Deactivate † Mixer and measure the time required for the pressure to drop at Ptank. that the leakage of the tank is in the range displayed in Table 12-22. Value

RAPHAEL display must drop

Time span must be

Ptank

from 700 to 500 mbar

≥8 seconds

Table 12-22. Values for tank-pressure drop

5. Activate Stop running test. 6. Disconnect the tube and the stopper.

Troubleshooting Symptom Tank pressure drops too fast.

Action • Check inspiratory valve for leak. • Check tank overpressure valve for leak. • Check for leak between pneumatic block and attached component. • Check nebulizer valve for leak. • Replace pneumatic block.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-93

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 9.7

Testing for external leaks 1. Connect the tubing as shown in Figure 12-75.

Figure 12-75. Tubing setup for Test 9.7, Testing for external leaks

2. Activate External Tightness Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-76.

Figure 12-76. The screen you see by activating External Tightness Test

3. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper, as shown in Figure 12-75, and that the pressure displayed on RAPHAEL stays within the range 32.0 to 38.0 mbar. 4. Do not disconnect the Flow Sensor or tubing. 5. Activate Stop running test.

12-94

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Troubleshooting Symptom Pprox out of range.

Action • Check for leak in patient tubing. • Check for internal leak. • Check for ambient valve leak.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-95

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 9.8

Testing the ambient state 1. Connect your personal bacteria filter to the tubing as shown in Figure 12-77. Note An example of a suitable filter is shown on page G-5.

ÕÖ Bacteria Bacteriafilter filter Figure 12-77. The bacteria filter connected for Test 9.8, Testing the ambient

state 2. Activate Ambient Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-78.

Figure 12-78. The screen you see by activating Ambient Test

12-96

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

3. that the ambient state LED on the mainboard (if present) illuminates. (Figure 12-79.)

Ambient state LED

Figure 12-79. Ambient state LED on mainboard PN 157265

(Mainboards PN 157250 and PN 157373 are very similar)

Note This LED is not present on the older mainboard PN 157250. 4. that inspiration and expiration are possible, by breathing through the filter. 5. Disconnect the Flow Sensor and tubing. 6. Activate Stop running test. 7. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom Cannot inhale or exhale.

Action • Check that ambient valve is not blocked or defective. • Check that expiratory valve is not blocked or defective.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-97

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement Test 10.1

Overview This series of tests checks and adjusts oxygen measurement and the calibration of the oxygen cell. Note If there is no oxygen supply connected to the unit, you cannot perform these tests.

Test 10.2

Preparation 1. Make sure you have an oxygen cell available. 2. Connect RAPHAEL to both an oxygen and an air supply. 3. Activate Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement. You see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 12-80.

Figure 12-80. The O2 Cell Measurement test screen

12-98

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement

Test 10.3

Calibrating the oxygen measurement zero offset For this test, the oxygen cell must be electronically disconnected from RAPHAEL. 1. If necessary, disconnect the oxygen cell from RAPHAEL now. 2. Wait 15 seconds for the FiO2 ADU signal to stabilize (it must not fluctuate by more than plus or minus one digit). 3. Activate O2 Offset (at the top left of the screen). 4. the value displayed for O2 offset (near the bottom of the screen). The dashes displayed when the screen first opened must now be replaced by numerics (the value is not important) as shown in Figure 12-81.

Dashes replaced by value (Here shown as -10 However, any value can be shown.)

Figure 12-81. The O2 Cell Measurement test screen after O2 offset calibration

5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 10.4.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Screen displays --- ADU’s.

• Check oxygen cell is disconnected. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-99

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 10.4

Calibrating the oxygen measurement full-scale gain Note This test can only run immediately after performing Test 10.3. 1. Install the oxygen cell. 2. Activate O2 Calibration. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-82. This remains for two minutes during which time calibration takes place.

Figure 12-82. The screen you see by activating O2 Calibration

3. You see the original Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement screen again. (Figure 12-80 on page 12-98.) that the message Calibration successful is displayed near the bottom of this screen. 4. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 10.5.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Check oxygen cell is connected.

Calibration not OK

• Check oxygen is connected. • Check sintered disk flow restrictor is not blocked. • Check oxygen cell is not old or defective.

12-100

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement

Test 10.5

Checking the oxygen measurement 1. Activate FiO2 target (in the top part of the screen) and adjust it to the first of the two readings (25%) displayed in Table 12-23. RAPHAEL must display FiO2 target vol%

FiO2 vol%

25

22.0 to 28.0

40

37.0 to 43.0

Table 12-23. Values for the oxygen measurement test

2. that the FiO2 reading (in the center part of the screen) is in range after two minutes. (Table 12-23.) 3. Repeat the activation, adjustment and check, for the 40% value. 4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom FiO2 is out of range

Action • Check oxygen cell is connected. • Check oxygen is connected. • Check sintered disk flow restrictor is not blocked. • Check oxygen cell is not old or defective.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-101

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 11: Interface Note You can only perform the checks in this test unit if RAPHAEL has the optional communication interface installed.

Test 11.1

Overview This series of tests checks the: • Inspiratory/expiratory signal (used with the Special port of the optional communication interface to synchronize an optional nebulizer) • The nurse call signal (used with the Special port to trigger an external alarm system) In addition, you can check the RS232 port of the interface if you have a suitable external monitor. (For details of external monitors, see Appendix A.3, Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems, on page A-2.) You can find general information about the communication interface in Section 6, The optional communication interface.

Test 11.2

Preparation Activate Test 11: Interface. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-83.

Figure 12-83. The Interface test screen

Note If no interface board is installed, the message Not available is displayed on a blank screen. In this case, there is not interface fitted, and you cannot perform this test. Go to Test 12: EEPROM Values.

12-102

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 11: Interface

Test 11.3

Testing the inspiratory/expiratory signal 1. Set the multimeter to measure resistance (Ohms). 2. Connect the multimeter to pin 8 and pin 15 of the special connecting socket (Figure 12-84).

Pin 1

Pin 9

Pin 6 (Remote alarm return) Pin 7 (Remote alarm)

Pin 14 (Remote alarm return)

Pin 8 (I:E relay)

Pin 15 (I:E relay return)

Figure 12-84. Special port connector pin locations

3. Activate : I/E Signal. 4. Check that the multimeter displays a very low resistance. 5. Deactivate † I/E Signal. The connection opens. 6. Check that the multimeter displays a very high resistance.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action • Check ribbon cable connecting interface board to mainboard.

Resistance is not as specified.

• Replace communication interface board. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-103

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 11.4

Nurse Call (alarm switch) Note The results you expect from this test depend upon the revision of interface board fitted to your RAPHAEL. The differences are noted in the following instructions. (Old interface board: PN 157269/00. New board: PN 157269/01. The new board was fitted from March 2004.) 1. Make sure the multimeter remains set to measure resistance (Ohms). 2. Connect the multimeter to pin 7 and 14 of the special socket. (Figure 12-84.) 3. Activate : Nurse Call. 4. Check that the multimeter displays: • Interface board PN 157269/00: A very low resistance, showing that the connection is closed. • Interface board PN 157269/01: A very high resistance, showing that the connection is open. 5. Deactivate † Nurse Call. 6. Check that the multimeter displays: • Interface board PN 157269/00: A very high resistance, showing that the connection is open. • Interface board PN 157269/01: A very low resistance, showing that the connection is closed. 7. Connect the multimeter to pin 6 and 7. 8. Activate : Nurse Call. 9. Check that the multimeter displays: • Interface board PN 157269/00: A very high resistance, showing that the connection is open. • Interface board PN 157269/01: A very low resistance, showing that the connection is closed. 10. Deactivate † Nurse Call. 11. Check that the multimeter displays: • Interface board PN 157269/00: A very low resistance, showing that the connection is closed. • Interface board PN 157269/01: A very high resistance, showing that the connection is open.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action • Check ribbon cable connecting interface board to mainboard.

Resistance is not as specified.

• Replace communication interface board. • Replace mainboard.

12-104

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 11: Interface

Test 11.5

RS232C port loopback test This test enables you to check the interface with the loopback procedure. This procedure takes the output signals from two of the pins on the RS232 connector, and returns them to the RAPHAEL. The test reads the returned signal. 1. Short-circuit the following pins of the RS232 connector with appropriate wires: • Pin 2 and pin 3 • Pin 4 and pin 6 • Pin 7 and pin 8 (The pins are shown in Figure 12-84 on page 12-103.) 2. Activate Check Serial Interface. 3. that the message Interface test successful appears. 4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting . Symptom

Action

One of the following error messages is displayed:

• Check connecting wire.

• Transmission Error

• Check ribbon cable connecting interface board to mainboard.

• Transmission Timeout

• Replace interface board.

• RTS/CTS Error

• Replace mainboard.

• DTR/DSR Error

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-105

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 12: Calibration + Scaling Values Test 12: EEPROM Values Test 12.1

Overview This is not a true test, but a display of the numerous calibration and scaling values you set in earlier test units. The figures enable you to confirm, with reasonable certainty, that you performed the earlier test units satisfactorily. The different versions of this test perform identical functions.

Test 12.2

Preparation Depending on the software you are using, activate one of the following: • Test 12: Calibration + Scaling Values (Software version 2.0* and 2.1) • Test 12: EEPROM Values (Software version 2.2*)

Test 12.2.1

Test 12: Calibration + Scaling Values If you are running software version 2.0*, you see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-85. In this case, go directly to Test 12.3, Checking calibration values, on page 12-108.

Test 12: Calibration + Scaling Values Pprox gain 1.012 Pprox zoom gain 1.016 O2 offest/gain –6 0.800 Flow Insp/Exp 96 96 Insp:Exp 1.0 2.0 Monitoring 1 1 Monitoring 2 2 Monitoring 3 3 Mode 1 Sigh 0 Backup 1 Trigger 6 Available 000000011111

70 40 2 15 50 10 14 22.0

Curves Language O2 Cell Flow Sensor ASV enabled

0 1 1 1 0

6026 9 700

Weight kg Pmax mbar PEEP mbar Psupp mbar FiO2 vol% VT ml/kg Rrmax bpm Screen Contrast -V Run Time min Altitude m

Close Figure 12-85. The Calibration + Scaling Values test screen

12-106

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 12: Calibration + Scaling Values

Test 12.2.2

Test 12: EEPROM Values If you are running software version 2.2*, you see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-86.

Figure 12-86. The EEPROM Values test screen

In this case, do the following: 1. Activate EEPROM Scaling Data. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-87.

Figure 12-87. The screen you see by activating EEPROM Values

2. Go to Test 12.3, Checking calibration values. Note This test does not use EEPROM Configuration Data or EEPROM Time Data.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-107

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 12.3

Checking calibration values Check that the following values are not at their factory defaults, and are therefore probably correctly calibrated. (Table 12-24.) Parameter

Factory default value

Pprox gain

1.000

Pprox zoom gain

1.000

O2 offset O2 gain Flow Insp Flow Exp

These values are displayed together as O2 offset/gain in software version 2.0*.

0

These values are displayed together as Flow Insp/Exp in software version 2.2*.

100

1.000

Action

Check that factory default value is not displayed.

100

Table 12-24. Calibrated values to check

If the values appear to be correctly calibrated, go to Test 15: Supply Voltages, on page 12-111.

Troubleshooting If all or most of the values are still at their factory defaults as shown in Table 12-24, you did not perform the full series of tests correctly as described in 12.5Sequence of test software units, on page 12-3. In this case, repeat all tests, starting from Test 1: Memory, on page 12-7.

12-108

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 13: Gas Delivery Controls

Test 13: Gas Delivery Controls Test 14: Sensor Values Note These tests are for HAMILTON MEDICAL internal use only. Descriptions are not included in this document.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-109

12 Running version 2.* test software

12-110

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 15: Supply Voltages

Test 15: Supply Voltages Test 15.1

Overview This test enables you to check that RAPHAEL’ s power supply can recognize and can automatically switch to battery use when mains voltage is too low or unavailable. The test uses — and therefore checks — the mechanism RAPHAEL uses automatically during normal ventilation to test the battery every 20 minutes (with software version 2.*).

Test 15.2

Preparation Activate Test 15: Supply Voltages. You see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 12-88.

Figure 12-88. The Supply Voltages test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-111

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 15.3

Checking the power supply 1. Ensure that when † Mains off is not activated, the Battery voltage shows one of the following: • A value in the range 26.6 to 30 V • The characters -.---V This tells us that either the first part of the power supply, or the backup batteries, is supplying a voltage in the acceptable range to the second part of the power supply. Note RAPHAELs with the older mainboard (PN 157250) display the voltage at the battery when the mains supply is attached. RAPHAELs with a newer mainboard (PN 157265 or PN 157373) display -.---V if the voltage is 28 V or more. If it is lower, they display the voltage. 2. Ensure that the +5 V, +15 V and -15 V values are within the range shown in Table 12-25. This confirms that the second part of the power supply is working correctly at the input voltage shown in the Battery field. Field

Range

+5

4.95 to 5.25V

+15

13.5 to 15.75V

-15

-13.5 to -16.5V

Table 12-25. Voltages

3. Activate : Mains off and make sure that the battery voltage reads 24 to 26.5 V. This shows the voltage of the backup battery. 4. Check that the +5 V, +15 V and -15 V values are within the range shown in Table 12-25. This confirms that the second part of the power supply is working correctly with the input voltage shown in the Battery field. Note You have now completed all required software tests. You cannot perform test Test 16: , Alarm Messages, and you do not have to perform tests 17 and 18. If you wish to perform the two final tests, go to Test 17: , Event Log, on page 12-117 now. If not, go to Section 12.8, Optional completion point for test software, on page 12-114.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Battery voltage out of range when Mains off not activated.

Compare the voltage shown on screen with the voltage at the 24 V test point, as described in Section 9.3, Mainboard voltages test, on page 9-6. If the voltage is out of range, replace the power supply. If the voltage is in range, but the values shown on screen is wrong, replace the mainboard.

12-112

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 15: Supply Voltages

Symptom +5 V, +15 V or -15 V value out of range.

Action Compare the voltages shown on screen with the voltages at the test points, as described in Section 9.3, Mainboard voltages test, on page 9-6. If the voltages are out of range, replace the power supply. If the voltages are in range, but the screen values are wrong, replace the mainboard.

Battery voltage out of range when Mains off activated.

• Check the backup batteries are connected. • Unless the batteries have not been charged for a long time (perhaps RAPHAEL has not been attached to the mains power supply for several months) replace the batteries. • If RAPHAEL has not been connected to the mains for a long time, connect it to the mains power supply for at least six hours, and then perform this test again.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-113

12 Running version 2.* test software

12.8

Optional completion point for test software You are permitted to finish the test software tests at this point. (Alternatively, you can perform Test 17: Event Log and Test 18: Trend Data.) If you choose to exit the test software now, do the following: 1. Exit the test software by setting microswitch S1 to the “off” position and restarting the unit. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.)

2. Go to Section 7.4, Procedure, on page 7-3.

12-114

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 16: Alarm Messages

Test 16: Alarm Messages Note This test is for HAMILTON MEDICAL internal use only. A description is not included in this document.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-115

12 Running version 2.* test software

12-116

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 17: Event Log

Test 17: Event Log Note It is not necessary to perform this test. However, you can do so if you want.

Test 17.1

Overview This test enables you to check: • That the event log is held in memory, and that entries appear correct • That the RS232 port can transmit the event log to a computer or printer Note • Only RAPHAELs containing mainboard PN157265 or PN 157373 have an event log that is held in memory and is therefore accessible for this test. These boards were fitted to RAPHAELs with serial numbers of 2000 and above. If you do not have such a mainboard, you cannot perform this test or Test 18: Trend Data. • Only RAPHAELs with a communication interface can transmit the event log to a computer or printer. (See Figure 2-3, RAPHAEL’s chassis from above, on page 2-4.) If your RAPHAEL has no communication interface, you cannot test the RS232 port, and you cannot perform Test 18: Trend Data. (However, you can check that entries in the event log appear correct.)

Test 17.2

Background

Test 17.2.1

The event log The event log stores up to 1000 events which you can display at will. These events are stored in the sequence that they take place. Each event includes date, time, description, and/or alarms with alarm priority. The event log can be transmitted to the RS232 port of the communication interface (if this interface is installed) and then be displayed on a computer or printer. Information is transmitted in the following order: • • • • • •

Software version DCU version Configuration data Scaling data Operating hours List of events

Note !!! indicates an event associated with a high priority alarm !! indicates an event associated with a medium priority alarm ! indicates an event associated with a low priority alarm For more information about alarms, see Section 14, Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting and your operator’s manual.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-117

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 17.2.2

The two views of the event log The event log as viewed or ed in this test unit displays a wider range of events than the same event log when viewed during normal ventilation. The additional fields are: • Alarm off

This displays the time at which an alarm-causing condition ended. When read in the context of the alarm events in the log, it enables the to see how many alarms are active.

• Battery

This displays the voltage measured during the battery test that takes place every 20 minutes (with software version 1.x and 2.*) or 30 minutes (with software version 3.*).

• Date change

This displays the newly-set date (in addition to the date of the event) when the date displayed by the real time clock is changed. This event can help you to analyze the cause of an inconsistency in the dates shown in the event log, as this can be due to a change being made to the real-time clock date.

12-118

• Time change

This displays the newly-set time (in addition to the time of the event) when the time displayed by the real time clock is changed.

• Test entered

This displays the number of the test every time a test software test is used.

• Software event

This string is displayed if a software event is discovered.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 17: Event Log

Test 17.3

Preparing your computer or printer to receive data from the RS232 port

Test 17.3.1

Introduction If you plan to test the RS232 port by using it to send information to a computer, you must first prepare your computer as explained in this section. (Transmission to a computer is the method recommended by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG to perform this test.) If you plan to test the RS232 port by sending data to a printer, you do not have to prepare a computer. In this case, connect your printer to the RAPHAEL’s RS232 port (using a cable with the characteristics shown in Table 12-26) and go to Test 17.4, Displaying and checking the event log. Note This document does not offer instructions for preparing a printer to perform this test.

Test 17.3.2

Method If you have a standard installation of Windows™ 95 or later, you can use the HyperTerminal bundled software to read and print data sent from your RAPHAEL’s RS232 port. To prepare your computer, do the following: 1. Locate an RS232 cable with the following pin configuration: Connector type

Pin number

9-pin male

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9-pin female

3

2

6

5

4

8

7

Table 12-26. RS232 cable specification

RS232 cable PN 157354 is a suitable choice. 2. Using the cable, the RS232 connector on the RAPHAEL to an RS232 connector on your computer. (The RAPHAEL RS232 port is shown on Figure 12-84 on page 12-103.) 3. Run HyperTerminal. You normally do this by clicking Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal. The Connection Description dialog box appears. 4. Type any name in the Name: text box and click OK. (The name you type is the name of the connection configuration. It is not the name of the file that will contain the event log data.) The Connect To dialog box is displayed. 5. In the Connect To dialog box, select the communication port on your computer that you used for the RS232 connection. (This is usually COM 1.) Click OK. The Properties dialog box for your port is displayed. 6. Select the following values in the Properties dialog box: • Bits per second: 9600 • Data bits: 7 • Parity: Even • Stop bits: 2 • Flow control: Hardware 7. Click OK.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-119

12 Running version 2.* test software

8. Click Transfer > Capture Text. The Capture Text dialog box opens. 9. In the Capture Text dialog box, type the path and file name for the file to which you will write the event log. 10. Click Start. Your computer is now prepared to display any data you send to it from the RS232 port of your RAPHAEL.

12-120

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 17: Event Log

Test 17.4

Displaying and checking the event log To show the event log on RAPHAEL’s display, do the following: 1. Activate Test 17: Event Log. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-89.

Figure 12-89. The Event Log test screen

Note If no communication interface is installed, Transmit is not displayed. 2. Activate Previous or Next to scroll through the event log file. You are able to display a list of up to 1000 of the most recent events. 3. that the log appears reasonable. In particular, look for the most recent Power on event, and the events immediately following this. These events must correspond to the actions you have taken with the RAPHAEL. 4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

There are no events in the event log.

June 9, 2006

Replace the mainboard.

PN 61067/05

12-121

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 17.5

Transmitting the event log 1. Confirm that one of the following is true: • Your computer is connect to the RAPHAEL as instructed in Test 17.3, Preparing your computer or printer to receive data from the RS232 port • A printer is connected to your RAPHAEL, using the 2. Activate Transmit to send the event log data to the printer or computer. You are able to display a list of up to 1000 of the last events. (However, it is not necessary to transmit all of these. Activate Abort if you want to shorten the time required for this test.) Note The latest stored data is transmitted first. 3. Activate Close. 4. On your computer

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

You cannot transmit the event log to a computer.

• Check that the computer is properly configured. • Check that the RS232 cable connecting the computer and the communication interface is properly in place. • Replace the interface board.

12-122

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 17: Optional completion point for test software

12.9

Optional completion point for test software You are permitted to finish the test software tests at this point. (Alternatively, you can perform Test 18: Trend Data.) If you choose to exit the test software now, do the following: 1. Exit the test software by setting microswitch S1 to the “off” position and restarting the unit. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.) 2. Go to Section 7.4, Procedure, on page 7-3.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-123

12 Running version 2.* test software

Test 18: Trend Data Note It is not necessary to perform this test. However, you can do so if you want.

Test 18.1

Overview This test enables you to check that the 1-, 12-, and 24-hour trends of 16 monitored parameters can be transmitted through the RS232 port of the communication interface to a computer or printer. Note • Only RAPHAELs containing mainboard PN 157265 or PN 157373 have trends that are held in memory and are therefore accessible for this test. These boards were fitted to RAPHAELs with serial numbers of 2000 and above. If you do not have such a mainboard, you cannot perform this test. • Only RAPHAELs with a communication interface can transmit trend data to a computer or printer. (See Figure 2-3, RAPHAEL’s chassis from above, on page 2-4.) If your RAPHAEL has no communication interface, you therefore cannot perform this test.

Test 18.2

Preparation 1. If you want to send your trend data to a computer (the method recommended by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG for this test) first prepare your computer as described in Test 17.3.2, Method, on page 12-119. Note This document does not contain instructions for sending data to a printer. 2. Activate Test 18: Trend Data. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 12-90.

Figure 12-90. The Trend Data test screen

12-124

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 18: Trend Data

Test 18.3

Transmitting trend data 1. Connect your suitably prepared computer to the RS232 port. 2. Select any combination of the following: • : 1 hr Trend • : 12 hr Trend • : 24 hr Trend 3. Activate Transmit to send the selected trend data to the computer. Note • You can only activate Transmit if one of the trends is selected. • You can activate Abort at any time to stop transmission, and shorten the time required for this test. • The file transmitted is a text file, with columns separated by tabs. The easiest way to read it is to import it into a spreadsheet program. 4. that the transmitted data have been received by the computer. (An example is shown in Figure 12-91.) The newest data is displayed at the top of the list. Raphael Trend Data 1 hr Trend (16.41sec per value) Exp min vol VEneg 0.1 l/min ml 36 256 36 259 36 258 36 258 36 257 36 258 36 258 36 257 36 258 36 259 36 257 36 259 36 259 36 258 36 257 36 258 36 259 36 261 36 261 36 260 36 258 36 259

FiO2 vol% 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22

PEEP 0.1 mbar 25 24 24 24 24 25 25 24 24 25 25 24 25 25 24 25 24 24 24 24 24 24

Ti 0.5 ms 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716 716

Ppeak 0.1mbar 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154

Ftot bpm 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

Pmean 0.1 mbar 67 66 66 66 66 67 67 66 66 66 67 66 67 67 66 67 66 66 66 66 66 66

Insp flow ml/s 969 974 952 968 951 963 955 974 958 961 996 969 970 959 968 966 966 973 971 972 954 980

Fspont bpm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Exp min vol spont 0.1 l/min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RCexp ms 396 404 402 404 399 400 400 400 396 401 400 402 403 400 401 400 404 408 400 404 402 403

AutoPEEP 0.1 mbar 4 4 4 4 5 4 4 5 4 4 3 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5

R mbar/l/s 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

C ml/mbar 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22

Pcontrol mbar 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13

Te 0.5 mas 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428 1428

VI ml 269 272 271 270 270 271 271 272 272 271 272 271 270 270 270 270 272 271 274 272 272 272

VTexp ml 256 259 258 258 257 257 258 257 258 259 257 259 259 258 257 258 259 260 260 260 258 259

Figure 12-91. Start of data found in a 1 hour trend

5. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom There are no trends available.

Action • Check that the computer is properly configured. • Check that the RS232 cable connecting the computer and the communication interface is properly in place. • Check that you have mainboard PN 157265 or PN 157373. (Mainboard PN 157250 does not save trend data.) • Replace the interface board. • Replace the mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

12-125

12 Running version 2.* test software

12.10

Mandatory completion point for test software 1. Exit the test software by setting microswitch S1 to the “off” position and restarting the unit. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.)

2. Go to Section 7.4, Procedure, on page 7-3.

12-126

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

13 Running version 3.* test software 13

13.1

Introduction This section explains how to use each of the test units comprising the RAPHAEL software version 3.* test software. The expression “RAPHAEL software version 3.*” refers to the following software releases: • • • • • • • • • •

3.0 (basic RAPHAEL) 3.0S (RAPHAEL Silver) 3.0C (RAPHAEL Color) 3.0CU (RAPHAEL Color, US version) 3.1 (basic RAPHAEL) 3.1S (RAPHAEL Silver) 3.1C (RAPHAEL Color) 3.1CU (RAPHAEL Color, US version) 3.2CX (RAPHAEL XTC) 3.2CXU (RAPAEL XTC US version)

Note • Software version 3.* can function with all mainboard versions: PN 157250, PN 157265 and PN 157373. • For information about jumper settings for mainboard PN 157373 when used with software version 3.*, see Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6. (However, jumpers were set correctly at the factory, and it is unlikely you must change them.) In general, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG recommend that you always update to the latest software available. Software is shown in Appendix D, Upgrade routes and kits, although for the latest changes you must look on the HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Partner Website (http://www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site).

13.2

Messages While running test software, you can see any of the messages shown in Table 13-1: Message

Action Displays briefly

Mixer Valve Defect

Do nothing.

Displays continuously • Replace mixer valves. • Replace mainboard.

Tank Pressure High

Do nothing.

• Replace mixer valves. • Replace mainboard.

Tank Pressure Low

Do nothing.

• Ensure that both the high-pressure air and the high-pressure oxygen supply at the rear of RAPHAEL are functioning properly.

Table 13-1. Test software messages and actions

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-1

13 Running version 3.* test software

Message

Action Displays briefly

Displays continuously

Air Missing

Do nothing.

• Ensure that the high-pressure air connection at the rear of RAPHAEL is functioning properly.

O2 Missing

Do nothing.

• Ensure that the high-pressure oxygen connection at the rear of RAPHAEL is functioning properly.

Baseline error

Do nothing.

• Start again at Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul., on page 13-50.

EEPROM Error: xxxx

Do nothing.

• Replace mainboard. Perform the tests described in Section 10, Manual electrical safety tests. Then perform all test software again.

Table 13-1. Test software messages and actions

13.3

Checklist Before starting, be sure that you: • Are familiar with the Typographic conventions and Expressions on page Conventions-2 • Have the necessary equipment (Appendix G, Maintenance tools and test equipment) • Have prepared RAPHAEL by performing actions described in the following sections: • Section 8, Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance • Section 9, Backup battery and voltage tests • Have compressed air and oxygen attached to the rear of the RAPHAEL • Have sufficient time (testing takes approximately 90 minutes) Consider also whether you must write a test report. Some hospitals require that you do this. If you do not have a suitable form, you can photocopy and use the one named RAPHAEL version 3.* test software report at the back of this manual.

13.4

Functions of the test software test units The test units in the test software perform the following functions: • They display information • They enable you to run checks on RAPHAEL hardware and software • They enable you to calibrate RAPHAEL hardware and software

13.5

Sequence of test software units Table 13-2 lists each of the units found in the test software in software version 3.*.

13-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Sequence of test software units

WARNING •

•

Always perform all tests marked “Must do? Yes”, in the prescribed sequence, as shown in Table 13-2. (Earlier tests confirm the functioning of certain RAPHAEL components that are then used in later tests to configure other components.) If one of the tests indicates that you must replace a part or perform another test, do this immediately, then repeat the test you are on. Then repeat the complete series of tests.

CAUTION Air and oxygen must be connected to the high pressures inlets at the rear of the ventilator from test 5 onwards. Failure to do so can damage the inspiratory valve.

Must do?

Software version 3.*

Comments

Yes

Test 1 Memory

None.

Yes

Test 2 Display and Loudspeaker

None.

Yes

Test 3 Front

None.

Yes

Test 4 Alarm monitor

None.

Yes

Test 5 Mixer and Tank Pressure

None.

Yes

Test 6 Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

None.

Yes

Test 7 Pressure Sensors

None.

Yes

Test 8 I-Valve and E-Valve

None.

Yes

Test 9 Tightness and Overpressure

None.

Yes

Test 10 O2 Cell Measurement

None.

Yes

Test 11 Interface

You only perform this test if the optional communication interface is installed on RAPHAEL.

Yes

Test 12 EEPROM Values

This unit does not enable you to test RAPHAEL, but enables you to check that the calibration values you set in previous test units appear correct.

No

Test 13 Gas Delivery System

No

These tests are performed at HAMILTON MEDICAL AG only. Instructions are not included in this manual.

Test 14 Sensor Values

Yes

Test 15 Supply Voltages

None.

No

Test 16 Alarm Messages

This test is performed at HAMILTON MEDICAL AG only. Instructions are not included in this manual.

No

Test 17 Event Log

These tests are not compulsory. However, you can perform them if you wish.

No

Test 18 Trend Data

Table 13-2. Sequence of test software units

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-3

13 Running version 3.* test software

13.6

Entering test software mode To enter test software mode: 1. Make sure RAPHAEL is switched off. 2. Set microswitch S1 on the main circuit board to the ON position using a pen or suitable tool. (Figure 13-1.)

Figure 13-1. Setting microswitch S1 to ON

WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.) 3. Connect the RAPHAEL to the mains power supply. 4. Switch on the RAPHAEL. The RAPHAEL starts in test software mode. 5. that the AC power indicator LED on the front is illuminated. (Figure 13-2.)

Figure 13-2. AC power indicator LED

6. that the display shows Test 1: Memory. (Figure 13-3.) Note Test 1 has not yet started.

13-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

How to use the test software

Figure 13-3. Test 1: Memory, as first displayed

7. that LED 1 on the mainboard starts blinking. (Figure 13-4.)

Blinking LED 1

Figure 13-4. Position of LEDs on mainboard PN 157373.

(Other mainboards are similar.)

13.7

How to use the test software Turn the P&T-knob to scroll to the required test, then press the knob to activate the test. When you first enter test software mode, Test 1: Memory is selected (but not activated) as shown in Figure 13-3. After finishing each test, select and activate Close.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-5

13 Running version 3.* test software

13.7.1

Alarms during test software mode While in test software mode, no alarms are displayed except the Technical Fault 1 (TF 1 Code *), and gas delivery alarms. You can find further information in the alarms section in the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent, and in Section 14, Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting.

13.7.2

Exiting test software mode To exit the test software, switch off the RAPHAEL and set switch S1 on the main circuit board to the “off” position. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.)

13-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1: Memory Test 1.1

Overview This series of tests checks: • • • •

The memory function The setting of the altitude The reading of operating hours The real-time clock

It also lets you reset the scaling values and configuration data if required. Test 1.2

Preparation Activate Test 1: Memory. You see a screen similar to the one shown Figure 13-5.

Operating Hours shown here when setting required

Serial number of RAPHAEL (identifies event log print-out)

These fields only with mainboard PN 157265 and PN 157373

Displays “None” with mainboard PN 157250 Figure 13-5. The Memory test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-7

13 Running version 3.* test software

Note • If you run this test directly after installing a new software PROM with software version 3.*C, but you did not install a new “Flash” PROM, you see a message similar to the following: Graphics Module needs to be reprogrammed Please press button to reprogram Graphics Module 168 blocks need to be programmed Respond to this by pressing the P&T-knob. For more information, see screen. on page 14-17. • If you run this test directly after installing any new software, it is very likely that you will see the following message: Checksum error while reading data from EEPROM. Execute memory test and set factory settings. In this case, perform Test 1: Memory in the normal way, making sure to activate: Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings. • If any other message is displayed, look for the message in Section 14.6, General troubleshooting, on page 14-13. • If the screen does not display text clearly, check the contrast adjustment as described in Test 2.5, Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only), on page 13-20. (You cannot do this with RAPHAEL Color.)

Troubleshooting Symptom

13-8

Action

Cannot activate test.

Replace P&T-knob.

Screen is not clear.

Perform Test 2.5, Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only), on page 13-20.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.3

Checking and setting the scaling values Scaling values are the gain and other factors used to process the outputs of various pressure and other sensors. that Scaling Values (the field near the bottom of the screen) reads OK. If the reading is Not OK, activate Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings (the field near the top of the screen). WARNING •

•

Only activate Scaling Values to Factory Settings or Configuration Data to Factory Settings if the corresponding value reads Not OK. This action sets these parameters to their factory-default, precalibration values. While these values make an appropriate starting point for performing these tests, they are not correct for ventilating a patient. If you set the scaling values to the factory settings, you must perform all the tests in this section.

Troubleshooting Symptom

June 9, 2006

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Activate Set Scaling Values to Factory Settings.

Scaling Values: Not OK

• If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

PN 61067/05

13-9

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 1.4

Checking and setting the configuration data Configuration data are the record of RAPHAEL’s settings, such as: • • • •

Start-up mode and controls Altitude Language Absence or presence of Flow Sensor and oxygen cell

that Configuration Data reads OK. If the reading is Not OK, activate Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings.

Troubleshooting Symptom

13-10

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Activate Set Configuration Data to Factory Settings.

Configuration Data: Not OK

• If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.5

Checking and adjusting the altitude setting The altitude setting is for compensation of the flow measurement at the Flow Sensor. This measurement influences RAPHAEL’s calculation of flow and volume. Altitude is set to the operating height of the RAPHAEL, measured in meters above sea level. If required, adjust the value with the P&T-knob. (The factory setting is 700m. You can adjust it in increments of 100m.) WARNING You must adjust the altitude setting for the location in which RAPHAEL will operate. This is not necessarily the same as the altitude at which you are performing this test.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-11

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 1.6

Checking and setting the serial number Serial Number displays the serial number of the RAPHAEL. You can find this clearly marked on a sticker on the rear of RAPHAEL. If required, adjust the value with the P&T-knob. This value is used only to identify print-outs of the event log.

13-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.7

Checking and setting the number of operating hours The Operating Hours value is displayed near the bottom of the screen, and shows the total number of hours that the unit has been in operation (Figure 13-5 on page 13-7). Unless you have just changed the mainboard, ensure that the value displayed approximates the number of hours that RAPHAEL has been in operation. (For help in this, see Test 1.7.1.) If you have just changed the mainboard, use the P&T-knob to reset the operating hours as closely as possible to the original value displayed on RAPHAEL. Note If you have not just changed the mainboard, you cannot reset the operating hours value. Go to Test 1.8, Date and Time.

Test 1.7.1

Determining the operating hours value To estimate the time RAPHAEL has been in operation, you must answer two questions: • How long has the RAPHAEL been in the hospital? • What sort of regimen does the hospital practice — are the machines left on all day and night, or are they turned off between patients? If the RAPHAEL is in a hospital where it is kept running continuously, the number of operating hours is 720 multiplied by the number of months the ventilator was in the hospital. In hospitals in which RAPHAEL is not kept running continuously, an average number of operating hours is 400 a month. In this case, the number of operating hours is 400 multiplied by the number of months of use. Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

The following error message is displayed at the bottom of the screen: Operating Hours: Not OK

• Reset the operating hours. • If this does not solve the problem, replace the mainboard.

In addition the following message is shown in the middle of the screen: Operating Hours: ---The value for the number of operating hours is unreasonably high. (For example, 100000.)

June 9, 2006

HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]) for a solution.

PN 61067/05

13-13

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 1.8

Date and Time If these fields are present, both are correct. If required, adjust them using the P&T-knob. Note Only RAPHAEL units with serial numbers higher than 2000 were fitted in the factory with a real-time clock on their mainboard (PN 157265 or PN 157373). Earlier units, with serial numbers below 2000, were fitted with mainboard PN157250, and, unless later changed, do not have a real-time clock. They therefore do not show this field. For more information, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility.

Troubleshooting Symptom Date or time incorrect.

Action • Reset the date and time. • If the date or time become incorrect again, change the real-time clock battery. (Section 15.6, Changing the real-time lithium clock battery, on page 15-19.)

13-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 1: Memory

Test 1.9

Checking the clock battery Note Only RAPHAEL units with serial numbers higher than 2000 were fitted in the factory with a real-time clock on their mainboard (PN 157265 or PN 157373). Earlier units, with serial numbers below 2000, were fitted with mainboard PN157250, and, unless later changed, do not have a real-time clock. They therefore show Clock Battery None. For more information, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility. that the value of Clock Battery is OK or None.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

You have mainboard PN 157265 or PN 157373, and, the value of Clock Battery is None or Low.

June 9, 2006

Replace clock battery and set the date and time as shown in Section 15.6, Changing the real-time lithium clock battery, on page 15-19.

PN 61067/05

13-15

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 2: Display and Loudspeaker Test 2.1

Overview This series of tests checks the display, and enables you to adjust the screen contrast to the required value on monochrome instruments. The color and monochrome versions of this test differ slightly from one another. The tests also enable you to check the loudspeaker.

Test 2.2

Preparation Activate Test 2: Display and Loudspeaker. If you have a RAPHAEL or RAPHAEL Silver, you see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 13-6.

This field not displayed in RAPHAEL Color

Figure 13-6. The Display and Loudspeaker test screen

Note If you have a RAPHAEL Color, the Screen Contrast field is not displayed.

13-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display and Loudspeaker

Test 2.3

Testing the display (monochrome RAPHAELs only) If you have a monochrome RAPHAEL, follow the instructions below. If you have a RAPHAEL Color, go to Test 2.4, Testing the display (RAPHAEL Colors only), on page 13-18. 1. Activate Display Test. A grid of dots is displayed. Make sure that the pattern is regular and no columns or rows are missing. (Figure 13-8 shows an approximation to the grid, but is limited in accuracy because of the printing process.)

Figure 13-7. The first black-and-white test grid

2. Press the P&T-knob again. A grid of a darker shade is displayed. Again, make sure that the pattern remains regular and no rows or columns are missing. 3. Press the P&T-knob again. The Test 2: Display screen is displayed (Figure 13-6 on page 13-16). Go to Test 2.5, Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only), on page 13-20.

Troubleshooting Symptom Display is dark.

Action • Replace dc/ac converter board. • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

Lines missing on display.

• Replace Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. (Section 15.4, Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-15.) • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-17

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 2.4

Testing the display (RAPHAEL Colors only) 1. Activate Display Test. A grid of dots is displayed. Make sure that the pattern is regular and no columns or rows are missing. (Figure 13-8 shows an approximation to the grid, but is limited in accuracy because of the printing process.) Make sure that the screen is only black and white: there should not be any colored pixels.

Figure 13-8. The first black-and-white test grid

2. Press the P&T-knob again. A grid of a darker shade is displayed. Again, make sure that the pattern remains regular and no rows or columns are missing. Also make sure that the screen is only black and white: there should not be any colored pixels. 3. Press the P&T-knob again. A white screen is displayed. Perform the same checks. 4. Press the P&T-knob again. A black screen is displayed. Perform the same checks. 5. Press the P&T-knob again. The following screen (or similar) is displayed. (Figure 13-9.)

Figure 13-9. The first color test screen

13-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display and Loudspeaker

Make sure that all colors are clearly displayed as in the picture. There must be no wrongly illuminated pixels, and there must be no more than 5 unilluminated pixels. 6. Press the P&T-knob again. You see the same screen, but inverted. (Figure 13-10.)

Figure 13-10. The second color test screen

Make sure that all colors are displayed as in the picture. There must be no wrongly illuminated pixels, and there must be no more than 5 unilluminated pixels. 7. Press the P&T-knob again. You have now finished this test. You cannot perform Test 2.5, Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only), because you have a color display. Go to Test 2.6, Checking the loudspeaker sound level, on page 13-22.

Troubleshooting Symptom Color pixels are visible on the black and white screen grids.

Display is dark.

Action You might decide that minor imperfections in the TFT color screen are acceptable. However, if the imperfections make the screen in any way difficult to read, replace the screen as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21. • Replace dc/ac converter board. • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

Lines missing on display.

• Replace Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. (Section 15.4, Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-15.) • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-19

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 2.5

Checking and adjusting display contrast (monochrome RAPHAELs only) Note • You cannot perform this test and adjustment if you have a RAPHAEL Color. However, RAPHAEL Color has a more sophisticated screen that can be viewed from a wide range of angles without the need for adjustment. • The monochrome display is temperature-sensitive. Perform this test and adjustment in conditions that approximate the temperature in which the RAPHAEL is normally used. • During normal operation, you can adjust the contrast of the monochrome display in the Utilities window. If you have a monochrome RAPHAEL, follow the instructions below. If you have a RAPHAEL Color, go to Test 2.6, Checking the loudspeaker sound level, on page 13-22. 1. Activate Screen Contrast and check that the contrast can be adjusted with the P&T-knob. 2. Set the reading to 22.0. 3. Use the potentiometer on the mainboard (Figure 13-11) to adjust the screen contrast to be most easily readable. While doing this, look at the screen from the place at which the operator normally uses the RAPHAEL. (This could be slightly below or above the screen, depending on where the RAPHAEL is placed.)

Buzzer

Figure 13-11. Potentiometer for adjusting screen contrast on all mainboards

13-20

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display and Loudspeaker

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Contrast not adjustable with P&T-knob.

• You have a color display, with which it is (correctly) not possible to adjust the contrast. No action is possible.

Contrast not adjustable with potentiometer.

• Replace Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. (Section 15.4, Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-15.) • Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21. • Replace mainboard.

Screen is not bright and clear and easily readable, even after adjustment.

June 9, 2006

• Replace display as explained in Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21.

PN 61067/05

13-21

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 2.6

Checking the loudspeaker sound level

Test 2.6.1

Preparation Note With software version 3.* and later, the loudness of the loudspeaker can be adjusted by the operator, using software controls. However, this is only fully possible if the loudspeaker-loudness jumper on the mainboard is set to maximum loudness. Before running this test, ensure that the loudspeaker-loudness jumper on the mainboard is set to maximum loudness. • On mainboards PN 157250 and PN 157265, the loudspeaker jumper must be removed, as shown in Figure 13-12 and Figure 13-13. Jumper position for low setting

Jumper position for medium setting

medium

medium

Jumper position for high setting medium

Correct low

low

low

Figure 13-12. Diagram of loudspeaker-loudness jumper settings on

mainboards PN 157250 and PN 157265

Jumper completely removed

Buzzer Figure 13-13. Photograph of loudspeaker-loudness jumper settings

on mainboards PN 157250 and PN 157265 • On mainboard PN 157373, the jumper must be in its high position as shown in

13-22

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 2: Display and Loudspeaker

Figure 13-14 and Figure 13-15.

Jumper position for low setting

Jumper position for medium setting

Jumper position for high setting

high

high

high

med

med

med

low

low

low

Correct

Figure 13-14. Diagram of loudspeaker-loudness jumper settings on

mainboard PN 157373

Loudspeaker loudness jumper positions High Buzzer Medium Low

Figure 13-15. Photograph of loudspeaker-loudness jumper-settings on

mainboard PN 157373 Test 2.6.2

Procedure 1. Activate Alarm Loudness. 2. Turn the P&T-knob slowly, listening to the alarm loudness at each of the values displayed (1 to 10). Ensure that you can hear the alarm at all displayed values, and that each displayed value corresponds to an appropriate audible volume level. It is not important at what value you leave the control. 3. Press the P&T-knob to exit the Alarm Loudness test. 4. Activate Close. Note Leave the loudspeaker-loudness jumper on its maximum setting.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-23

13 Running version 3.* test software

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Alarm is not audible, or audible alarm levels do not match the values displayed.

13-24

• Check loudspeaker s. • Replace mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Test 3: Front Test 3.1

Overview This series of tests checks the buzzer, and the entire interface.

Test 3.2

Preparation Activate Test 3: Front. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-16.

Figure 13-16. The Front test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-25

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 3.3

Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time The buzzer acts as a backup alarm to the loudspeaker. It functions completely independently of the loudspeaker. The alarm silence time is the maximum time for which an audio alarm is silenced when a presses the alarm silence key during an alarm condition in normal ventilation. 1. Press the alarm silence key on the front . (Figure 13-17). The alarm LED illuminates, and Alarm Silence is activated on the screen. Alarm LED

Figure 13-17. Alarm silence key with alarm LED

2. that the alarm LED remains illuminated while the Alarm Silence Time counts up to 120 ±5 seconds. At this time, the alarm LED must extinguish (must go out). 3. Activate : Buzzer using the P&T-knob. 4. that the buzzer alarm sounds after Backup Buzzer Time displays 60 ±5 seconds. 5. Deactivate † Buzzer.

Troubleshooting Symptom

13-26

Action

Alarm LED does not illuminate after alarm silence key is pressed.

Replace front keyboard.

Timer does not start after alarm silence key is pressed.

Replace front keyboard.

Backup buzzer does not function after 60 seconds.

Replace mainboard.

Buzzer sounds after ≠ 60 seconds.

Replace mainboard.

Alarm silence time ≠ 120 seconds.

Replace mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Test 3.4

Checking the nebulizer, trigger, and alarm LEDs The nebulizer-, trigger-, and alarm LEDs are located on the front . When illuminated during normal operation, they indicate: • RAPHAEL’s nebulizer-gas output is active (nebulizer LED). • The patient has triggered a breath (trigger LED). • There is an alarm active (blinking alarm LED) or the audio alarms are silenced (continuously illuminated alarm LED). 1. Activate : Nebulizer and that the nebulizer LED on the front illuminates. (Figure 13-18.) Nebulizer LED

Figure 13-18. The nebulizer LED on the front

2. Repeat this procedure for : Trigger (Figure 13-19) and : Alarm, (Figure 13-17) making sure the corresponding front LED illuminates in each case.

Trigger LED

TRIGGER Figure 13-19. The TRIGGER LED on the front

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Nebulizer LED does not function.

• Replace front keyboard. • Replace mainboard.

Trigger LED does not illuminate. Alarm LED does not illuminate.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-27

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 3.5

Testing the display and front keyboards This test checks the mechanical and electronic functioning of each key on the display and front . Switch on and off each key on the display and the front . (Figure 13-20.)

Display keys

Front keys

Figure 13-20. Display and front keys

that the display indicates each use of each key. (Figure 13-21 shows the screen with the Mode key active.)

Figure 13-21. The Front test screen with the Mode key active

13-28

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 3: Front

Troubleshooting Symptom Display keys do not operate.

Action • Check display keyboard cable. • Replace graphic controller board. • Replace display keyboard.

Front keys do not operate.

• Check front keyboard cable. • Replace graphic controller board. • Replace front keyboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-29

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 3.6

Testing the P&T-knob This test checks the mechanical and electronic functioning of the P&T-knob. 1. Turn the P&T-knob clockwise, and that the field named P&T-Knob Clicks modulo 16 counts from 0 to 15. 2. Turn the P&T-knob anticlockwise, and that the field named P&T-Knob Clicks modulo 16 counts from 0 to -15. 3. Activate Close to return to the main menu.

Troubleshooting Symptom P&T-knob does not count step-by-step.

13-30

Action Replace P&T-knob.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4: Alarm monitor Test 4.1

Overview This series of tests ensures that the hardware alarm monitor responds correctly to a range of alarm conditions.

Test 4.2

Preparation Activate 4: Alarm monitor. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-22.

Figure 13-22. The Alarm monitor test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-31

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 4.3

Checking for error signals the following indicators remain inactive at all times during the tests you perform in Test 4: Alarm monitor: † Voltage error † uP clock † P-Source fail

Troubleshooting Symptom Voltage error activated.

Action Replace mainboard.

uP clock activated. P-source fail activated.

13-32

Replace mainboard. The inspiratory valve current too high.

Replace inspiratory valve.

Expiratory valve current too high.

Replace expiratory valve.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.4

Testing the power down status flag The power down status flag keeps a record of the way in which RAPHAEL is switched off: this can be by means of the on/off switch on the instrument, or can take place when the backup batteries empty, some time after the mains power supply is disconnected. For more information about this test, see Appendix B.2, on page B-1. 1. Check that : Power down is activated. (This flag indicates that RAPHAEL was correctly powered down, by using the switch at the back of the unit, the last time it was powered down.) 2. Activate : Run status. (This simulates the start of normal ventilation.) 3. that † Power down is now deactivated. (This indicates that RAPHAEL has correctly reset this field at the start of normal ventilation.) Note You cannot reactivate this field except by switching off and switching on RAPHAEL. Note Alarm sound is not used in this test. Do not activate this field.

Troubleshooting Symptom

June 9, 2006

Action

Power down not activated at start of test.

Switch RAPHAEL off and on.

Power down cannot be deactivated by Run status.

Replace mainboard.

PN 61067/05

13-33

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 4.5

Checking the alarm LED 1. Activate : Alarm light. 2. that the alarm LED on the front blinks (turns on and off repeatedly). (Figure 13-17 on page 13-26.) 3. Deactivate † Alarm light.

Troubleshooting Symptom Alarm silence LED does not blink.

13-34

Action Replace mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Testing the alarm silence function

Test 4.6

This test checks that the alarm ASIC functions that govern the alarm silence key and alarm LED are functioning correctly. 1. Activate : Alarm silence. 2. that the alarm LED on the front illuminates (turns on). (Figure 13-17 on page 13-26.) 3. Deactivate † Alarm silence. 4. Press the alarm silence key on the front . 5. that the alarm LED illuminates. 6. Activate : New alarm. 7. that the alarm LED extinguishes (turns off). 8. Activate the alarm silence key on the front . The LED must not illuminate. 9. Deactivate † New alarm. 10. Press the alarm silence key again to silence future alarms (the alarm LED illuminates again).

Troubleshooting Symptom

June 9, 2006

Action

New alarm does not cancel the alarm silence LED.

Replace mainboard.

Alarm silence key does not function.

Replace mainboard.

PN 61067/05

13-35

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 4.7

Checking the inspiratory and expiratory valve unpowered position This test checks the relay governing the inspiratory and expiratory valves. (Figure 13-23.) Activate : Valves off. As you do this: 1. that the ambient state LED on the mainboard (if present) illuminates. (Figure 13-23.)

Ambient state LED

Inspiratory and expiratory valve relay

Figure 13-23. The ambient state LED on mainboard PN 157373

(mainboard PN 157265 is similar)

Note This LED is not present on mainboard PN 157250. 2. that the expiratory valve plunger pin moves down to its unpowered (de-energized) position. (Figure 13-24.)

Pin in normal position

Pin in unpowered position

Figure 13-24. The expiratory valve plunger in normal and unpowered positions

3. Deactivate † Valves off.

13-36

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Ambient state LED does not illuminate (fitted on mainboard PN 157265 and PN 157373 only) and expiratory valve does not move down to its unpowered position.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

• Replace mainboard. • Replace inspiratory valve. • Replace expiratory valve.

13-37

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 4.8

Testing the front LEDs This test checks ability of the alarm ASIC to control the front LEDs and the buzzer. 1. Activate : Lamp test. 2. that each LED on the front illuminates and that the buzzer sounds. 3. Deactivate † Lamp test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Alarm, nebulizer or trigger LED does not function.

Action Replace mainboard.

Backup buzzer does not function.

13-38

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.9

Testing the watchdog This test checks that the alarm ASIC and ing components are triggered when the main processor fails to function correctly. In this situation, all valves move to a position that enables the patient to breath for himself if he is able to do so (although RAPHAEL cannot actively assist with ventilation) and the backup alarm buzzer is activated. 1. Activate : Stop Watchdog. 2. that: • The expiratory valve plunger sinks to its unpowered (de-energized) position (Figure 13-24) • The alarm LED on the front blinks (turns on and off repeatedly) • The buzzer sounds • The following message is displayed: Watchdog working correctly 3. Switch the unit off and on. 4. Activate Test 4: Alarm monitor again, and go to Test 4.10.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Stop watchdog has no effect.

June 9, 2006

Replace mainboard.

PN 61067/05

13-39

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 4.10

Testing backup battery operation This test checks that the power supply unit correctly communicates to the alarm monitor ASIC when it switches to using the backup batteries. Switching takes place automatically if the mains power supply is interrupted. 1. that: • † Battery operation is not activated • The ac power indicator LED on the front is illuminated (switched on) (Figure 13-2 on page 13-4) 2. Disconnect the power cord from the unit. 3. that: • : Battery operation is activated • The ac power indicator LED on the front extinguishes (switches off) (Figure 13-2 on page 13-4) 4. Reconnect the unit to mains power.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Battery operation activated while mains connected.

• Replace fuse. • Replace power supply. • Replace mainboard.

ac power indicator LED malfunctions.

• Replace front keyboard. • Replace power supply.

Not possible to activate Battery operation by removing power cord.

13-40

• Replace power supply.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 4: Alarm monitor

Test 4.11

Testing the fan These tests check that the ASIC creates an alarm condition when the fan fails.

Test 4.11.1

Fan test 1 1. Carefully stop the fan from rotating by applying light pressure to the center of rotor. 2. that : Fan error activates. 3. Release the fan. 4. that † Fan error deactivates.

Test 4.11.2

Fan test 2 1. Disconnect the fan cable from the mainboard (plug P16/Fan). 2. that : Fan error activates. 3. Reconnect the fan cable. 4. that † Fan error deactivates. Troubleshooting Symptom

Action • Replace fan.

Fan error activated while fan is running.

• Replace mainboard.

Fan error deactivated while fan is not running.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

• Replace fan. • Replace mainboard.

13-41

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 4.12

Checking again for error signals the following indicators are still inactive: † Voltage error † uP clock † P-Source fail Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Voltage error activated.

Replace mainboard.

uP clock activated. P-source fail activated.

13-42

Replace mainboard. The inspiratory valve current too high.

Replace inspiratory valve.

Expiratory valve current too high.

Replace expiratory valve.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure Test 5.1

Overview This series of tests checks the gas mixer system and tank pressure. During the tests, both the oxygen and the air mixer solenoid valves are activated separately for individual testing. Throughout the tests the nebulizer valve remains open to allow you to measure the tank pressure at the nebulizer outlet. WARNING During this test series, RAPHAEL automatically switches on the nebulizer valve. If you switch the valve off by using the nebulizer key on the front , you will obtain false readings.

Test 5.2

Preparation 1. Connect the air and oxygen supplies to the unit. (Figure 13-25.)

Figure 13-25. The gas supplies connected to the unit

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-43

13 Running version 3.* test software

2. Activate 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-26.

Figure 13-26. The Mixer and Tank Pressure test screen

13-44

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Test 5.3

Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves This test checks the ability of the air and the oxygen mixer valves, the pneumatic connections, and the controlling electronics to maintain the tank pressure between set limits. 1. Set your pressure gauge to measure in a range of approximately 0 to 2 bars. 2. Connect the pressure gauge to the nebulizer outlet as shown in Figure 13-27. Pressure Pressurecontroller gauge

Range: 0 to 2 bars

Stopper Figure 13-27. The tubing setup for Test 5.3, Testing the air and oxygen mixer

valves 3. Close the patient outlet with a stopper. 4. Activate Air Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-28.

Figure 13-28. The screen you see by activating Air Test

5. the Ptank max, Ptank min, and Offset frequency readings according to Table 13-3. Field

RAPHAEL must display 950 to 1100

Ptank max

Table 13-3. Values for the air and O 2 tests

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-45

13 Running version 3.* test software

Field

RAPHAEL must display

Ptank min

840 to 860

Offset frequency Hz

4720 to 7080

Table 13-3. Values for the air and O 2 tests

6. Activate Stop running test. 7. Activate O2 Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-29.

Figure 13-29. The screen you see by activating O2 Test

8. the Ptank max, Ptank min, and Offset frequency readings again, also according to Table 13-3 on page 13-45. 9. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Tank Pressure Low displayed

Action • Check the oxygen and the air supplies. • Check the tank and tank mounting for leaks.

Offset frequency outside specification and mixer valve leak

• Replace dPmixer pressure sensor cable. • Replace dPmixer pressure sensor. • Replace rubber mounting block. • Replace air and oxygen mixer valves. • Replace mainboard.

13-46

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Symptom Ptank Max pressure outside specification

Action • Check gas is connected and supply is sufficient (no low pressure or flow). • Check internal tubing for leak or disconnection (including nebulizer tubing). • Perform Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 13-75 to recalibrate the inspiratory valve, then return to Test 5.3, Testing the air and oxygen mixer valves, on page 13-45. • Replace the mixer valves in turn, performing this test after each replacement.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-47

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 5.4

Testing the tank overpressure valve This test fully opens the mixer valve controlling the flow of air to the tank. The pressure in the tank then increases until the tank overpressure valve opens. The test checks that the overpressure valve opens at the correct pressure. 1. Confirm that the pressure gauge and stopper are still in place. (Figure 13-30.) Pressure Pressurecontroller gauge

Range: 0 to 2 bars

Stopper Figure 13-30. The tubing setup for Test 5.4, Testing the tank overpressure

valve 2. Activate : Air Valve. 3. the tank pressure reading according to Table 13-4. (During this test the tank overpressure valve opens with a rasping sound.) Field

Pressure Gauge

RAPHAEL must display

Ptank

1200 to 1600 mbar

Pressure gauge value ±300 mbar

Table 13-4. Values for tank overpressure test

4. Deactivate † Air Valve. 5. Remove the pressure gauge.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Ptank pressure sensor outside specification

• Replace Ptank pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard.

Ptank measured on gauge > 1.6 bar Ptank measured on gauge < 1.2 bar

• Replace tank overpressure valve. • Check that gas supply is sufficient (low pressure or flow). • Replace tank overpressure valve.

13-48

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure

Test 5.5

Testing the air and oxygen inlet mixer valves for leakage This test first reduces the pressure in the tank to 150 mbar. Then, after a period of pressure stabilization, the tank pressure is monitored to make sure that neither oxygen nor air is leaking into the tank from either of the mixer valves. 1. Activate : Air Valve and then deactivate † Air Valve to bring the tank up to a high pressure. 2. Reduce the pressure in the tank to very approximately 100 mbar, as displayed by Ptank. (Figure 13-26 on page 13-44.) You do this by activating and then deactivating the Nebulizer key on the front . 3. Wait approximately 5 seconds, while the pressure in the tank stabilizes. 4. Monitor the pressure for a period of approximately 30 seconds. Make sure that the pressure decreases during this time. 5. Leave the stopper in place, and activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom Ptank displays a constant or a rising pressure.

Action • Replace one of the mixer valves and perform this test again. • If necessary replace the second mixer valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-49

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul. Test 6.1

Overview This series of tests checks each of the following: • • • •

The Flow Sensor autozero valves The extended rinse flow valves The Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve The nebulizer valve

The schematics displayed in Table 13-5 show the positions of these components. You can find these schematics in Appendix J, Spare parts and schematics. Valve description

Valve names used in different places This test

Schematic ZCH157276 Blatt 1

Schematic ZCH614186 Blatt 2

Flow Sensor autozero valve on side proximal to patient.

V1

AZ dPptm proximal (V1)a

6 Autozero valve proximal

Flow Sensor autozero valve on side distal to patient.

V2

AZ dPptm distal (V2)a

7 Autozero valve distal

Extended rinse flow valve on side proximal to patient.

V3

Ext. AZ dPptm proximal (V3)b

4 Extended rinse flow valve

Extended rinse flow valve on side distal to patient.

V4

Ext. AZ dPptm distal (V4)b

5 Extended rinse flow valve

Autozero valve for the Pvent pressure sensor.

V5

AZ Pvent (V5)

16 Autozero valve Pvent

Valve controlling flow of gas from the tank to the nebulizer outlet.

Nebulizer

Nebulizer

3 Nebulizer valve

Table 13-5. Valve naming conventions a. dPptm stands for “differential pressure of the pneumatic tachometer” (Flow Sensor). b. Despite the name used in this schematic, this is not an autozero valve.

13-50

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 6.2

Preparation Activate Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-31.

Figure 13-31. The Ext. Autozero and Nebul. test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-51

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 6.3

Testing the autozero valves This test checks the electronic and mechanical functioning of the Flow Sensor autozero valves. (In normal use, the autozero valves open periodically to enable RAPHAEL to perform calibrations of the pressure sensors associated with the Flow Sensor.) 1. Activate Autozero Valves Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-32.

Figure 13-32. The screen you see by activating Autozero Valves Test

The Flow Sensor autozero valves V1 and V2 switch on and off in the following sequence: • † V1 and † V2 (5 seconds) • : V1 and : V2 (5 seconds) • † V1 and † V2 (5 seconds) • and so on 2. Seal the silver Flow Sensor outlet with a finger or thumb as shown in Figure 13-33.

blue

Figure 13-33. Sealing one Flow Sensor outlet

13-52

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

3. With Autozero Valve test still running, the pressure reading dPptm according to Table 13-6. Field

Silver connector sealed

Blue connector sealed

V2 deactivated

V2 activated

V1 deactivated

V1 activated

-.--

-0.6 to 0.6 mbar

-.--

-0.6 to 0.6 mbar

dPptm

Table 13-6. Values for dPptm reading during autozero valve test

(dPptm is the differential pressure at the pneumatic tachometer, normally called the Flow Sensor.) 4. Unseal the silver Flow Sensor, and seal the blue Flow Sensor outlet. 5. With Autozero Valve test still running, the pressure reading dPptm according to Table 13-6. 6. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Autozero valves V1 & V2 do not function.

• Replace each of the autozero valves in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard. • Check gas is connected and supply is sufficient (no low pressure or flow). • Check internal tubing for leak or disconnection (including nebulizer tubing).

dPptm ≠ -----.-- while autozero valve activated.

• Check the dPptm pressure sensor cable. • Replace the dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace the pneumatic block. The inspiratory valve zero point is out of range.

dPptm ≠ 0±0.6 while autozero valve activated.

Perform Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 13-75 to recalibrate the inspiratory valve, then return to Test 6.3, Testing the autozero valves, on page 13-52. • Check the dPptm pressure sensor cable. • Replace the dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace each of the autozero valves in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace the mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-53

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 6.4

Testing the extended rinse flow valves This test checks the electronic and mechanical functioning of the extended rinse flow valves. (During normal use, these valves activate individually from time to time, to cause a flow pulse in the Flow Sensor tubes. This enables RAPHAEL to analyze the condition of the tubes.) 1. Connect a Flow Sensor to RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 13-34. (Note that the stopper must be in place.)

Stopper

Figure 13-34. The tubing setup for Test 6.4, Testing the extended rinse flow

valves 2. Activate Extended Rinse Flow Valves Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-35.

These fields activate alternately

Figure 13-35. The screen you see by activating Extended Rinse Flow Valves

Test

13-54

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

The extended rinse flow valves : V3 and : V4 switch in the sequence: • : V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and : V4 (5 seconds) • † V3 and † V4 (5 seconds) • and so on 3. Using Table 13-7, that whichever valve is active (: V3 or : V4), pressure reading dPptm displays the correct corresponding pressure. Field

With V3 active, RAPHAEL must display

With V4 active, RAPHAEL must display

dPptm

≥ 0.8 mbar

≤ -0.8 mbar (-0.8, -2... -∞ mbar)

Table 13-7. Values for dPptm reading in extended rinse flow valve test

(dPptm is the differential pressure at the pneumatic tachometer, normally called the Flow Sensor.) 4. Activate Stop running test. 5. Disconnect the Flow Sensor but leave the stopper in place.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

• dPptm < 0.8 mbar while V3 active.

• Check for leaks on the pneumatic block.

• dPptm > -0.8 mbar while V4 active.

• Replace the dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace pneumatic block.

Extended autozero valves V3 & V4 do not function.

• Replace each extended autozero valve in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-55

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 6.5

Testing the Pvent autozero valve This test checks the electronic and mechanical functioning of the Pvent autozero valve. (During normal operation, this valve switches periodically to expose the Pprox sensor to the same pressure as the Pvent sensor. This enables RAPHAEL to compensate for the offset drift of the Pvent sensor.) 1. Activate Pvent Autozero Valve Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-36 on page 13-56. Valve V5 switches on and off with an interval of 5 seconds.

Switches on and off with an interval of 5 seconds

Figure 13-36. The screen you see by activating Pvent Autozero Valves Test

2. that while valve 5 is active (: V5), Pprox = Pvent (±10.0 mbar). 3. that while valve 5 is inactive († v5), Pprox = 0.0 (±5.0 mbar), Pvent ≥ 80 mbar. 4. Disconnect the stopper. 5. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

• Pvent ≠ Pprox ±10.0 mbar while V5 active. • Pprox ≠ 0 ±5 mbar while V5 inactive.

• Check the Pprox pressure sensor cable. • Replace Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace the Pvent autozero valve.

13-56

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 6: Ext. Autozero and Nebul.

Test 6.6

Testing the nebulizer valve This test checks the electronic and mechanical function of the nebulizer valve. (During normal ventilation, this valve is activated by RAPHAEL synchronously with the inspiratory and expiratory phases of the breath pattern, if the nebulization function is selected by the .) 1. Activate the Nebulizer (: Nebulizer) as shown in Figure 13-37.

Figure 13-37. The Ext. Autozero and Nebul. screen with Nebulizer active

2. that while the nebulizer is activated (: Nebulizer), a flow is provided at the nebulizer outlet. (Figure 13-38.)

Flow of air from nebulizer outlet

Figure 13-38. The flow of gas at the nebulizer outlet

3. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom No flow at nebulizer outlet.

Action • Check internal tubing for leaks or disconnections. • Replace nebulizer valve. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-57

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 7: Pressure Sensors Test 7.1

Overview This series of tests the following pressure sensors: • dPptm (the sensor measuring pneumatic tachometer differential pressure—the pressure differential across the Flow Sensor) • Pprox (the sensor measuring pressure in the patient circuit at the Flow Sensor) • Pvent (the sensor measuring pressure in the patient circuit at the inspiratory valve) In addition, the test calculates scaling (calibration) values for the Pprox sensor signal.

Test 7.2

Preparation Activate Test 7: Pressure Sensors. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-39.

Figure 13-39. The Pressure Sensors test screen

13-58

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Test 7.3

Autozeroing the dPptm, Pprox and Pvent pressure sensors This test exposes the dPptm pressure sensor and Pprox pressure sensor to ambient pressure so that RAPHAEL can calculate offset values for zero pressure. 1. Connect the inspiratory tube and expiratory tube, and make sure that the Flow Sensor is not attached to the RAPHAEL. (Figure 13-40.)

Figure 13-40. Inspiratory and expiratory tube connected with Y-piece for

Test 7.3 2. Activate Autozero. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-41.

Figure 13-41. The test screen you see by activating Autozero

3. Activate Perform Autozero to perform a zero-point error compensation for the pressure sensors. Make sure that the screen displays the values shown in Table 13-8.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-59

13 Running version 3.* test software

Note dPptm ADU and dPptm zoom ADU values depend on the software version you are running.

These rows added for information only.

Field

RAPHAEL must display

dPptm

0.00 ±0.1 mbar

Paw

OK

Vaw

OK

Pvent

OK

dPptm ADU

492 to 532 (Version 3.0)

dPptm zoom ADU

412 to 612 (Version 3.0)

472 to 552 (Version 3.1 and higher)

312 to 712 (Version 3.1 and higher)

Table 13-8. Values for autozero test

4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom Paw not OK Vaw not OK Pvent not OK dPptm out of range

Action • Check the combined cable for the Pvent pressure sensor, dPptm pressure sensor, and Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace Pvent pressure sensor. • Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace each of the autozero valves in turn, performing this test after each replacement. • Replace the mainboard.

13-60

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Test 7.4

Checking and adjusting dPptm gain In this test, you calibrate the gain applied by RAPHAEL to the dPptm pressure sensor signal. You do this by adjusting a potentiometer. WARNING During this procedure you must be sure to work to an accuracy of ±0.01 mbar. This means you must have a pressure gauge capable of this accuracy. Any RAPHAEL adjusted less accurately will give an incorrect volume of gas to the patient.

1. Activate Adjust dPptm gain. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-42.

Figure 13-42. The screen you see by activating Adjust dPptm gain

2. Set your pressure gauge to read in a range of approximately 0 to 2.5 mbar.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-61

13 Running version 3.* test software

3. Connect the tubing system as shown in Figure 13-43. The bottle should be one liter or larger. (For an alternative system, see Appendix B.3, on page B-2.)

Stopper

Flow Flowregulator regulator

Pressure controller Pressure gauge

Range: 2.0 to 2.5 mbar

1 liter

Figure 13-43. Tubing setup for Test 7.4

4. Provide a pressure of 2.0 to 2.5 mbar (as measured by the pressure gauge) to the silver Flow Sensor outlet on the front , by adjusting the flow regulator. (The pressure is generated by the rinse flow.) dPptm zoom displays ----Note Do not apply a pressure of more than 2.5 mbar. 5. that dPptm displays the correct value (Table 13-9). Field

dPptm

RAPHAEL must display With silver Flow Sensor outlet

With blue Flow Sensor outlet

Pressure gauge value ±0.02 mbar (shown as a negative value on RAPHAEL)

Pressure gauge value ±0.02 mbar (shown as a positive value on RAPHAEL)

Table 13-9. Values for dPptm gain adjustment

13-62

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

If the value is not in range, adjust it by using the dPptm gain potentiometer. (Figure 13-44, Figure 13-45 or Figure 13-46.)

Figure 13-44. dPptm gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250

Figure 13-45. dPptm gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157265

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-63

13 Running version 3.* test software

Figure 13-46. dPptm gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

6. If dPptm shows the correct value, reduce the pressure to 0.8 to 0.9 mbar by adjusting the flow regulator. 7. that dPptm zoom displays the value shown on Table 13-10. Field

RAPHAEL must display With silver Flow Sensor outlet

With blue Flow Sensor outlet

dPptm value ±0.01 mbar

dPptm value ±0.01 mbar

dPptm zoom

Table 13-10. Values for dPptm zoom gain adjustment

8. Repeat step (3) to step (7), using the blue Flow Sensor outlet. It must not be necessary to make any adjustments. 9. Remove the stopper and wait 5 seconds. 10. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom

13-64

Action

Pressure sensor signal dPptm ≠ dPptm zoom.

Replace mainboard.

Pressure sensor dPptm not adjustable.

Replace mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Test 7.5

Checking Pvent pressure sensor zero adjustment In this test, you expose the Pvent pressure sensor to ambient pressure, and confirm that a zero reading is displayed. This confirms that the offset values performed in Test 7.3, Autozeroing the dPptm, Pprox and Pvent pressure sensors, on page 13-59 was successful. 1. Make sure that no tubing is connected to the front of the RAPHAEL. 2. Activate Pvent Zero Check. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-47.

Figure 13-47. The screen you see by activating Pvent Zero Check

3. that Pvent (on the left of the screen) reads zero, as shown in Table 13-11. Field

RAPHAEL must display

Pvent

0.0 ±0.2 mbar

Table 13-11. Values for Pvent zero check

4. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pvent ≠ 0 mbar

Action • Check and adjust the inspiratory valve using Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 13-75. Then return to test Test 7.5, Checking Pvent pressure sensor zero adjustment, on page 13-65. • Check Pvent pressure sensor cable. • Replace Pvent pressure sensor. • Replace Pprox pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-65

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 7.6

Checking and calibrating Pvent pressure sensor gain In this test, you calibrate the gain applied by RAPHAEL to the Pvent pressure sensor signal. You do this by adjusting a potentiometer. 1. Set your pressure gauge to measure in a range of approximately 0 to 100 mbar. 2. Prepare the RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 13-48. Pressure controller Pressure gauge

Range: 0 to 100 mbar

Pressure connector

Figure 13-48. Tubing setup for Test 7.6, Checking and calibrating Pvent

pressure sensor gain 3. Activate Adjust Pvent/Pprox gain. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-49.

Figure 13-49. The screen you see by activating Adjust Pvent/Pprox gain

4. Keep the Flow Sensor sealed with a finger or stopper while the system generates a pressure of approximately 50 mbar (check this on the pressure gauge).

13-66

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

5. that Pvent (on the left of the screen) reads the same as the pressure gauge, within the tolerances given in Table 13-12. Field

Pressure gauge

RAPHAEL must display

Pvent

45 to 55 mbar

Pressure gauge value ±0.5 mbar

Table 13-12. Values for Pvent gain adjustment

6. Use the Pvent gain potentiometer to adjust the reading if it is out of range. (Figure 13-50, Figure 13-51 or Figure 13-52.)

Figure 13-50. Pvent gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-67

13 Running version 3.* test software

Figure 13-51. Pvent gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157265

Figure 13-52. Pvent gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

7. Leave the tubing installation in place and continue to Test 7.7, Adjusting Pprox gain.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Pvent gain cannot be adjusted into the correct range.

13-68

• Replace the Pvent pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Symptom RAPHAEL cannot generate 45 to 55 mbar.

Action • Check for leak in tubing setup. • Check ambient valve is tightly fitted, without leak. • Check patient overpressure valve is tightly fitted, without leak. • Perform Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265, on page 13-80 to recalibrate expiratory valve, then return to Test 7.6, Checking and calibrating Pvent pressure sensor gain, on page 13-66. • Replace expiratory valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-69

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 7.7

Adjusting Pprox gain In this test, RAPHAEL calculates a scaling (calibration) value for the gain applied to the Pprox pressure sensor signal. 1. Keep the Flow Sensor sealed as shown in Figure 13-48 on page 13-66. Remain on the screen shown in Figure 13-49 on page 13-66. 2. that pressure Pvent still reads approximately 50 mbars. (Refer again to Table 13-12 on page 13-67.) 3. Activate Adjust Pprox gain. 4. that the message Calibration successful appears. 5. Leave all tubing in place. 6. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom The following message is displayed: Calibration not successful

13-70

Action Repeat the test, making sure that the pressure is in the correct range.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Test 7.8

Checking the automatic analysis of the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors In this test you initiate RAPHAEL’s automatic analysis of the dPptm pressure sensor and Pprox pressure sensor and associated tubing. (During normal ventilation, this analysis is automatically performed every two minutes.) 1. Disconnect the Flow Sensor body (but not the sensor tubing) and the pressure gauge as shown in Figure 13-53.

Figure 13-53. Tubing setup for Test 7.8, Checking the automatic analysis of

the dPptm and Pprox pressure sensors 2. Activate Sensor Analysis. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-54.

Figure 13-54. The screen you see by activating Sensor Analysis

3. Activate Perform Sensor Analysis.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-71

13 Running version 3.* test software

4. that Pprox and dPptm read Sensor OK, as shown on Table 13-13. Fields

RAPHAEL displays

Pprox and dPptm

Sensor OK

Comment This is the expected and correct result.

Table 13-13. Result from the Sensor Analysis test

5. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

One of the following error messages is displayed:

• Check the tubing for leaks.

• Sensor out of range

• Pprox pressure sensor cable is connected and not defective.

• Sensor defect

• Replace Pprox pressure sensor.

• Problems with tubes

• Replace dPptm pressure sensor. • Replace mainboard.

13-72

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 7: Pressure Sensors

Test 7.9

Calibrating the Flow Sensor In this test, you enable RAPHAEL to calculate scaling (calibration) values for the Flow Sensor you are currently using. The scaling value is applied to the signal from the dPptm pressure sensor. (During normal use, the operator can initiate this test in the utilities window.) 1. Connect the Flow Sensor and the tubing as shown in Figure 13-55.

Figure 13-55. Tubing setup for Test 7.9, Calibrating the Flow Sensor

2. Activate Flow Sensor Calibration. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-56.

Figure 13-56. The screen you see by activating Flow Sensor Calibration

3. Activate Perform Inspiration Calibration. 4. Wait while the RAPHAEL displays Calibration running. After a time, the Inspiration deviation is displayed on the screen.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-73

13 Running version 3.* test software

5. that the reading corresponds to Table 13-14. Field

RAPHAEL must display

Inspiration deviation

<±35%

Expiration deviation

<±35%

Table 13-14. Values for Flow Sensor calibration

6. Turn the Flow Sensor. 7. Activate Perform Expiration Calibration. 8. Wait while the RAPHAEL displays Calibration running. After a time, the Expiration deviation is displayed on the screen. 9. that the reading corresponds to Table 13-14. Note You do not use the 100% O2 test. 10. Disconnect all tubing and the Flow Sensor. 11. Activate Close twice.

Troubleshooting Symptom Calibration fails.

Action • Check Flow Sensor direction. • Replace Flow Sensor.

13-74

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve Test 8.1

Overview This series of tests checks and adjusts the electronic and mechanical functioning of the inspiratory and expiratory valves. The Baseflow segment of this test is for internal use only, and is not performed in the field.

Test 8.2

Preparation Activate Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-57.

Figure 13-57. The I-Valve and E-Valve test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-75

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 8.3

Calibrating the inspiratory-valve control signal for zero flow This test enables you to calibrate the inspiratory valve control voltage to the precise level required for the inspiratory valve to begin to open. The test also checks the hysteresis of the valve. 1. Connect the Flow Sensor as shown in Figure 13-58.

Blue tube Blue tube Figure 13-58. Tubing setup for Test 8.3, Calibrating the inspiratory-valve

control signal for zero flow 2. Activate I-Valve zero. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-59.

Figure 13-59. The screen you see by activating I-Valve zero

3. that the base of the flow curve is centered between points a and b. Note It does not matter if the top of the curve lies in a position outside of the window.

13-76

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

4. Adjust the curve with potentiometer V‘zero if required. (Figure 13-60, Figure 13-61 or Figure 13-62.)

Figure 13-60. V’zero potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250

Figure 13-61. V’zero potentiometer on mainboard PN 157265

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-77

13 Running version 3.* test software

Figure 13-62. V’zero potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

5. Check that the width of the curve is at no point is greater than the distance from a to b. Figure 13-59 on page 13-76 shows a curve that is in range. Figure 13-63 shows a curve that is out of range.

Figure 13-63. An incorrect I-Valve zero curve

6. Check V’aw min is in accordance with Table 13-15. Value V’aw min ml/s

RAPHAEL must display 10 to 66 ml/s

Table 13-15. Values for I-Valve leak flow

7. Activate Stop running test.

13-78

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Width of curve is greater than distance from a to b, as shown in Figure 13-63.

• Check inspiratory valve is clean. (See Section 15.3.2, Cleaning the inspiratory valve, on page 15-3.) • Replace inspiratory valve.

V’aw_min too large or too small.

• Adjust potentiometer V’zero. • Replace inspiratory valve.

Curve has bad shape.

• Check inspiratory valve is clean. (See Section 15.3.2, Cleaning the inspiratory valve, on page 15-3.) • Replace inspiratory valve.

No signal.

• Check Flow Sensor is connected in the correct direction. • Replace inspiratory valve. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-79

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 8.4

Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265 Note • This test is for mainboards PN 157250 and PN 157265 only. • If you have mainboard PN 157373, go to Test 8.5, Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373, on page 13-84. In this test, you check and calibrate the expiratory valve by adjusting the control voltage gain. 1. Identify your mainboard. If you have mainboard PN 157373, do not perform this test. Instead, go to Test 8.5, Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373, on page 13-84. 2. Set your pressure gauge to measure in a range of approximately 0 to 100 mbar. 3. Connect the Flow Sensor and the tubing as shown in Figure 13-64. Pressure Pressuregauge controller

Range: 0 to 100 mbar

Pressure connector

Figure 13-64. Tubing setup for Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with

mainboard PN 157250 or 157265

13-80

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

4. Activate E-Valve test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-65.

Figure 13-65. The screen you see by activating E-Valve test

5. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper. RAPHAEL generates a range of different pressures at intervals of 5 seconds. 6. When the PEEP pressure is at 0.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 0.0 mbar continuously.) 7. Check that the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 13-16. Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

Table 13-16. Pprox zero-check tolerance

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps. 8. Activate Continue. 9. When the PEEP pressure rises to 25.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 25.0 mbar continuously.) 10. Turn the Exp. Gain potentiometer (Figure 13-66) until the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 13-17. This sets the gain applied to the expiratory valve. Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

24.5 to 25.5 mbar

24.8 to 25.2 mbar

Table 13-17. Pprox gain tolerance

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-81

13 Running version 3.* test software

Figure 13-66. Exp. Gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157250 and PN 157265

11. Activate Stop running test. 12. Go to Test 8.6, Testing the inspiratory valve controller, on page 13-89

Troubleshooting Symptom Pprox does not display correct zero value

Action Check the voltage between Pin 6 and Pin 7 on the mainboard. This is the connector marked P11, shown in Figure 13-67. To do this, do not remove the connector from the mainboard, but use the test probes on the connector itself. If the voltage difference is greater than 20 mV (>20 mV) replace each of the following in turn, testing after each replacement. • Cable P11. • The mainboard. • The power supply.

Pprox cannot be adjusted to required offset or gain values

• Check for leak in patient tubing. • Check expiratory valve cover and membrane for leaks and defects. • Replace expiratory valve. • Replace mainboard.

13-82

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

8

7 6

5 4 3

2

1

Figure 13-67. Connector P11

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-83

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 8.5

Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373 Note If you do not have mainboard PN 157373, use Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265, on page 13-80 instead of this test. In this test, you check and calibrate the expiratory valve by adjusting the control voltage offset and gain. Checking expiratory valve signal at zero pressure 1. Identify your mainboard. If you have mainboard PN 157250 or PN 157256, do not perform this test. Instead, perform Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265, on page 13-80. 2. Set your pressure gauge to read in a range of approximately 0 to 100 mbar. 3. Connect the Flow Sensor and the tubing as shown in Figure 13-68. Pressure Pressuregauge controller

Range: 0 to 100 mbar

Pressure connector

Figure 13-68. Tubing setup for Test 8.5, Testing and calibrating the

expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373

13-84

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

4. Activate E-Valve test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-69.

Figure 13-69. The screen you see by activating E-Valve test

5. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper. RAPHAEL generates a range of pressures at intervals of 5 seconds. 6. When the PEEP pressure is at 0.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 0.0 mbar continuously.) 7. Check that the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 13-18. Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

0.0 to 1.0 mbar

Table 13-18. Pprox zero-check tolerance

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps.

Setting expiratory valve signal offset 8. Activate Continue. 9. When the PEEP pressure rises to 5.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 5.0 mbar continuously.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-85

13 Running version 3.* test software

10. Turn the Exp. Zero potentiometer (Figure 13-70) until the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 13-19. This sets the offset applied to the expiratory valve. Note It is acceptable for the value to fluctuate momentarily outside of this range.

Pprox field on screen

Value on pressure gauge

4.7 to 5.3 mbar

4.7 to 5.3 mbar

Table 13-19. Pprox gain tolerance

Figure 13-70. Exp. Zero potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps.

Setting expiratory valve signal gain 11. Activate Continue. 12. When the PEEP pressure rises to 50.0 mbar, activate Hold. (The PEEP pressure now displays 50.0 mbar continuously.)

13-86

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

13. Turn the Exp. Gain potentiometer (Figure 13-71) until the Pprox value is in the range displayed in Table 13-20. This sets the gain applied to the expiratory valve. Pprox field on screen

Pprox value on pressure gauge

49.5 to 50.5 mbar

49.8 to 50.2 mbar

Table 13-20. Pprox gain tolerance

Figure 13-71. Exp. Gain potentiometer on mainboard PN 157373

Note Keep the Flow Sensor sealed during the following steps. 14. Activate Continue. 15. Repeat step (9) on page 13-85 to step (13) until no further adjustment is needed. 16. Activate Stop running test.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-87

13 Running version 3.* test software

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Pprox does not display correct zero value

Check the voltage between Pin 6 and Pin 7 on the mainboard. This is the connector marked P11, shown in Figure 13-72. To do this, do not remove the connector from the mainboard, but use the test probes on the connector itself. If the voltage difference is greater than 20 mV (>20 mV) replace each of the following in turn, testing after each replacement. • Cable P11. • The mainboard. • The power supply.

Pprox cannot be adjusted to required offset or gain values

• Check for leak in patient tubing. • Check expiratory valve cover and membrane for leaks and defects. • Replace expiratory valve. • Replace mainboard.

8

7 6

5 4 3

2

1

Figure 13-72. Connector P11

13-88

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve

Test 8.6

Testing the inspiratory valve controller This test checks the response characteristics of the inspiratory valve and its analog regulator. The test is largely automatic. 1. Disconnect the transparent tube of the Flow Sensor from the RAPHAEL as shown in Figure 13-73.

Flow sensor tube disconnected

disconnect flow sensor tube

Figure 13-73. Tubing setup for Test 8.6, Testing the inspiratory valve

controller 2. Activate I-Valve controller (dynamic). You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-74.

Figure 13-74. The screen you see by activating I-Valve controller (dynamic)

3. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper as shown in Figure 13-73.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-89

13 Running version 3.* test software

4. that each Pprox value is in range at all the different pressures generated by the unit (Table 13-21). Because of the speed at which the display changes, it is helpful to activate Hold at each step to enable you to better read the screen. RAPHAEL must display Pprox target

Pprox

Pprox peak

1 mbar

Unimportant

Unimportant

5 mbar

4 to 6 mbar

≤ 7 mbar

10 mbar

8.5 to 11.5 mbar

≤ 12 mbar

25 mbar

23.5 to 26.5 mbar

≤ 30 mbar

50 mbar

48.5 to 51.5mbar

≤ 60 mbar

Table 13-21. Values for I-Valve controller test

5. Activate Stop running test. 6. Activate Close. 7. Disconnect all the tubing.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pprox_peak out of range.

Action • Replace mainboard. • Replace inspiratory valve.

13-90

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure Test 9.1

Overview This test checks: • • • • •

Test 9.2

The patient overpressure valve The “pills” that protect from rinse flow overpressure The “pills” that control the normal rinse flow For leaks in internal and external tubing The ambient valve

Preparation 1. Obtain a glass of water. You require this for Test 9.5, Testing the rinse flow “pills”, on page 13-95. 2. Activate Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-75.

Figure 13-75. The Tightness and Overpressure test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-91

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 9.3

Testing the patient overpressure valve In this test you check the pressure at which the patient overpressure valve opens. You do not make any adjustment. 1. Close the patient outlet with a stopper as shown in Figure 13-76.

Stopper Rubber bung

Figure 13-76. Patient outlet closed with a stopper for Test 9.3, Testing the

patient overpressure valve 2. Activate Internal Pneumatic Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-77.

Figure 13-77. The screen you see by activating Internal Pneumatic Test

3. Activate : Mixer. The mixer valves open to it air and oxygen into the instrument. 4. that the Pvent value lies in the range 80.0 to 120.0 mbar. (As pressure is released by the overpressure valve). 5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.4.

13-92

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Troubleshooting Symptom Pvent < 80 mbar.

Action • Check for internal leak. • Replace patient overpressure valve. • Replace pneumatic block.

Pvent > 120 mbar.

• Check patient overpressure valve is not blocked. • Replace patient overpressure valve.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-93

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 9.4

Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” This test checks that the “pills” that limit pressure in the Flow Sensor circuit in the event of a blockage, are functioning properly. These “pills” are labelled 15 in ZCH614186 Blatt 2. WARNING During this test, make sure the pressure measured by the pressure gauge does not increase above 350 mbar. (Disconnect the gauge to stop this happening, if necessary!) If pressure becomes too high, the dPptm pressure sensor can be damaged, and must be replaced. 1. that the patient outlet is still closed with the stopper. 2. that : Mixer is still active. 3. Set your pressure gauge to measure in a range of approximately 0 to 1 bar. 4. Connect the pressure gauge as shown in Figure 13-78, and wait for the pressure to rise and stabilize.

Pressure gauge

Range: 0 to 1 bar

Stopper

Rubber bung Figure 13-78. Pressure gauge connected to Flow Sensor connector for Test 9.4, Testing the rinse flow overpressure “pills” 5. that the value on the pressure gauge lies in the range 100.0 to 300.0 mbar. 6. Remove the pressure gauge and the stopper. 7. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.5.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pressure gauge reading out of range.

13-94

Action • Replace pneumatic block.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Test 9.5

Testing the rinse flow “pills” This test checks that the flow-restricting “pills”, that control the rinse flow from the tank through the Flow Sensor tubes, are functioning correctly. 1. Connect two identical tubes to the Flow Sensor connectors as shown in Figure 13-79. Immerse the tubes in the glass of water as shown in the diagram.

Identical tubes of equal length Equal length

Approximately equal number ofequal bubbles number of bubbles

Figure 13-79. Setup for Test 9.5, Testing the rinse flow “pills”

2. that the Internal Pneumatic Test and : Mixer are still activated. 3. that bubbles appear at both tube outlets, and that the number of bubbles (indicating the rate of flow) is approximately equal on each outlet. 4. Disconnect the two tubes. You do not require them or the water again. 5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 9.6.

Troubleshooting Symptom Number of bubbles not equal.

June 9, 2006

Action • Replace pneumatic block.

PN 61067/05

13-95

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 9.6

Testing for internal leaks This test checks that the sum of all internal leaks is at an acceptable level. 1. Connect a piece of tubing between the two Flow Sensor connectors as shown in Figure 13-80. (The tubing blocks the rinse flow, that would otherwise drain gas from the tank.)

Tubing

Stopper Figure 13-80. Tubing setup for Test 9.6, Testing for internal leaks

2. Close the patient outlet with a stopper as shown in Figure 13-80. 3. that : Mixer is still active. 4. Deactivate † Mixer and measure the time required for the pressure to drop at Ptank. that the leakage of the tank is in the range displayed in Table 13-22. Value

RAPHAEL display must drop

Time span must be

Ptank

from 700 to 500 mbar

≥8 seconds

Table 13-22. Values for tank-pressure drop

5. Activate Stop running test. 6. Disconnect the tube and the stopper.

13-96

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

Troubleshooting Symptom Tank pressure drops too fast.

Action • Check inspiratory valve for leak. • Check tank overpressure valve for leak. • Check for leak between pneumatic block and attached component. • Check nebulizer valve for leak. • Replace pneumatic block.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-97

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 9.7

Testing for external leaks This test checks that RAPHAEL is able to maintain adequate pressure in the patient circuit. It is the same as the tightness test that the operator initiates during normal use, after every change of tubing. 1. Connect the tubing as shown in Figure 13-81.

Figure 13-81. Tubing setup for Test 9.7, Testing for external leaks

2. Activate External Tightness Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-82.

Figure 13-82. The screen you see by activating External Tightness Test

3. Seal the Flow Sensor with a finger or stopper, as shown in Figure 13-81, and that the pressure displayed on RAPHAEL stays within the range 32.0 to 38.0 mbar. 4. Do not disconnect the Flow Sensor or tubing.

13-98

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

5. Activate Stop running test.

Troubleshooting Symptom Pprox out of range.

Action • Check for leak in patient tubing. • Check for internal leak. • Check for ambient valve leak.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-99

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 9.8

Testing the ambient state This test checks that RAPHAEL can enter ambient state. 1. Connect your personal bacteria filter to the tubing as shown in Figure 13-83. Note An example of a suitable filter is shown on page G-5.

ÕÖ Bacteria Bacteriafilter filter Figure 13-83. The bacteria filter connected for Test 9.8, Testing the ambient

state 2. Activate Ambient Test. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-84.

Figure 13-84. The screen you see by activating Ambient Test

13-100

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure

3. that the ambient state LED on the mainboard (if present) illuminates. (Figure 13-85.)

Ambient state LED

Figure 13-85. Ambient state LED on mainboard PN 157373

(Mainboard PN 157265 is very similar)

Note This LED is not present on the older mainboard PN 157250. 4. that inspiration and expiration are possible, by breathing through the filter. 5. Disconnect the Flow Sensor and tubing. 6. Activate Stop running test. 7. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom Cannot inhale or exhale.

Action • Check that ambient valve is not blocked or defective. • Check that expiratory valve is not blocked or defective.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-101

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement Test 10.1

Overview This series of tests checks and adjusts oxygen measurement, and the offset and calibration of the oxygen cell. Note If there is no oxygen supply connected to the unit, you cannot perform these tests.

Test 10.2

Preparation 1. Make sure you have an oxygen cell available. 2. Connect RAPHAEL to both an oxygen and an air supply. 3. Activate Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement. You see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 13-86.

Figure 13-86. The O2 Cell Measurement test screen

13-102

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement

Test 10.3

Calibrating the oxygen measurement zero offset In this test, you calibrate RAPHAEL against a zero signal from the oxygen cell. For this test, the oxygen cell must be electronically disconnected from RAPHAEL. 1. If necessary, disconnect the oxygen cell from RAPHAEL now. 2. Wait 15 seconds for the FiO2 ADU signal to stabilize (it must not fluctuate by more than plus or minus one digit). 3. Activate O2 Offset (at the top left of the screen). 4. the value displayed for O2 offset (near the bottom of the screen). The dashes displayed when the screen first opened must now be replaced by numerics (the value is not important) as shown in Figure 13-87.

Dashes replaced by value (Here shown as -10 However, any value can be shown.)

Figure 13-87. The O2 Cell Measurement test screen after O2 offset calibration

5. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 10.4.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Screen displays --- ADU’s.

• Check oxygen cell is disconnected. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-103

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 10.4

Calibrating the oxygen measurement full-scale gain In this test, you calibrate RAPHAEL against a 100% oxygen concentration at the oxygen cell. This enables RAPHAEL to establish the scaling (calibration) value for gain. Note This test can only run immediately after performing Test 10.3. 1. Install the oxygen cell. 2. Activate O2 Calibration. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-88. This remains for two minutes during which time calibration takes place.

Figure 13-88. The screen you see by activating O2 Calibration

3. You see the original Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement screen again. (Figure 13-86 on page 13-102.) that the message Calibration successful is displayed near the bottom of this screen. 4. Do not stop the test. Go to Test 10.5.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

The following error message is displayed:

• Check oxygen cell is connected.

Calibration not OK

• Check oxygen is connected. • Check oxygen cell is not old or defective.

13-104

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 10: O2 Cell Measurement

Test 10.5

Checking the oxygen measurement In this test, you check that the oxygen concentration measured by the oxygen cell is approximately equal to the oxygen concentration delivered by the mixer valves. 1. Activate FiO2 target (in the top part of the screen) and adjust it to the first of the two readings (25%) displayed in Table 13-23. RAPHAEL must display FiO2 target vol%

FiO2 vol%

25%

22.0% to 28.0%

40%

37.0% to 43.0%

Table 13-23. Values for the oxygen measurement test

2. that the FiO2 reading (in the center part of the screen) is in range after two minutes. (Table 13-23.) 3. Repeat the activation, adjustment and check, for the 40% value. 4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom FiO2 is out of range

Action • Check oxygen cell is connected. • Check oxygen is connected. • Check sintered disk flow restrictor is not blocked. • Check oxygen cell is not old or defective.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-105

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 11: Interface Note You can only perform the checks in this test unit if RAPHAEL has the optional communication interface installed.

Test 11.1

Overview This series of tests checks the: • Inspiratory/expiratory signal (used with the Special port of the optional communication interface to synchronize an optional nebulizer) • The nurse call signal (used with the Special port to trigger an external alarm system) In addition, you can check the RS232 port of the interface if you have a suitable external monitor. (For details of external monitors, see Appendix A.3, Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems, on page A-2.) You can find general information about the communication interface in Section 6, The optional communication interface.

Test 11.2

Preparation Activate Test 11: Interface. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-89.

Figure 13-89. The Interface test screen

Note If no interface board is installed, the message Not available is displayed on a blank screen. In this case, there is not interface fitted, and you cannot perform this test. Go to Test 12: EEPROM Values.

13-106

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 11: Interface

Test 11.3

Testing the inspiratory/expiratory signal 1. Set the multimeter to measure resistance (Ohms). 2. Connect the multimeter to pin 8 and pin 15 of the special connecting socket (Figure 13-90).

Pin 1

Pin 9

Pin 6 (Remote alarm return) Pin 7 (Remote alarm)

Pin 14 (Remote alarm return)

Pin 8 (I:E relay)

Pin 15 (I:E relay return)

Figure 13-90. Special port connector pin locations

3. Activate : I/E Signal. 4. Check that the multimeter displays a very low resistance. 5. Deactivate † I/E Signal. The connection opens. 6. Check that the multimeter displays a very high resistance.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action • Check ribbon cable connecting interface board to mainboard.

Resistance is not as specified.

• Replace interface board. • Replace mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-107

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 11.4

Testing the Nurse Call (alarm switch) Note The results you expect from this test depend upon the revision of interface board fitted to your RAPHAEL. The differences are noted in the following instructions. (Old interface board: PN 157269/00. New board: PN 157269/01. The new board was fitted from March 2004.) 1. Make sure the multimeter remains set to measure resistance (Ohms). 2. Connect the multimeter to pin 7 and 14 of the special socket. (Figure 13-90.) 3. Activate : Nurse Call. 4. Check that the multimeter displays: • Interface board PN 157269/00: A very low resistance, showing that the connection is closed. • Interface board PN 157269/01: A very high resistance, showing that the connection is open. 5. Deactivate † Nurse Call. 6. Check that the multimeter displays: • Interface board PN 157269/00: A very high resistance, showing that the connection is open. • Interface board PN 157269/01: A very low resistance, showing that the connection is closed. 7. Connect the multimeter to pin 6 and 7. 8. Activate : Nurse Call. 9. Check that the multimeter displays: • Interface board PN 157269/00: A very high resistance, showing that the connection is open. • Interface board PN 157269/01: A very low resistance, showing that the connection is closed. 10. Deactivate † Nurse Call. 11. Check that the multimeter displays: • Interface board PN 157269/00: A very low resistance, showing that the connection is closed. • Interface board PN 157269/01: A very high resistance, showing that the connection is open.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action • Check ribbon cable connecting interface board to mainboard.

Resistance is not as specified.

• Replace communication interface board. • Replace mainboard.

13-108

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 11: Interface

Test 11.5

Testing the RS232C port This test enables you to check the interface with the loopback procedure. This procedure takes the output signals from three of the pins on the RS232 connector, and returns them to the RAPHAEL. The test reads the returned signal. 1. Short-circuit the following pins of the RS232 connector with appropriate wires: • Pin 2 and pin 3 • Pin 4 and pin 6 • Pin 7 and pin 8 (The pins are shown in Figure 13-90 on page 13-107.) 2. Activate Check Serial Interface. 3. that the message Interface test successful appears. 4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting . Symptom

Action

One of the following error messages is displayed:

• Check connecting wire.

• Transmission Error

• Check ribbon cable connecting interface board to mainboard.

• Transmission Timeout

• Replace interface board.

• RTS/CTS Error

• Replace mainboard.

• DTR/DSR Error

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-109

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 12: EEPROM Values Test 12.1

Overview This is not a true test, but a display of the numerous calibration and scaling values you set in earlier test units. The figures enable you to confirm, with reasonable certainty, that you performed the earlier test units satisfactorily. In this test unit, you are only instructed to look at a small sub-set of the total data available.

Test 12.2

Preparation Activate Test 12: EEPROM Values. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-91.

Figure 13-91. The EEPROM Values test screen

13-110

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 12: EEPROM Values

Test 12.3

Checking EEPROM Scaling Data 1. Activate EEPROM Scaling Data. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-92.

Figure 13-92. The screen you see by activating EEPROM Values

2. Check that the following values are not at their factory defaults, and are therefore probably correctly calibrated. (Table 13-24.) Parameter

Factory default value

Pprox gain

1.000

Pprox zoom gain

1.000

O2 offset

0

O2 gain

1.000

Flow Insp

100

Flow Exp

100

Action

Check that factory default value is not displayed.

Table 13-24. Calibrated values to check

If the values appear to be correctly calibrated, to Test 15: Supply Voltages, on page 13-113.

Troubleshooting If all or most of the values are still at their factory defaults as shown in Table 13-24, you did not perform the full series of tests correctly as described in Section 13.5, Sequence of test software units, on page 13-2. In this case, repeat all tests, starting from Test 1: Memory, on page 13-7. Note This test does not include EEPROM Configuration Data or EEPROM Time Data.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-111

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 13: Gas Delivery System Test 14: Sensor Values Note These tests are for HAMILTON MEDICAL internal use only. Descriptions are not included in this document.

13-112

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 15: Supply Voltages

Test 15: Supply Voltages Test 15.1

Overview This test enables you to check that RAPHAEL’ s power supply can recognize and can automatically switch to battery use when mains voltage is too low or unavailable. The test uses — and therefore checks — the mechanism RAPHAEL uses automatically during normal ventilation to test the battery every 30 minutes (with software version 3.*).

Test 15.2

Preparation Activate Test 15: Supply Voltages. You see a screen similar to the one shown on Figure 13-93.

Figure 13-93. The Supply Voltages test screen

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-113

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 15.3

Checking the power supply The following test measures the voltage at the battery with mains power connected and unconnected. In addition, you check the outputs from the power supply unit in both of the above conditions. 1. Ensure that when † Mains off is not activated, the Battery voltage shows one of the following: • A value in the range 26.6 to 30 V (Mainboard PN 157250) • The characters -.---V (Mainboard PN 157265 and PN 157373) This tells us that either the first part of the power supply, or the backup batteries, is supplying a voltage in the acceptable range to the second part of the power supply. Note RAPHAELs with the older mainboard (PN 157250) display the voltage at the battery when the mains supply is attached. RAPHAELs with a newer mainboard (PN 157265 or PN 157373) display -.---V if the voltage is 28 V or more. If it is lower, they display the voltage. 2. Ensure that the +5 V, +15 V, and -15 V values are within the range shown in Table 13-25. This confirms that the second part of the power supply is working correctly at the input voltage shown in the Battery field. Field

Range

+5

4.95 to 5.25V

+15

13.5 to 15.75V

-15

-13.5 to -16.5V

Gen

0 to 2a

Table 13-25. Voltages a. 0 indicates mainboard PN 157250 1 indicates mainboard PN 157265 2 indicates mainboard PN 157373

3. Activate : Mains off and make sure that the battery voltage reads 24 to 26.5 V. This shows the voltage of the backup battery. 4. Check that the +5 V, +15 V and -15 V values are within the range shown in Table 13-25. This confirms that the second part of the power supply is working correctly with the input voltage shown in the Battery field. 5. Check that the value for Gen corresponds to the mainboard fitted, as shown in Table 13-25. Note You have now completed all required software tests. You cannot perform test Test 16: , Alarm Messages, and you do not have to perform tests 17 and 18. If you wish to perform the two final tests, go to Test 17: , Event Log, on page 13-119 now. If not, go to 13.8.

13-114

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 15: Supply Voltages

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

Battery voltage out of range when Mains off not activated.

Compare the voltage shown on screen with the voltage at the 24 V test point, as described in Section 9.3, Mainboard voltages test, on page 9-6. If the voltage is out of range, replace the power supply. If the voltage is in range, but the values shown on screen is wrong, replace the mainboard.

+5 V, +15 V or -15 V value out of range.

Compare the voltages shown on screen with the voltages at the test points, as described in Section 9.3, Mainboard voltages test, on page 9-6. If the voltages are out of range, replace the power supply. If the voltages are in range, but the screen values are wrong, replace the mainboard.

Battery voltage out of range when Mains off activated.

• Check the backup batteries are connected. • Unless the batteries have not been charged for a long time (perhaps RAPHAEL has not been attached to the mains power supply for several months) replace the batteries. • If RAPHAEL has not been connected to the mains for a long time, connect it to the mains power supply for at least six hours, and then perform this test again.

Gen value out of range.

June 9, 2006

Replace mainboard.

PN 61067/05

13-115

13 Running version 3.* test software

13.8

Optional completion point for test software You are permitted to finish the test software tests at this point. (Alternatively, you can perform Test 17: Event Log and Test 18: Trend Data.) If you choose to exit the test software now, do the following: 1. Exit the test software by setting microswitch S1 to the “off” position and restarting the unit. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.)

2. Go to Section 7.4, Procedure, on page 7-3 to determine your next action.

13-116

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 16: Alarm Messages

Test 16: Alarm Messages Note This test is for HAMILTON MEDICAL internal use only. A description is not included in this document.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-117

13 Running version 3.* test software

13-118

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 17: Event Log

Test 17: Event Log Note It is not necessary to perform this test. However, you can do so if you want.

Test 17.1

Overview This test enables you to check: • That the event log is held in memory, and that entries appear correct • That the RS232 port can transmit the event log to a computer or printer Note • Only RAPHAELs containing mainboard PN 157265 or PN 157373 have an event log that is held in memory when RAPHAEL is switched off, and is therefore accessible for this test. These boards were fitted to RAPHAELs with serial numbers of 2000 and above. If you do not have such a mainboard, you cannot perform this test or Test 18: Trend Data. • Only RAPHAELs with a communication interface can transmit the event log to a computer or printer. (See Figure 2-3, RAPHAEL’s chassis from above, on page 2-4.) If your RAPHAEL has no communication interface, you cannot test the RS232 port, and you cannot perform Test 18: Trend Data. (However, you can check that entries in the event log appear correct.)

Test 17.2

Background

Test 17.2.1

The event log The event log stores up to 1000 events which you can display at will. These events are stored in the sequence that they take place. Each event includes date, time, description, and/or alarms with alarm priority. You can view the event log directly on RAPHAEL’s screen, or you can transmit it using the RS232 port of the communication interface (if this interface is installed) for display on a computer or printer. Information is transmitted in the following order: • • • • • •

Software version DCU version Configuration data Scaling data Operating hours List of events

Note !!! indicates an event associated with a high priority alarm !! indicates an event associated with a medium priority alarm ! indicates an event associated with a low priority alarm For more information about alarms, see Section 14, Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting and your operator’s manual.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-119

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 17.2.2

The two views of the event log The event log as viewed or ed in this test unit displays a wider range of events than the same event log when viewed during normal ventilation. The additional fields are: • Alarm off

This displays the time at which an alarm-causing condition ended. When read in the context of the alarm events in the log, it enables the to see how many alarms are active.

• Battery

This displays the voltage measured during the battery test that takes place every 30 minutes (with software version 3.*).

• Date change

This displays the newly-set date (in addition to the date of the event) when the date displayed by the real time clock is changed. This event can help you to analyze the cause of an inconsistency in the dates shown in the event log, as this can be due to a change being made to the real-time clock date.

13-120

• Time change

This displays the newly-set time (in addition to the time of the event) when the time displayed by the real time clock is changed.

• Test entered

This displays the number of the test every time a test software test is used.

• Software event

This string is displayed if a software event is discovered.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 17: Event Log

Test 17.3

Preparing your computer to receive data from the RS232 port

Test 17.3.1

Introduction If you plan to test the RS232 port by using it to send information to a computer, you must first prepare your computer as explained in this section. (Transmission to a computer is the method recommended by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG to perform this test.) If you plan to test the RS232 port by sending data to a printer, you do not have to prepare a computer. In this case, connect your printer to the RAPHAEL’s RS232 port (using a cable with the characteristics shown in Table 13-26) and go to Test 17.4, Displaying and checking the event log. Note This document does not offer instructions for preparing a printer to perform this test.

Test 17.3.2

Method If you have a standard installation of Windows™ 95 or later, you can use the HyperTerminal bundled software to read and print data sent from your RAPHAEL’s RS232 port. To prepare your computer, do the following: 1. Locate an RS232 cable with the following pin configuration: Connector type

Pin number

9-pin male

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9-pin female

3

2

6

5

4

8

7

Table 13-26. RS232 cable specification

RS232 cable PN 157354 is a suitable choice. 2. Using the cable, the RS232 connector on the RAPHAEL to an RS232 connector on your computer. (The RAPHAEL RS232 port is shown on Figure 13-90 on page 13-107.) 3. Run HyperTerminal. You normally do this by clicking Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal. The Connection Description dialog box appears. 4. Type any name in the Name: text box and click OK. (The name you type is the name of the connection configuration. It is not the name of the file that will contain the event log data.) The Connect To dialog box is displayed. 5. In the Connect To dialog box, select the communication port on your computer that you used for the RS232 connection. (This is usually COM 1.) Click OK. The Properties dialog box for your port is displayed. 6. Select the following values in the Properties dialog box: • Bits per second: 9600 • Data bits: 7 • Parity: Even • Stop bits: 2 • Flow control: Hardware 7. Click OK.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-121

13 Running version 3.* test software

8. Click Transfer > Capture Text. The Capture Text dialog box opens. 9. In the Capture Text dialog box, type the path and file name for the file to which you will write the event log. 10. Click Start. Your computer is now prepared to display any data you send to it from the RS232 port of your RAPHAEL.

13-122

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 17: Event Log

Test 17.4

Displaying and checking the event log To show the event log on RAPHAEL’s display, do the following: 1. Activate Test 17: Event Log. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-94.

Figure 13-94. The Event Log test screen

Note If no communication interface is installed, Transmit is not displayed. 2. Activate Previous or Next to scroll through the event log file. You are able to display a list of up to 1000 of the most recent events. 3. that the log appears reasonable. In particular, look for the most recent Power on event, and the events immediately following this. These events must correspond to the actions you have taken with the RAPHAEL. 4. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

There are no events in the event log.

June 9, 2006

Replace the mainboard.

PN 61067/05

13-123

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 17.5

Transmitting the event log 1. Connect a computer or printer to the RS232 port. (This is the smaller connector shown in Figure 13-90 on page 13-107.) If you are using a computer, that it is ready to receive data. (See Test 17.3, Preparing your computer to receive data from the RS232 port, on page 13-121.) 2. Activate Transmit to send the event log data to the printer or computer. You are able to display a list of up to 1000 of the last events. (However, it is not necessary to transmit all of these. Activate Abort if you want to shorten the time required for this test.) Note The latest stored data is transmitted first. 3. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Action

You cannot transmit the event log to a computer.

• Check that the computer is properly configured. • Check that the RS232 cable connecting the computer and the communication interface is properly in place. • Replace the interface board.

13-124

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 17: Optional completion point for test software

13.9

Optional completion point for test software You are permitted to finish the test software tests at this point. (Alternatively, you can perform Test 18: Trend Data.) If you choose to exit the test software now, do the following: 1. Exit the test software by setting microswitch S1 to the “off” position and restarting the unit. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.) 2. Go to Section 7.4, Procedure, on page 7-3 to determine your next action.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-125

13 Running version 3.* test software

Test 18: Trend Data Note It is not necessary to perform this test. However, you can do so if you want.

Test 18.1

Overview This test enables you to check that the 1-, 12-, and 24-hour trends of 22 monitored parameters can be transmitted through the RS232 port of the communication interface to a computer or printer. Note • Only RAPHAELs containing mainboard PN157265 or PN 157373 have trends that are held in memory and are therefore accessible for this test. These boards were fitted to RAPHAELs with serial numbers of 2000 and above. If you do not have such a mainboard, you cannot perform this test. • Only RAPHAELs with a communication interface can transmit trend data to a computer or printer. (See Figure 2-3, RAPHAEL’s chassis from above, on page 2-4.) If your RAPHAEL has no communication interface, you therefore cannot perform this test.

Test 18.2

Preparation 1. If you want to send your trend data to a computer (the method recommended by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG for this test) first prepare your computer as described in Test 17.3.2, Method, on page 13-121. Note This document does not contain instructions for sending data to a printer. 2. Activate Test 18: Trend Data. You see a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 13-95.

Figure 13-95. The Trend Data test screen

13-126

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 18: Trend Data

Test 18.3

Transmitting trend data 1. Connect your suitably prepared computer to the RS232 port. 2. Select any combination of the following: • : 1 hr Trend • : 12 hr Trend • : 24 hr Trend 3. Activate Transmit to send the selected trend data to the computer. Note • You can only activate Transmit if one of the trends is selected. • You can activate Abort at any time to stop transmission, and shorten the time required for this test. • The file transmitted is a text file, with columns separated by tabs. The easiest way to read it is to import it into a spreadsheet program. • The number of trends available in the exported file is greater than the number of trends shown on RAPHAEL. The additional trends are: VI (inspiratory volume), breath length, and mode. 4. that the transmitted data have been received by the computer. (An example is shown in Figure 13-96.) The newest data is displayed at the top of the list. 5. Activate Close.

Troubleshooting Symptom There are no trends available.

Action • Check that the computer is properly configured. • Check that the RS232 cable connecting the computer and the communication interface is properly in place. • Check that you have mainboard PN157265 or PN 157373. (Mainboard PN 157250 does not save trend data.) • Replace the interface board. • Replace the mainboard.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-127

13 Running version 3.* test software

Figure 13-96. Start of data found in a 1 hour trend in file trend.TXT

13-128

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Test 18: Mandatory completion point for test software

13.10

Mandatory completion point for test software 1. Exit the test software by setting microswitch S1 to the “off” position and restarting the unit. WARNING All other switches must, at all times, remain in the “off” position. (They are for development use only.) 2. Go to Section 7.4, Procedure, on page 7-3 to determine your next action.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

13-129

13 Running version 3.* test software

13-130

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Part 3: Troubleshooting and replacements

PN 61067/05

Section

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting 14

14.1

Overview This section is your main information resource for all troubleshooting. The section is in four parts:

14.2 14.2.1

• Section 14.2, Understanding RAPHAEL alarms, on page 14-1

An overview of RAPHAEL’s alarm system.

• Section 14.3, The role of the event troubleshooting, on page 14-3

An introduction to using the event log to help troubleshooting.

• Section 14.4, Troubleshooting technical fault alarms, on page 14-5

A list of all the technical fault alarms, complete with their technical fault number, and with suggested actions for troubleshooting. (Technical fault alarms indicate a problem with RAPHAEL; normal alarms indicate a problem with the patient.)

• Section 14.5, Troubleshooting normal alarms, on page 14-11

A short list of normal alarm messages (that do not have a technical fault number) that can result from a ventilator problem. Suggested troubleshooting actions are included.

• Section 14.6, General troubleshooting, on page 14-13

A general section on troubleshooting, for problems with RAPHAEL that are not related to either patient or technical fault alarms.

Note Reading the event log is the starting point for troubleshooting.

Understanding RAPHAEL alarms Two alarm systems RAPHAEL has two completely independent alarm systems. The first uses the main processor (μP C167CR) to evaluate alarm conditions, and uses the loudspeaker to produce sound. The second alarm system uses an ASIC to evaluate alarm conditions, and uses the buzzer to produce sound. (See The two processing systems on page 5-4.) The advantage of the second, backup, alarm system is that it has its own power source in the form of two capacitors, which can cause the buzzer to sound for more than two minutes, even in the absence of mains electricity or power from the backup batteries. Note Despite its name, the buzzer produces a high-pitched sound.

14.2.2

Two kinds of alarm RAPHAEL has two kinds of alarm: the normal alarms that take place during ventilation, and the Technical Fault alarms that indicate RAPHAEL cannot perform ventilation.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-1

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

Normal alarms have three priorities: high, medium and low. High and medium alarms activate the loudspeaker followed by the buzzer if the loudspeaker is not silenced for more than a minute. Low priority alarms activate only the loudspeaker. Technical fault alarms use the loudspeaker and buzzer in the same way as normal high and medium alarms with the exception of Technical Fault 1, Code 0, which only uses the buzzer. (Table 14-1.)

Technical Fault

Normal

Alarm Type

Loudspeaker

Buzzer

High

Yes

After 1 minute

Medium

Yes

After 1 minute

Low

Yes

No

TF 1 Code 0

No

Yes

All other TF

Yes

After 1 minute

Table 14-1. Use of loudspeaker and buzzer by alarms

Note It is not the case that the alarm system based on the main processor produces normal alarms, and the alarm system based on the ASIC produces technical faults. A normal alarm indicates a condition that can be managed by hospital staff. Examples are a loss of mains electricity or a failure of the oxygen supply. For full information about the many different normal alarms and how to respond to them, see the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) or local-language equivalent. A technical fault alarm indicates RAPHAEL has an internal fault, and cannot continue to actively ventilate the patient. In this case, RAPHAEL switches to ambient state. This is a state in which the patient is permitted to breathe — if he is able to do so — but is not actively ventilated by RAPHAEL. (For more information about ambient state, see Section 4.6, Inspiratory valve and ambient valve, on page 4-11.) The symptoms of a technical fault are: • A continuous sound on the buzzer, the loudspeaker, or both • The disappearance of the normal screen display • A message similar to the following: Technical fault x Alarm Code #y (where x and y are any numbers) A technical fault requires that RAPHAEL is taken out of service until it is repaired by a service engineer. The following table lists all technical faults, and how you can respond to them. Note If you report a failure to HAMILTON MEDICAL AG, be careful to note: • • • •

14-2

Technical fault number Alarm code RAPHAEL serial number Software version of unit

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

The role of the event troubleshooting

14.3

The role of the event troubleshooting Note RAPHAELs with the original mainboard, PN 157250 do not have an event log memory that can store events when RAPHAEL is switched off. For this reason, it is probably not practical to view the event log of these RAPHAELs as a part of troubleshooting. However, newer RAPHAELs with mainboards PN 157265 and PN 157373 store events in memory even when switched off.

14.3.1

Introduction Do not react immediately to the technical fault or other problem that was reported to you. Instead, use the event log to view the events leading up to the problem that you are troubleshooting. There are three ways you can view the event log. Of these, by far the most useful is in test software mode: How to access

View in normal ventilation mode

View in configuration mode

Characteristics

Press the P&T-knob at any time that there is no window open.

You see a subset of the event log. Furthermore, you only see events that took place after the ventilator was last switched on.

Enter configuration mode. To do this, power on the ventilator, then immediately press the P&T-knob. Do not release the knob until the system check is finished.

You see a subset of the event log.

Select Event the configuration mode screen.

View and in test software mode (Software versions 2.* and 3.* only.)

Enter test software mode. For details of how to do this, see Section 13.6, Entering test software mode, on page 13-4. Go to Test 17: Event Log.

You see, and can to a printer or computer, the complete event log.

Note You must have an interface board fitted to RAPHAEL, and have a suitable RS232 cable.

Table 14-2. Three ways of viewing the event log

Note For more information about the event log, see Test 17: Event Log, on page 13-119.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-3

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

14.3.2

Interpreting events Try to identify events in the event log that can help you identify the underlying cause of the problem that you must troubleshoot. The following strategies are suggested: • It is likely that you are trying to troubleshoot a problem that occurred during normal ventilator operation, several days previously. In this case, scroll through the event log until you find the date and time at which the problem event took place. You can then examine the events leading up to the problem. • Be aware that some apparent ventilator misfunctions can be the result of error. Look in particular for a record of incorrect settings, such as inappropriate alarm settings. • Send the event log to us by e-mail, so that we can analyze it. ([email protected])

14-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

Troubleshooting technical fault alarms Technical fault #1

Alarm code and meaning 0

Software or hardware failure, or 5 V supply less than 4.75 V.

14.4

Possible cause

Action

PROM problem.

Try each of the following possible solutions in the order given.

Defective mainboard.

1.

If you are in test software mode, connect the mains power supply.

2.

Make sure the software PROM is properly seated in its socket.

3.

Check the 5 V supply voltage.

4.

Replace the software PROM.

5.

Replace the mainboard.

5 V supply less than 4.75 V. Watchdog stopped. Software failure. You are in test software mode, you are using the backup batteries only, and the batteries have insufficient charge. Defective on/off switch.

Check on/off switch at rear of RAPHAEL, as well as cables between power supply and on/off switch.

WARNING

1 to 19

30

Power supply monitor. (See Power Supply Status on page 5-5.)

#1 continued

Software or hardware failure.

The on/off switch does not isolate RAPHAEL from the mains power supply. It only turns RAPHAEL on and off. Mains voltages are present in the power supply, even when RAPHAEL is switched off.

PROM problem.

Try each of the following possible solutions in the order given. 1.

Make sure the software PROM is properly seated in its socket.

2.

Replace the software PROM.

3.

Replace the mainboard.

Software failure.

Defective power supply.

Try each of the following possible solutions in the order given.

Defective mainboard.

1.

Replace the power supply.

2.

Replace the mainboard.

Table 14-3. Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-5

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

#1 continued

35

36

No communication with graphics controller board software.

33, 34

Possible cause

Action

PROM problem.

Try each of the following possible solutions in the order given.

Software failure.

1.

Make sure the software PROM is properly seated in its socket.

2.

Replace the software PROM.

3.

Replace the mainboard.

Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board defective.

Try each of the following possible solutions in the order given. 1.

Replace the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board.

2.

Replace the mainboard.

3.

Replace the software PROM.

Defective mainboard. Software failure.

Software failure.

31

Software failure.

Alarm code and meaning

Software failure.

Try replacing the software PROM.

The measured values are outside of the range that RAPHAEL can compensate for.

Technical fault

Defective pressure sensor cable.

Try each of the following possible solutions in the order given.

Defective pressure sensor connector. (Possibly a bad electrical .)

1.

Check the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors.

2.

Go into test software mode, and perform Test 7: Pressure Sensors, subtest Autozero. You are guided to replace one of the following sensors:

Defective dPptm pressure sensor.

• Paw not OK: - Replace Pprox pressure sensor • Vaw not OK: - Replace dPptm pressure sensor • Pvent not OK: - Replace Pvent pressure sensor

Defective Pvent pressure sensor. Defective Pprox pressure sensor. Defective autozero valves.

3.

Check the +10 V supply at Pin 5 on Test Connector 1.

Defective mainboard.

If it is out of range, check for a short circuit on pressure sensors.

Defective pneumatic block.

To do this, disconnect the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors. If the +10 V supply is corrected, the problem lies with one of the pressure sensors. Try replacing each of the sensors in turn. If the +10 V supply is not corrected, replace the mainboard.

Table 14-3. Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

14-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

Alarm code and meaning Software failure.

Technical fault

Possible cause

Technical fault.

Action

If you have software version 2* or 3.*, the event log as described in either:

99 to 2000

• Test 17: Event Log, on page 12-117 • Test 17: Event Log, on page 13-119 and HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]). If you have software version 1.*, you cannot the event log. technical .

#2

21

Current to inspiratory valve or expiratory valve too high.

Check the resistance of the inspiratory and expiratory valve coils. They must be in the range 13 to 23 Ω.

#5

23

24

Failure of patient overpressure valve.

1.

Go into test software mode, and perform Test 9: Tightness and Overpressure.

Defective Pvent pressure sensor.

2.

Replace the safety block or Pvent pressure sensor, depending upon the results of this test.

Microprocessor clock frequency problem.

#4

22

Defective alarm monitor.

Replace the mainboard.

Pressure in patient circuit greater than the value set (Pmax) for more than 5 s.

#3

Pvent pressure greater than 140 mbar.

If necessary, replace one of the valves.

Defective Pprox or Pvent sensor.

Defective mainboard.

1.

Go into test software mode, and perform Test 7: Pressure Sensors.

2.

Replace the faulty sensor.

Table 14-3. Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-7

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

#6

Alarm code and meaning 25

Pressure of tank too high.

Technical fault

Possible cause

Action

Defective tank pressure sensor cable.

Check the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors.

Defective tank pressure sensor connector.

If this does not solve the problem, do the following:

Defective tank pressure sensor. Defective mixer valves or valve.

1.

Go into test software mode, and perform Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure.

2.

If possible, identify and replace the faulty component.

3.

If you cannot identify the faulty component, try replacing each component in turn, in the sequence suggested by the “Possible cause” column.

1.

Go into test software mode, and perform Test 5: Mixer and Tank Pressure.

2.

Check especially the Offset frequency Hz value.

Defective mainboard. Defective pneumatic block.

#7

26

Defective mixer.

Leaking rubber mounting block on one of mixer valves. Defective pneumatic block. Defective mainboard. Defective mixer valves or valve. Leaking rubber mounting block on one of mixer valves. Defective dPmixer pressure sensor.

If this out of range when no gas is connected, the mainboard is defective. If this is out of range only when gas is connected, one of the pneumatic components (mixer valve, mounting block or pneumatic block) is defective.

Table 14-3. Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

14-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

#8

Alarm code and meaning 28

Pressure sensor dPptm defective.

Technical fault

Possible cause

Defective or old version dPptm pressure sensor.

Action

Try each of the following possible solutions in the order given. 1.

Make sure you have the latest type of dPptm pressure sensor board. The latest type of pressure sensor is equipped with printed circuit board PN 157412 (dpPtm sensor and PC board on page F-8). If you have an old type, order and install kit PN 157411.

2.

Check the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors.

3.

Go into test software mode, and perform Test 7: Pressure Sensors, subtest Autozero. You might be guided to replace the dPptm sensor by the following message: Vaw not OK:

4.

Check the +10 V supply at Pin 5 on Test Connector 1.

Defective dPptm pressure sensor cable. Defective dPptm pressure sensor connector. Defective autozero valves. Defective extended rinse flow valve. Defective mainboard. Defective pneumatic block.

If it is out of range, check for a short circuit on pressure sensors. To do this, disconnect the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors. If the +10 V supply is corrected, the problem lies with one of the pressure sensors. Try replacing each of the sensors in turn.

#9

29

Pressure sensor Pprox defective.

If the +10 V supply is not corrected, replace the mainboard. Defective Pprox pressure sensor cable. Defective Pprox pressure sensor.

1.

Check the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors.

2.

Go into test software mode, and perform Test 7: Pressure Sensors, subtest Autozero. You might be guided to replace the Pprox sensor by the following message: Paw not OK

3.

Check the +10 V supply at Pin 5 on Test Connector 1.

Defective Flow Sensor autozero valves. Defective extended rinse flow valve. Defective mainboard. Defective pneumatic block.

If it is out of range, check for a short circuit on pressure sensors. To do this, disconnect the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors. If the +10 V supply is corrected, the problem lies with one of the pressure sensors. Try replacing each of the sensors in turn. If the +10 V supply is not corrected, replace the mainboard.

Table 14-3. Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-9

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

#10

37

#11

38

Possible cause

Action

No inspiration/expiration cycle for more than the sum of the set apnea time + 2 s.

Alarm code and meaning

Software failure.

Try replacing the software PROM.

Pressure sensor Pvent defective.

Technical fault

Defective Pvent pressure sensor cable.

1.

Check the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors.

2.

Go into test software mode, and perform Test 7: Pressure Sensors, subtest Autozero. You might be guided to replace the Pvent sensor by the following message: Pvent not OK:

3.

Check the +10 V supply at Pin 5 on Test Connector 1.

Defective Pvent pressure sensor. Defective Pvent autozero valve. Defective mainboard. Defective pneumatic block.

If it is out of range, check for a short circuit on pressure sensors. To do this, disconnect the ribbon cable between the J5 connector on the mainboard and the pressure sensors. If the +10 V supply is corrected, the problem lies with one of the pressure sensors. Try replacing each of the sensors in turn. If the +10 V supply is not corrected, replace the mainboard.

#12

39

Defective mainboard.

Replace the mainboard.

The 5 V backup power, supplied by the two capacitors, dropped to 4.7 V or below. (This alarm does not occur during normal discharge of the condensers when driving the alarm buzzer.) #13

Technical fault.

Software failure.

99 to 2000

#14

If you have software version 2* or 3.*, the event log as described in either: • Test 17: Event Log, on page 12-117 • Test 17: Event Log, on page 13-119 and HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]). If you have software version 1.*, you cannot the event log. technical .

Table 14-3. Troubleshooting technical fault alarms

14-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Troubleshooting normal alarms

14.5

Troubleshooting normal alarms Use this section to troubleshoot some specific normal (patient) alarm messages. These messages are included in the RAPHAEL operator’s manuals, as they are normally caused by a patient condition or application problem, not a ventilator problem. However, because in some cases the messages can be caused by a ventilator problem, a selected subset of messages is included here. Always perform the actions in the sequence suggested. WARNING After making a repair to RAPHAEL, always perform the complete range of tests described in one of the following sections: • Section 11, Running version 1.x test software • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software

Alarm message

Check flow sensor is displayed.

Possible cause • V2 • V4

Flow sensor missing is displayed.

• V1 • V2

High min volume is displayed.

• V2 • V3

High tidal volume, disconnection is displayed.

• V1 • V4 • V5

High tidal volume, flow sensor missing is displayed.

• V2

See Table 14-5 and Figure 14-1 on page 14-12

• V3

Action

• Refer to your RAPHAEL operator’s manual, and correct the application problem if possible. • Locate the source of the problem by performing one of the following test software tests: • If you are running software version 1.x, perform Test 5, Ext. Autozero and Nebul., on page 11-35 • If you are running software version 2.*, perform Test 6, Ext. Autozero and Nebul., on page 12-47 • If you are running software version 3.*, perform Test 6, Ext. Autozero and Nebul., on page 13-50 • Having corrected the problem, perform all the test software tests in Section 11, Section 12 or Section 13.

Table 14-4. Troubleshooting normal alarms

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-11

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

Nebulizer

Oxygen mixer

Air mixer

V4

V2

V1

V3

V5

Figure 14-1. The solenoid valves

Valve number

Valve description

V1

Flow Sensor (differential pressure) dPptm autozero proximal.

V2

Flow Sensor (differential pressure) dPptm autozero distal.

V3

Extended rinse flow, proximal.

V4

Extended rinse flow, distal.

V5

Flow Sensor Pvent autozero.

Table 14-5. Key to solenoid valve naming

14-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

General troubleshooting

14.6

General troubleshooting Use this section to troubleshoot problems that are not associated with a technical fault or an alarm message. Typically, these problems take place in RAPHAEL before software has fully booted. In this case, it is not possible for RAPHAEL to display a technical fault or other alarm message. Always perform the actions in the sequence suggested. WARNING After making a repair to RAPHAEL, always perform the complete range of tests described in one of the following sections: • Section 11, Running version 1.x test software • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software

Problem area RAPHAEL is dead.

Symptom

Action

RAPHAEL is completely dead.

• Replace the power supply.

RAPHAEL is dead, except for the fan, which runs as normal.

• Check the 5 V supply on the test pins. (Figure 9-7, Test pin values for test connectors 3 and 1, on page 9-7.) Replace power supply if necessary.

LED 1 on mainboard is blinking.

• cables from ac/dc converter board to display are connected. • Replace dc/ac converter board. • Replace display.

HAMILTON MEDICAL screen (This is the screen that displays during the boot sequence, immediately before the System check screen.)

During the boot sequence, RAPHAEL displays the HAMILTON MEDICAL screen, but does not continue further.

LED 2 on mainboard is illuminated.

• Replace graphic controller board.

LED 1 on mainboard does not blink.

• Make sure the PROM is properly seated in its socket on the mainboard. • Check the 5 V supply on the test pins. (Figure 9-7, Test pin values for test connectors 3 and 1, on page 9-7.) Replace 5 V power supply if necessary.

LED 2 on mainboard is illuminated. The following message is displayed: Checking DCU PROM...

• Replace mainboard.

The message is displayed after fitting a new graphics PROM and new software PROM and switching on RAPHAEL.

• Replace graphic controller board. • Replace mainboard. None.

The message indicates the start the of the color software to the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. The message does not indicate an error.

Table 14-6. General troubleshooting

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-13

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

Problem area

Symptom

Action

The following message is displayed:

The message is displayed after fitting a defective graphics PROM and switching on RAPHAEL.

• Ensure the PROM is properly seated.

DCU PROM checksum Error

The message indicates a problem with the Display Control Unit software PROM on the mainboard.

• Replace the PROM with a similar one.

The message is displayed shortly after switching on RAPHAEL, after fitting a new graphics PROM and new software PROM.

• Replace the DCU board.

The following message is displayed: Error Status = xxxx

The following message is displayed: Wrong Graphics Version Please replace Graphics PROM PROM Version xxxx required

The message indicates that an error occurred during the software to the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board. (The status codes are only of use to HAMILTON MEDICAL research and development, and are not listed here.) The message is displayed after fitting an incompatible Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) PROM and switching on RAPHAEL. The message indicates that the graphics PROM on the mainboard is not compatible with the installed software or hardware. (Color and XTC only). For more information about compatibility, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility.

• your HAMILTON MEDICAL representative.

• Replace the mainboard. • your HAMILTON MEDICAL representative.

• Ensure that you have Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board version L4 or version L7. (This information is printed on the board.) • Ensure that the Display Control Unit software PROM on the mainboard is compatible with the software PROM (also on the mainboard). • your HAMILTON MEDICAL representative.

The following message is displayed: Monochrome Software in Color device Please insert Color Software

The following message is displayed: Color Software in monochrome device Please insert monochrome Software

The message is displayed after fitting incompatible software components and switching on RAPHAEL. The message indicates that monochrome software was installed in a RAPHAEL Color.

• Make sure that you have installed the correct update/upgrade kit. • your HAMILTON MEDICAL representative.

For more information about compatibility, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility. The message is displayed after fitting incompatible software components and switching on RAPHAEL. The message indicates that color software was installed in a monochrome RAPHAEL.

• Make sure that you have installed the correct update/upgrade kit. • your HAMILTON MEDICAL representative.

For more information about compatibility, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility.

Table 14-6. General troubleshooting

14-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

General troubleshooting

Problem area The following message is displayed: Wrong Graphics Version Please replace Graphics PROM Installed Software Version: xxxx Installed Graphics Version: xxxx

Symptom The message is displayed after fitting incompatible hardware or software components and switching on RAPHAEL. The message indicates that the graphics on the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board are not compatible with the installed software (monochrome RAPHAELs only).

Action • Make sure that you have installed the correct update/upgrade kit. • your HAMILTON MEDICAL representative.

For more information about compatibility, see Appendix E, Hardware and software versions and compatibility.

Required Graphics Version: xxxx The following message is displayed:

The message is displayed on otherwise blank screen. Buzzer sounds continuously.

FATAL PROM Checksum Error!

• Make sure the PROM is properly seated in its socket on the mainboard. • Replace PROM. • Replace mainboard.

The following message is displayed:

The message is displayed on otherwise blank screen. Backup buzzer sounds continuously.

• Replace mainboard.

Fatal RAM Error!

Table 14-6. General troubleshooting

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-15

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

Problem area System check screen. (This screen displays the HAMILTON MEDICAL logo, together with some system information.)

Symptom All indicator LEDs on front should briefly illuminate. Some or all do not.

Action • Check keypad is properly connected. • Replace front keypad. • Replace mainboard.

Only the alarm silence key indicator LED does not illuminate.

• Replace alarm monitor ASIC. • Replace front keypad. • Replace mainboard.

Backup buzzer does not work.

• Replace mainboard.

Loudspeaker does not work.

• Replace loudspeaker. • Replace mainboard

After changing the mainboard, the following message is displayed: EEPROM time data error.

Set the operating hours value. See one of the following: • Test 1.6, Checking and setting the number of operating hours, on page 11-11 • Test 1.6, Checking and setting the number of operating hours, on page 12-12 • Test 1.7, Checking and setting the number of operating hours, on page 13-13

EEPROM config data error displayed.

Set the configuration data to factory settings. See one of the following: • Test 1.4, Checking and setting the configuration data, on page 11-9 • Test 1.4, Checking and setting the configuration data, on page 12-10 • Test 1.4, Checking and setting the configuration data, on page 13-10

EEPROM scaling data error displayed.

Set the scaling values to factory settings. See one of the following: • Test 1.3, Checking and setting the scaling Values, on page 11-8 • Test 1.3, Checking and setting the scaling values, on page 12-9 • Test 1.3, Checking and setting the scaling values, on page 13-9

Table 14-6. General troubleshooting

14-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

General troubleshooting

Problem area screen.

Symptom

Action

This screen displays a text telling you that it must graphics from the PROM on the mainboard to the “Flash” EPROM on the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board.

Press P&T-knob to start . The PROM on the mainboard overwrites the “Flash” EPROM on the graphics controller card with the graphics items required by the software on the mainboard PROM.

The text varies between software versions. However, typical text is: Graphics Module needs to be reprogrammed Please press button to reprogram Graphics Module 168 blocks need to be programmed

Note The cause of this message is that you have changed the PROM software carrier on the mainboard without changing the “Flash” PROM on the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board.

You do not have a RAPHAEL Color.

Note With software version 2.* you cannot do this. With software version 2.* and non-color units, you must replace the “Flash” PROM on the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board with a new, preprogrammed “Flash” PROM corresponding to the version of the software PROM. With color units, you must replace the second PROM on the mainboard. For more information, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]).

Replace Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board.

After pressing the P&T-knob, the requires more than 5 minutes. You have a RAPHAEL Color. After pressing the P&T-knob, there is no activity displayed on screen, or the LEDs on the mainboard are not blinking, or the requires more than 20 minutes. Power LED

LED does not illuminate.

• Check the fuses. • Check the mains power supply.

(Figure 13-2, AC power indicator LED, on page 13-4.)

• Replace the power supply. • Replace the front keyboard.

Table 14-6. General troubleshooting

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

14-17

14 Alarms, technical faults, and troubleshooting

14-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Section

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures 15

WARNING • •

• • • • •

You must perform all preventive maintenance and testing once a year. To do this, you perform all the steps shown in Section 7, Overview of preventive maintenance and testing. You must complete a service training course for RAPHAEL ventilators with HAMILTON MEDICAL before undertaking the maintenance, testing or replacement procedures described in this manual. If the pneumatic block fails, replace it. Never attempt to repair the pneumatic block. Never clean the pneumatic block. Never allow alcohol near the pneumatic block. To reduce risk of fire, do not use the self-emptying water trap on the oxygen inlet. To prevent disease transmission, you must use personal protective equipment when handling contaminated bacterial filters or other patient accessories. Refer to one of the operator’s manuals for instructions on sterilizing patient system parts.

CAUTION Make sure to take full ESD (electrostatic discharge) precautions before handling any EPROM, or before opening RAPHAEL. For more information, see Appendix G, Maintenance tools and test equipment.

15.1

Introduction This section deals with procedures that fall outside of the yearly preventive maintenance described in Section 8, Hospital and engineer preventive maintenance. The following procedures are detailed: • • • • • •

15.2

Section 15.2, Opening RAPHAEL’s enclosure, on page 15-1 Section 15.3, Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves, on page 15-3 Section 15.4, Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, on page 15-15 Section 15.5, Changing the 12V batteries, on page 15-17 Section 15.6, Changing the real-time lithium clock battery, on page 15-19 Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21

Opening RAPHAEL’s enclosure If you have not already done so, do the following: 1. Disconnect all tubing and cables (pneumatic and electric) from the RAPHAEL.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-1

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

2. Open the enclosure by removing the 8 screws, using a 2.5mm hexagonal (Allen) key. (Figure 15-1.)

Figure 15-1. Positions of the 8 screws that are removed to open RAPHAEL

Note The photograph shows a RAPHAEL with a self-emptying water trap at the air inlet. You might have only the normal water trap fitted. If so, consider fitting the self-emptying trap, as described

15-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves

15.3 15.3.1

Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves Preparation Open RAPHAEL’s enclosure, as explained in Section 15.2, on page 15-1.

15.3.2 15.3.2.1

Cleaning the inspiratory valve Overview Perform this cleaning procedure when indicated by Test 8: I-Valve and E-Valve, on page 12-72. The procedure comprises the following steps: 1. Removing the inspiratory valve from the RAPHAEL. 2. Dismantling the inspiratory valve. 3. Cleaning the seal and plunger. 4. Reassembling and replacing the valve.

15.3.2.2

Removing the inspiratory valve from the RAPHAEL To remove the inspiratory valve from the RAPHAEL you must first remove the complete pneumatic unit from the RAPHAEL. You then remove the valve from the pneumatic unit. 1. Remove the mains cable from the RAPHAEL. 2. Remove all the cable connectors ing the pneumatic unit to the main circuit board. The larger connectors clip into place, and must be removed with the help of a screwdriver. (Figure 15-2) 3. Remove the earth connectors that connect the pneumatic unit to the casing.

Figure 15-2. Removing cable connectors

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-3

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

4. With the help of a small wrench, remove the pneumatic tubes from the pneumatic unit. To do this, push down with the spanner on the innermost metal collar fixing each tube to its connector, while pulling the tube. (Figure 15-3 on page 15-4.) Note that when refixing the tubes, the wrench is not necessary.

Figure 15-3. Removing the pneumatic tubes with the help of a wrench

5. Remove the two screws that fix the patient outlet to the body of the RAPHAEL. (Figure 15-4.) CAUTION Be careful. These are easy to damage.

Figure 15-4. Removing the screws attaching the patient outlet

15-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves

6. Push the patient outlet into the body of the RAPHAEL. 7. Remove the oxygen cell. You can now see the oxygen calibration tube. (Figure 15-5.) Remove this tube from the front of the RAPHAEL

Oxygen measurement tube

Patient outlet

Figure 15-5. The position of the oxygen calibration tube

8. Remove the three hexagonal (Allen) bolts that secure the complete pneumatic block to the rear of the RAPHAEL. (Figure 15-6)

Figure 15-6. Removing the hexagonal (Allen) bolts holding the pneumatic unit

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-5

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

9. Making sure that the patient outlet is well removed from its housing in the body of the RAPHAEL, and making sure that all cables are removed, gently slide the pneumatic unit from the rear of the RAPHAEL. (Figure 15-7)

Figure 15-7. Removing the entire pneumatic unit

10. Place the pneumatic unit on a suitable work surface and remove the thick white rubber hose to the patient outlet. Finally, remove the hexagonal (Allen) bolts attaching the inspiratory valve to the unit. (Figure 15-8) Note If necessary, unscrew the tank to obtain better access to the screws.

Tank Rubber hose removed Hexagonal (Allen) bolts

Figure 15-8. Removing the inspiratory valve from the pneumatic unit

15-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves

15.3.2.3

Dismantling the inspiratory valve 1. Remove the two outer hexagonal (Allen) screws from the top of the inspiratory valve. One screw holds the ground wire in place, the other holds the small printed circuit board. (Figure 15-9)

The two outer screws

Figure 15-9. Removing the two outer hexagonal (Allen) screws

2. Slide off the inspiratory valve top, containing the magnet. (Figure 15-10)

Figure 15-10. Sliding off the top of the inspiratory valve

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-7

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

3. Remove the two hexagonal (Allen) screws ing the upper and lower parts of the inspiratory valve. (Figure 15-11)

Figure 15-11. Removing the screws ing the upper and lower casings

4. Gently slide the upper and lower casings apart (Figure 15-12). Note the position of the black O-ring. CAUTION Do not damage the seal between the plunger and the plunger housing. Only use your hands for this task. Do not force the unit apart with a screwdriver or similar tool.

Black O-ring

Figure 15-12. Separating the upper and lower parts

15-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves

5. Unscrew the coil from its housing. CAUTION When initially loosening the assembly, only turn the coil. Do not turn the plunger, as this can damage the seal between the plunger and its housing. Do not use pliers or similar to grasp the plunger, as this could cause damage.

If you have special tool PN 500293, shown in Figure 15-13, use it as shown in Figure 15-14. If you also have an inspiratory valve with a hole for a hexagonal (Allen) key, your task is further simplified. (Figure 15-15.)

Figure 15-13. PN 500293 special tool for removing coil from

inspiratory valve

Figure 15-14. PN 500293 in use with old-style plunger

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-9

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

Figure 15-15. PN 500293 in use with new-style plunger

Figure 15-16. Detail of new expiratory valve plunger

If you do not have special tool PN 500293, use your fingers, as shown in Figure 15-17.

Figure 15-17. Turning the coil to remove it from plunger

15-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves

6. Remove the coil from the plunger and the housing, and retain the white seal. (Figure 15-18)

White seal

Figure 15-18. Removing the coil from the plunger

7. Slide the plunger out from the housing. (Figure 15-19.)

Figure 15-19. Removing the plunger and spring from the housing

15.3.2.4

Cleaning the seal and plunger WARNING Do not use any kind of lubrication, because of the risk of explosion.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-11

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

CAUTION Keep alcohol away from the pneumatic block. (A small quantity of alcohol can destroy the block.) 1. Clean the entire plunger using a clean cloth and an alcoholic liquid. (Figure 15-20.)

Figure 15-20. Cleaning the plunger with an alcoholic liquid

2. Clean the plunger housing with the alcoholic liquid. The most important parts to clean are the sides of the housing that seal against the plunger. (Figure 15-21.)

Figure 15-21. Cleaning the plunger housing

15-12

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Cleaning the inspiratory and expiratory valves

3. Clean the plunger housing with the same alcoholic liquid. (Figure 15-22)

Figure 15-22. Cleaning the plunger housing

15.3.2.5

Reassembling and replacing the valve To reassemble the valve, reverse the sequence of steps above. CAUTION You must not use any tools except PN 500293 to screw the coil into place.

When remounting the coil, make sure that you position the thin white wires going to the coil in the large housing. Also make sure that you position the printed circuit board so that the soldered connections are uppermost. Both of these details are shown in Figure 15-9, Removing the two outer hexagonal (Allen) screws, on page 15-7. Rebuild and replace the pneumatic unit in the RAPHAEL, and connect the cables and tubing. When you replace the pneumatic tubing, you do not require a wrench.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-13

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

15.3.3

Cleaning the expiratory valve Perform this cleaning procedure when indicated by step (1) on page 8-11. 1. Clean the pin at the bottom of the expiratory valve using an alcoholic liquid and a clean cloth. (Figure 15-23)

Figure 15-23. Cleaning the expiratory valve pin

2. Clean the rubber sealing ring with the same liquid. (Figure 15-24)

Figure 15-24. Cleaning the expiratory valve sealing ring

WARNING After reassembling RAPHAEL, perform the complete series of tests in one of the following sections: • Section 11, Running version 1.x test software, on page 11-1 • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software, on page 12-1 • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software, on page 13-1

15-14

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board

15.4 15.4.1

Replacing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board Introduction Perform this procedure when indicated by Test 2, Display, on page 11-12 or Test 2, Display, on page 12-16. Replacing the DCU (or graphics) board is not a difficult task. However, if you are replacing a color unit, be sure to read the information in Section 15.4.3.1, Fitting the new board.

15.4.2

Preparation Open RAPHAEL’s enclosure, as explained in Section 15.2, on page 15-1.

15.4.3

Removing the DCU board 1. Using a pair of thin-nosed pliers, squeeze the top of the rear plastic pin attaching the DCU board to the mainboard. (Figure 15-25.) 2. Using a finger, pull the DCU board just free of the plastic pin. CAUTION Do not try to remove the board at this point. 3. Again using the pliers, squeeze the top of the plastic pin nearest the front of the RAPHAEL. 4. Pull the DCU board just free of the second pin. ing the DCU board on two sides, lift it free of the mainboard.

Chip present here in color versions

Figure 15-25. Squeezing the top of the rear plastic pin ing the DCU

board 15.4.3.1

Fitting the new board 1. Snap the new board into place on the plastic pins. You do not require tools.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-15

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

2. If you have software version 1.x (which you should update — see Appendix D) or RAPHAEL Color, the DCU software from the PROM on the mainboard to the DCU board. To do this: a. Connect mains power and switch on the unit. Wait for the startup procedure to complete. This is indicated by a tone from the loudspeaker. b. Ensure that LED 1 on the mainboard is blinking. c. Push the P&T-knob. Ensure that the 4 LEDs on the mainboard blink intermittently. (If they do not blink, push the P&T-knob again.) d. Wait 10 to 15 minutes for the to complete. You then see the Start ventilation screen. WARNING After reassembling RAPHAEL, perform the complete series of tests in one of the following sections: • Section 11, Running version 1.x test software, on page 11-1 • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software, on page 12-1 • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software, on page 13-1

15-16

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Changing the 12V batteries

15.5 15.5.1

Changing the 12V batteries Introduction Perform this procedure when indicated by Section 9.4, 12 V batteries condition test, on page 9-10.

Note Never replace only one battery. Always replace both together. It is recommended that you use battery replacement kit PN 157313.

15.5.2

Preparation Open RAPHAEL’s enclosure, as explained in Section 15.2, on page 15-1.

15.5.3

Removing the batteries 1. Remove the mains cable from the RAPHAEL. 2. Remove the battery connector from the power supply. (Figure 15-26.) CAUTION You must do this before disconnecting and removing the batteries.

Figure 15-26. Removing the battery connector from the power supply

3. Undo the Velcro® strap holding each battery in place. (Figure 15-27.)

Figure 15-27. The battery straps

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-17

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

4. Remove the lower battery from its housing and disconnect each of the battery connectors, being careful to pull the connector, and not the wire. (Figure 15-28)

Figure 15-28. Disconnecting a battery connector

5. Disconnect the upper battery, and then remove it. (Do not remove the battery connector lead from the printed circuit board.) 15.5.4

Replacing the batteries 1. Connect the short, red wire that you removed from the old batteries, to the negative terminal (-) of one new battery. 2. Place the new battery in the upper housing. Make sure the negative (-) terminal of the battery is on the right. (A mark cut into the case of the RAPHAEL to shows you where to place the negative (-) terminal.) 3. Connect the positive terminal (+) of the upper battery to the short, red wire of the red/brown pair attached to the circuit board. 4. Connect the positive terminal (+) of the second new battery to the red wire now attached to the upper battery. 5. Connect the negative terminal of the battery (-) to the brown wire. 6. Place the battery in the lower housing. 7. Tighten both straps. 8. Connect the battery connector on the power supply.

Note When battery replacement is complete, the batteries and wiring must be identical to those shown on Figure 15-28. CAUTION Be sure to dispose of the old batteries in an environmentally-friendly way.

15-18

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Changing the real-time lithium clock battery

15.6 15.6.1

Changing the real-time lithium clock battery Introduction Perform this procedure when indicated by Test 1: Memory. You can order a new real-time clock battery using PN 369096. The real-time clock battery is located on the mainboard, but is positioned under the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board, where it is not visible. The procedure comprises the following steps: 1. Removing the graphics controller (DCU) board. 2. Removing the real-time clock. 3. Replacing the real-time clock battery.

15.6.2

Removing the Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board 1. Remove the mains cable from the RAPHAEL. 2. Using a pair of thin-nosed pliers, squeeze the top of the rear plastic pin attaching the DCU board to the mainboard. (Figure 15-29.) 3. Using a finger, pull the DCU board just free of the plastic pin. CAUTION Do not try to remove the board at this point. 4. Again using the pliers, squeeze the top of the plastic pin nearest the front of the RAPHAEL. 5. Pull the DCU board just free of the second pin. 6. ing the DCU board on two sides, lift it free of the mainboard.

Chip present here in color versions

Figure 15-29. Squeezing the top of the rear plastic pin ing the Display

Control Unit (DCU graphics) board

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-19

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

15.6.3

Removing real-time clock battery 1. Insert a small screwdriver into the recess in the cover of the real-time clock. (Figure 15-30.) 2. Pivot the screwdriver away from the recess, thereby opening and removing the top cover and battery.

Figure 15-30. Pivoting open the top of the real-time clock

15.6.4

Replacing the real-time clock battery You can replace the battery and Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board without tools. CAUTION Be sure to dispose of the old battery in an environmentally-friendly way. WARNING After reassembling RAPHAEL, perform the complete series of tests in one of the following sections: • Section 11, Running version 1.x test software, on page 11-1 • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software, on page 12-1 • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software, on page 13-1

15-20

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

15.7 15.7.1

Replacing the display Introduction This section covers all displays, including the large color display in RAPHAEL XTC. Replace a display when indicated by Test 2: Display, or by a general failure of the display. Note Always make sure that glass surfaces are free of dirt and dust when reassembling.

15.7.2

Preparation Open RAPHAEL’s enclosure, as explained in Section 15.2, on page 15-1.

15.7.3

Removing cable connectors and tubing 1. Locate the cable connectors, as shown in one of the following photographs: • Figure 15-31, Cables in RAPHAELs with monochrome display • Figure 15-32, Cables in RAPHAEL Color • Figure 15-33, Cables in RAPHAEL XTC dc/ac board

To display To display keyboard

To P&T-knob

To front keyboard To dc/ac board

Figure 15-31. Cables in RAPHAELs with monochrome display

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-21

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

dc/ac board

To dc/ac board

To display (this cable is hidden by the “display keyboard” cable)

To display keyboard

To P&T-knob To front keyboard

Figure 15-32. Cables in RAPHAEL Color

dc/ac board

To dc/ac board

To display (this cable is hidden by the “display keyboard” cable)

To display keyboard

To P&T-knob

To front keyboard

Figure 15-33. Cables in RAPHAEL XTC

2. Disconnect the P&T cable from the P&T (press and turn) knob. Do not attempt to remove it from the mainboard. CAUTION Be extremely careful with the soldered connection of the P&T-knob cable to the mainboard. You must not bend or stress this in any way.

15-22

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

3. Disconnect the four other cables indicated in Figure 15-31, Figure 15-32, or Figure 15-33. CAUTION If you have a RAPHAEL Color or RAPHAEL XTC, be very careful about disconnecting the cable labelled “To display”. First loosen the collar on each side with a screwdriver (Figure 15-34) and then to pull the cable free (Figure 15-35). The photographs show the mainboard on a work surface (for a better view). You must perform this task with the mainboard inside RAPHAEL.

Figure 15-34. Loosening the display cable collar with a screwdriver, on a

RAPHAEL Color (RAPHAEL XTC is very similar)

Figure 15-35. Pulling the display cable free of the mainboard on a RAPHAEL

Color

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-23

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

4. Disconnect the three blue pneumatic tubes from the pneumatic block at the rear of the RAPHAEL. To do this, use a wrench (spanner) to push down on the inner collar of the connector, while pulling the tube free.

Figure 15-36. Removing the pneumatic tubes using a wrench

15.7.4

Removing RAPHAEL’s front cover This procedure is the same for a monochrome RAPHAEL, a RAPHAEL Color, and for RAPHAEL XTC. 1. Remove the two hexagonal (Allen) screws attaching the font cover. (Figure 15-27.)

Figure 15-37. Removing the two hexagonal (Allen) screws

15-24

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

2. Remove the front cover. (Figure 15-38.)

Figure 15-38. Removing RAPHAEL’s front cover

15.7.5

Removing the display on a monochrome RAPHAEL or RAPHAEL Color This procedure is for a monochrome RAPHAEL or a RAPHAEL Color. If you have a RAPHAEL XTC, go to Section 15.7.8, Removing, dismantling and replacing the display on a RAPHAEL XTC, on page 15-41. 1. Remove the left-hand connector from the dc/ac board. Figure 15-39 shows the HITACHI board fitted to RAPHAELs with monochrome displays. The color display in RAPHAEL Color uses a very similar dc/ac board (shown in Figure 5-8, The three types of dc/ac board, on page 5-13.)

Figure 15-39. Disconnecting the left connector from the dc/ac board

(monochrome display shown in photograph)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-25

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

2. Remove the two screws attaching the dc/ac board. (Figure 15-40.) Remove the board and fixings.

Figure 15-40. Removing the dc/ac converter board (HITACHI board shown in

photograph) 3. Remove the hexagonal (Allen) screws holding in place the two metal s that secure the display. (Figure 15-41.)

Metal s

Figure 15-41. Removing the two display s (monochrome display shown,

color displays are similar)

15-26

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

4. Remove the display . (Figure 15-42.)

Figure 15-42. Removing the display (monochrome display shown, color displays

are similar) 5. If it has stuck to the glass, carefully remove the black seal from the display keyboard. (Figure 15-43.) You must use this seal when reassembling the RAPHAEL.

Figure 15-43. Removing the black seal (monochrome display shown)

6. Go to one of the following sections: • Section 15.7.6, Dismantling and replacing a monochrome display, on page 15-28 • Section 15.7.7, Dismantling and replacing a RAPHAEL Color display, on page 15-32

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-27

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

15.7.6

Dismantling and replacing a monochrome display This procedure is for a monochrome RAPHAEL. For other kinds of RAPHAEL, see: • Section 15.7.7, Dismantling and replacing a RAPHAEL Color display, on page 15-32 • Section 15.7.8, Removing, dismantling and replacing the display on a RAPHAEL XTC, on page 15-41

15.7.6.1

Dismantling the display 1. Remove the four hexagonal (Allen) screws attaching the display to the front glass screen. (Figure 15-44.)

Figure 15-44. Removing the four hexagonal (Allen) screws

2. Remove the display from the front glass screen. (Figure 15-45.)

Figure 15-45. Removing the display

15-28

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

15.7.6.2

Replacing the display 1. If necessary, reposition the black seal inside the front cover. (Figure 15-46.)

Figure 15-46. Positioning the black seal to the front

2. Make sure that both the display and display glass are clean. Use a lint-free cloth, or ideally, compressed air. 3. Place the display on the front glass. (Figure 15-47.)

Foam

Figure 15-47. Replacing the monochrome display on the display

4. Replace the hexagonal (Allen) screws. 5. Make sure that the foam is not visible from the front of the display .

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-29

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

6. Place the combined display and front glass in the front casing of the RAPHAEL. (Figure 15-48.)

Figure 15-48. Installing the display

7. Replace the two s, making sure that the foam dust protection does not stop a good electrical connection between the and the RAPHAEL front . To do this, you must push the foam away from the connecting area between and , using a screwdriver. (Figure 15-49.)

Figure 15-49. Pushing the foam away from the connecting area

WARNING The display s must have a good electrical (ground) with the front cover of the RAPHAEL to stop external electrical interference from disrupting the operation of RAPHAEL.

15-30

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

8. Complete the fitting of the new display by reversing the removal procedure. 9. Make sure that all cables are correctly fitted by checking with Figure 15-31, Cables in RAPHAELs with monochrome display, on page 15-21. 10. Go to one of the following sections, and perform the complete series of tests: • Section 11, Running version 1.x test software, on page 11-1 • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software, on page 12-1 • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software, on page 13-1

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-31

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

15.7.7

Dismantling and replacing a RAPHAEL Color display Use the following procedure if you have a RAPHAEL Color. For other kinds of RAPHAEL, see: • Section 15.7.6, Dismantling and replacing a monochrome display, on page 15-28 • Section 15.7.8, Removing, dismantling and replacing the display on a RAPHAEL XTC, on page 15-41

15.7.7.1

Dismantling the display 1. Loosen the display ribbon cable collar with a screwdriver, as shown by arrow (a) in Figure 15-50. Then pull the ribbon cable free of the display, as shown by arrow (b).

a

b

Figure 15-50. Removing the ribbon cable from the color display

15-32

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

2. Remove the four nuts and washers securing the display to the front glass screen. (Figure 15-51.)

Figure 15-51. Removing the nuts

3. Remove the four Phillips’ screws securing the s to the color display. (Figure 15-52.)

Figure 15-52. Removing the Phillips’ screws

The color display is now fully free of the RAPHAEL.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-33

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

15.7.7.2

Replacing the display 1. If necessary, reposition the black seal inside the front cover. (Figure 15-46.)

Figure 15-53. Positioning the black seal to the front

2. Replace the four Phillips’ screws securing the s to the color display. Note Do not fully tighten the screws. (Figure 15-52.)

Figure 15-54. Replacing the Phillips’ screws

15-34

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

3. Make sure that both the color display, and display glass are clean. Use a lint-free cloth, or ideally, compressed air. (Figure 15-55.)

Figure 15-55. Cleaning the glass with a lint-free cloth

4. Replace the foam carefully around the bolts and locating lugs. (Figure 15-56.)

Bolts Locating lugs

Figure 15-56. Replacing the foam

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-35

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

5. Mount the color display onto the display glass, making sure that the foam is correctly positioned, and that the display is tight against the locating lugs. (Figure 15-57.)

Foam under display

tight against lug

Figure 15-57. Checking the foam position

6. Replace the four nuts and washers securing the color display to the front glass screen.

Figure 15-58. Replacing the washers and nuts

15-36

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

7. Fully tighten the four Phillips’ screws. (Figure 15-59.)

Figure 15-59. Fully tightening the Phillips’ screws

8. Push the ribbon cable into place. (Figure 15-60.)

Figure 15-60. Pushing the ribbon cable into place

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-37

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

And lock it with the special collar. (Figure 15-61.)

Figure 15-61. Locking the collar

9. Place the combined color and glass in the RAPHAEL front casing, and replace the two s, making sure that the foam does not stop a good electrical connection between the and RAPHAEL’s front . To do this, you must push the foam away from the connecting area between and , using a screwdriver. (Figure 15-49.)

Figure 15-62. Pushing the foam away from the connecting area

15-38

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

Screw the s into place. (Figure 15-63.)

Figure 15-63. Screwing the s into place

WARNING The display s must have a good electrical (ground) with the front cover of the RAPHAEL to stop external electrical interference from disrupting the operation of RAPHAEL.

10. View the front cover carefully from the front, to make sure that the screen is correctly aligned within the cover. If necessary, realign it. 11. Mount and connect the dc/ac converter board. (Figure 15-64 and Figure 15-65.)

Figure 15-64. Mounting the dc/ac converter board

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-39

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

Figure 15-65. Connecting the dc/ac converter board

12. Complete the fitting of the new color display by reversing the removal procedure. 13. Make sure that all cables are correctly fitted, by checking your installation against: • Figure 15-32, Cables in RAPHAEL Color, on page 15-22 • Figure 15-66, below

Figure 15-66. Detail of schematic ZCH157332

14. Go to one of the following sections, and perform the complete series of tests: • Section 11, Running version 1.x test software, on page 11-1 • Section 12, Running version 2.* test software, on page 12-1 • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software, on page 13-1

15-40

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

15.7.8 15.7.8.1

Removing, dismantling and replacing the display on a RAPHAEL XTC This procedure is for a RAPHAEL XTC. If you have a monochrome RAPHAEL, or a RAPHAEL XTC, go to Section 15.7.5, Removing the display on a monochrome RAPHAEL or RAPHAEL Color, on page 15-25. Removing and dismantling the display 1. Loosen the display ribbon cable collar with a screwdriver, as shown by arrow (a) in Figure 15-67. Then pull the ribbon cable free of the display, as shown by arrow (b).

b

a

Figure 15-67. Removing the display cable

2. Remove the five hexagonal (Allen) screws attaching the display to the front glass screen. (Figure 15-44.)

Figure 15-68. Removing the four hexagonal (Allen) screws

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-41

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

3. Remove the display. (Figure 15-69).

Figure 15-69. Removing the display

15.7.8.2

Replacing the display 1. Make sure that both the display and display- glass are clean. Use a lint-free cloth, or ideally, compressed air. (Figure 15-55.)

Figure 15-70. Cleaning the display- glass with a lint-free cloth

2. Complete the replacement of the new display by reversing the procedures shown in: • Section 15.7.8.1, This procedure is for a RAPHAEL XTC. If you have a monochrome RAPHAEL, or a RAPHAEL XTC, go to Section 15.7.5, Removing the display on a monochrome RAPHAEL or RAPHAEL Color, on page 15-25. Removing and dismantling the display, on page 15-41 • Section 15.7.4, Removing RAPHAEL’s front cover, on page 15-24 • Section 15.7.3, Removing cable connectors and tubing, on page 15-21

15-42

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Replacing the display

3. Make sure that all cables are correctly fitted, by checking your installation against Figure 15-33, Cables in RAPHAEL XTC, on page 15-22. 4. Go to Section 13, Running version 3.* test software, on page 13-1, and perform the complete series of tests.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

15-43

15 Maintenance and replacement procedures

15-44

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Part 4: Appendixes

PN 61067/05

Appendix

A RS232 port configuration settings and messages A

A.1

Introduction This appendix deals with the RS232 port of the optional communication interface. (Figure A-1.)

RS232 port

Special port

Figure A-1. RS232 port on the communication interface

The appendix shows the configuration settings required by the port, and gives details of the messages that can be sent by the port to a patient monitoring system. However, details of the RS232 protocols are not discussed. For details of the RS232 protocols, the document External Communication Hamilton Ventilator RS232 Protocol from the HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Partner Web Site (http://www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site/), or HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]). For a general description of the RS232 and Special ports, see Section 6, The optional communication interface.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

A-1

A RS232 port configuration settings and messages

A.2

HAMILTON MEDICAL RS232 configuration settings The following table shows the low-level protocols used by the RS232 port. Parameter

Value

Baud rate

9600

Data bit

7

Stop bit

2

Parity

Even

Handshake

XON/XOFF

Table A-1. HAMILTON MEDICAL RS232 port configuration settings

A.3

Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems WARNING The table below shows the results of research carried out by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG. Please note: • Because companies can change equipment specifications at any time, HAMILTON MEDICAL AG can take no responsibility for the accuracy of the information included. • Because an increasing number of companies are confirming their equipment is compatible with the RAPHAEL ventilator, the table is not exhaustive at the time of publication.

RAPHAEL Description

LEONARDO

Marquette

Possible screen messages

General Alarm

General Alarm

ALARM (blinks red)

Spacelabs Visual indication

Audible indication

Alarmgrenzverstos VENT GENERAL ALARM

Beep every 3 to 10 s

High Pressure

High pressure Pressure limitation

High Pressure

ALARM (blinks red)

VENT (blinks) Alarm bell symbol blinks PEEP bell symbol blinks

Continuous tone

Fail to Cycle

Apnea Apnea backup activated

Apnea Fail to Cycle

ALARM (blinks red)

Alarmgrenzverstos

Beep every 3 to 10 s

Apnea

Apnea Apnea backup activated

Apnea Fail to Cycle

ALARM (blinks red)

Alarmgrenzverstos

Beep every 3 to 10 s

Disconnection Ventilator

Disconnection

Disconnection

ALARM (blinks red)

Alarmgrenzverstos

Beep every 3 to 10 s

Low Min Vol

Low minute volume

Exp. Minute Vol

ALARM (blinks red)

VENT (blinks) Alarm bell symbol blinks Vmin bell symbol blinks

Continuous tone

High Min Vol

High minute volume

Exp. Minute Vol

ALARM (blinks red)

VENT (blinks) Alarm bell symbol blinks Vmin bell symbol blinks

Continuous tone

Table A-2. Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems

A-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems

RAPHAEL

LEONARDO

Marquette

Spacelabs

High Rate

High frequency

High Rate

ALARM (blinks red)

VENT (blinks) Alarm bell symbol blinks Vmin bell symbol blinks

Continuous tone

Oxygen Concentration

Low oxygen High oxygen

Oxygen Concentration

ALARM (blinks red)

VENT (blinks) Alarm bell symbol blinks FiO2 bell symbol blinks

Continuous tone

Operator

Power loss during ventilation Battery power low Flow Sensor missing Turn Flow Sensor Check Flow Sensor Fan failure Exhalation obstructed High tidal volume ASV: Initialisation failed Replace clock battery IRV O2 calibration OK O2 calibration failed O2 calibration in progress Tightness test OK Tightness test failed Flow Sensor test OK Flow Sensor test failed Flow sensing deactivated O2 monitoring deactivated No O2 cell in use Main power loss O2 cell defective Disconnect patient Connect patient 100% O2 activated Tighten system Flow Sensor test in progress ASV: Unable to meet target ASV: Pressure limitation

Flowsensor /

ALARM (blinks red)

Alarmgrenzverstos

Beep every 3 to 10 s

Gas Supply

Oxygen and air supply Oxygen supply Air supply

Gas Supply

ALARM (blinks red)

VENT (blinks) Alarm bell symbol blinks PIP bell symbol blinks Alarmgrenzverstos VENT - GAS SUPPLY VENT - GENERAL ALARM

Continuous tone

No reaction. Previous values displayed.

CONNECT CABLE VENT OFF (blinks)

COMMUNICATION LINK LOST

Beep every 3 to 10 s

RAPHAEL switch off

Table A-2. Alarm messages with patient monitoring systems

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

A-3

A RS232 port configuration settings and messages

A-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

B

B

B.1

Historical and background notes Introduction This appendix gives additional information about both RAPHAEL and the service manual. This information is not required for testing, servicing or troubleshooting, but serves to: • Clarify the reasons for some of the tests • Offer reasons for some of the changes made between versions of this service manual

B.2 B.2.1

Notes on Test 4: Alarm monitor Introduction The following notes are about: • Test 4.4 Testing the power down status flag in Section 11 • Test 4.4 Testing the power down status flag in Section 12

B.2.2

Notes on the power down status flag The purpose of the power down status flag is to keep a record of the way in which RAPHAEL is powered down. When the correctly powers down RAPHAEL by using the switch at the back of the unit, RAPHAEL sets the power down status flag to on. (Figure B-2.)

Power down flag

RAPHAEL switched on. No error message necessary. RAPHAEL switched off

Normal ventilation started

On RAPHAEL not ventilating

Off RAPHAEL ventilating patient

RAPHAEL ventilating patient

Figure B-1. The power down flag in normal use

At switch on (not at the start of ventilation) RAPHAEL notes that the flag is set, and does not issue an alarm message. Later, at the start of ventilation, RAPHAEL resets the flag. However, if RAPHAEL is not correctly switched off, but, for example, is allowed to continue ventilation while running on the backup batteries until such time as the backup batteries fail, the power down status flag is not set. Later, at switch on, RAPHAEL issues the following warning message: Power loss during ventilation.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

B-1

B Historical and background notes

B.2.3

Notes on the test This test enables you to check that RAPHAEL can set and unset the power down status flag. You do this by: • Simulating switching off RAPHAEL during normal ventilation • Simulating starting ventilation When you enter this test, RAPHAEL simulates a situation in which a correctly switches off RAPHAEL during normal patient ventilation. This sets the : Power down status flag to on. (Figure B-2.)

Power down flag

Test 4: Alarm monitor entered. Power down automatically set to on.

activates Run status to simulate normal ventilation. Power down set to off.

On Off Simulation of normal mode with ventilation

Simulation of normal mode without ventilation

Simulation of normal mode with ventilation

Figure B-2. The Power down flag in test mode

Later, during the test, you simulate a situation in which RAPHAEL starts normal ventilation (you do this by activating : Run status). RAPHAEL must respond to this by resetting the † Power down status flag to off.

B.3

B.3.1

Notes on Test 6: Pressure Sensors and Test 7: Pressure Sensors Introduction The following notes are about: • Test 6.4 Checking and adjusting dPptm gain in Section 11 • Test 7.4 Checking and adjusting dPptm gain in Section 12

B.3.2

Notes on alternative test setup It is possible to use an alternative tubing setup for checking and adjusting dPptm gain, to the one shown in the main documentation. The advantage of the alternative shown here is that it offers a

B-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Notes on Test 14: Supply Voltages and Test 15: Supply Voltages

more stable pressure. The disadvantage is that it requires the use of a piece of equipment (flow meter) that is not supplied by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG. (Figure B-3.)

Flow meter

Flow regulator

Pressure controller Pressure gauge

Approximately 10 cm tube

1 liter Hospital gas supply

Figure B-3. Alternative tubing setup for checking and adjusting

dPptm gain

CAUTION Do not construct the tubing setup using a single 4-way connector, as this can result in different gas pressures at the pressure gauge and at RAPHAEL.

B.4

B.4.1

Notes on Test 14: Supply Voltages and Test 15: Supply Voltages Introduction The following notes are about: • Test 14.3 Checking the power supply in Section 11 • Test 15.3 Checking the power supply in Section 12.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

B-3

B Historical and background notes

B.4.2

General notes These checks are very limited in their scope. Only two things are checked: • The RAPHAEL battery test. This is the test that RAPHAEL performs every 20 minutes (with software version 1.x and 2.*) or 30 minutes (with software version 3.*) during normal operation. It takes one minute, during which time the voltage from the first stage of the power supply (nominally 28 V) drops to 21 V. RAPHAEL then tests the voltage at the point shown Figure 11-27 on page 11-48 and Figure 12-36 on page 12-58 to make sure that it is above 21 V. If it is, it shows that the battery is providing power. (RAPHAEL could drop the voltage from the first stage of the power supply to 0 V. However, if the battery was not in good condition, RAPHAEL would then fail to function. At 21 V, RAPHAEL can still function, even if the backup batteries are disconnected.) You start this test by activating : Mains off. But note that this is not a very good battery test. Even a battery in poor condition can maintain a voltage for a minute. To really test the battery condition, it is necessary to fully charge the battery (this takes six hours) and then fully discharge the battery while it is driving RAPHAEL (this should take about two hours if the battery is in good condition). Because of time constraints, this is clearly not possible. • The second thing that this test checks is the second part of the power supply. By checking the +5 V, +15 V and -15 V outputs at two different inputs (28 V with † Mains off, and the battery voltage with : Mains off) you can get a reasonable confirmation of the performance of the second part of the power supply.

B.4.3

Notes on step (1) on page 11-86 and step (1) on page 12-112 The following note is possibly confusing. However, it is correct: Note RAPHAELs with the older mainboard (PN 157250) display the voltage at the battery when the mains supply is attached. RAPHAELs with one of the newer mainboard (PN 157265 or PN 157373) display -.---V if the voltage is 28 V or more. If it is lower, they display the voltage. The reasons are as follows: • The older mainboard (PN 157250) displays numerics, and lets the decide whether the value shown is in range. • The newer mainboards (PN 157265 and PN 157373) are designed to display the string -.---V if the voltage is in range. The rational for this was that the precise voltage is not important, and to a large extent is not meaningful, as it depends on such things as the state of charge of the battery. It was therefore decided to hide this detail from the . However, at this point an inconsistency was introduced. While we give a range of 26.6 V to 30.0 V for the correct range with the older boards, the newer boards switch from the string -.---V to numerics at voltages below 28 V. This implicitly suggests a correct range of 28 V to 30 V. • Nevertheless, if the simply obeys the instructions, and checks the range or accepts the string -.---V, he will not make a mistake, even if he does not understand the underlying complications.

B-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Notes on Test 14: Supply Voltages and Test 15: Supply Voltages

B.4.4

Notes on step (3) on page 11-86 and step (3) on page 12-112 In versions of this manual before /02, we gave a range of 20 V to 26.5 V for the Mains off test. However, even with the batteries disconnected, it is not possible for the voltage to drop below 21 V (because, of course, the mains is not really switched off). We have now therefore changed the range to 22 V to 26.5 V. (The original figure of 20 V was taken because this is the lowest voltage at which RAPHAEL can function.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

B-5

B Historical and background notes

B-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

C Software history and features C

Note HAMILTON MEDICAL AG at any time for information about upgrading your RAPHAEL, or view the product catalog at the HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Partner Web Site (http://www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site/).

C.1

Software version 1.0 WARNING Do not use software version 1.0. the latest available software.

Part Number Date:

C.2

157251 From 16th November 1999.

Software version 1.1 Part Number Date: Changes:

157255 From 23rd February 2000. • Adaptive volume controller in (S)CMV+ and SIMV+ improved for use in pediatric patients (very low compliance). • Ppeak (peak pressure) indication continuously shown on screen above the pressure gauge. • Alarm information buffer introduced. • Technical fault #3 Code 22 used for extreme high pressure (Pvent High Fatal). • Low battery level alarm available in standby mode.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

C-1

C Software history and features

C.3

Software version 1.2 Part Number Date: Changes:

157262 From 3rd July 2000. • Second patient data window, displaying: • P mean • Insp Flow • f spont • Compensation for the altitude dependency of the flow measurement. • Compensation for the altitude dependency of the Flow Sensor checks. • Battery low alarm during mains power use.

C.4

Software version 2.0 Part Number Date: Changes:

157281 From 8th October 2001. • Extended numerical monitoring with: • • • • •

Rinsp Cstat AutoPEEP RCe spont Vexpmin

• Flow Sensor calibration improved. • Event log. • Dynamic automatic compensation of resistance in inspiratory limb of patient circuit. • Utilities window, containing tests and adjustments, accessible from start-up window. • Choice of ventilation modes that are displayed. • Control parameters changed: • Body weight range extended • VT range extended • PEEP/AP range extended • SIMV+ used as apnea backup mode. • Mainboard s communication interface as hardware option at purchase, or for fitting in field.

C-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Software version 2.0S

C.5

Software version 2.0S Part Number Date: Changes:

157282 From 8th October 2001. Everything from 2.0, plus the following: • ASV. • Trends. • Loops. • DuoPAP/APRV.

C.6

Software versions 2.01, 2.01S Part Number

• 157322 (Basic) • 157323 (Silver)

Date: Changes:

From September 2002. This version was introduced to solve two problems: • Incorrect operating hours problem corrected. • Disconnection alarm algorithm improved.

C.7

Software version 2.1 (Japan only) Part Number Date: Changes:

157312 From 24th August 2002. As version 2.01, except for the following control parameters: • Body weight range not extended. • VT range not extended. • PEEP/AP range not extended.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

C-3

C Software history and features

C.8

Software versions 2.2, 2.2S, 2.2C This version was not offered as a field upgrade. Part Number

• 157337 • 157336 (Silver) • 157335 (Color)

Date: Changes:

From 28th November 2002. As versions 2.01 and 2.01S, except for the following: • Color screen introduced on RAPHAEL Color only. Color test software slightly extended to test the new color screen. • Apnea time can be set from 15 to 60 seconds (all versions). • Expiratory trigger sensitivity (ETS) can be set from 5 to 70% (all versions). • Trigger setting range is now 1 to 10 l/min (all versions).

C.9

Software versions 2.21, 2.21S, 2.21C Note Use of software version 2.21x is not recommended. the latest available software.

Part Number

• 157353 • 157352 (Silver) • 157351 (Color)

Date: Changes:

C.10

From 16th December 2002. As versions 2.2, 2.2S and 2.2C, except for improvement to ASV graphics window, and some minor software improvements.

Software versions 2.22, 2.22S, 2.22C Note Use of software version 2.22x is not recommended. the latest available software.

Part Number

• 157357 • 157356 (Silver) • 157355 (Color)

Date: Changes:

C-4

From 20th May 2003. As versions 2.21, 2.21S and 2.21C, except for minor software improvements.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Software versions 2.22, 2.22S, 2.22C

C.11

Software versions 2.23, 2.23S, 2.23C Part Number

• 157362 • 157361 (Silver) • 157360 (Color)

Date: Changes:

C.12

From 5th August 2003. As versions 2.22, 2.22S and 2.22C, except for minor software improvements.

Software version 2.24CU (USA only) Part Number Date: Changes:

• 157369 (USA Color) From 24th October 2003. As version 2.23C, except for following changes for USA market: • Changes in automatic alarm calculation. • Disablement of ASV and APRV.

C.13

Software version 2.25CU (USA only) Part Number Date: Changes:

June 9, 2006

• 157382 (USA Color) From April 2004. As version 2.24CU, except DuoPAP+ mode enabled.

PN 61067/05

C-5

C Software history and features

C.14

Software versions 3.0, 3.0S, 3.0C, 3.0CU Part Numbers

• 157396 • 157397 (Silver) • 157398 (Color) • 157399 (USA Color)

Date: Changes:

From February 2005. As versions 2.2*, but with the following additional functionality: • Non-invasive ventilation — mask ventilation (not available in USA) • Tube-resistance compensation (not available in USA) • Last Settings — RAPHAEL memorizes its settings for a quick return to ventilation after switching off for X-rays, and so on • Bi-directional Apnea Backup — RAPHAEL goes back to the original mode if, while in the apnea backup mode, the patient starts to trigger breaths • New Languages: • Korean • Norwegian • New Controls: • Pramp — pressure ramp • Baseflow — you can increase the flow from the to-patient port to the from-patient port for easier patient breathing, although at the expense of using more gas • New Alarm Setting: f low — frequency low: this is in addition to the Apnea alarm • Timing parameters visible in the control window • Second Utilities window with: • • • •

Hardware options and versions Software options and versions Operating hours Time since power-on (a new feature)

• New Monitoring Values: • TE — expiratory time • Exp Flow — expiratory flow • Leak — displays any leak at the patient (often due to a badly-fitting cuff or mask) • Pressure limitation displayed in real time curve — pressure limitation, a value below that of Pmax, is displayed on screen in all modes • Alarm Loudness control • Extra features in the Test Software: • Test 1: You can now enter the unit's serial number. This serves to identify the Event Log print-out. • Test 2: You can test the loudspeaker loudness control.

C-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Software versions 2.22, 2.22S, 2.22C

C.15

Software versions 3.1, 3.1S, 3.1C, 3.1CU Part Numbers

• 157437 • 157438 (Silver) • 157439 (Color) • 157440 (USA Color)

Date: Changes:

From May 2006. As versions 3.0*, but with the following additional functionality: • Non-invasive ventilation — mask ventilation — now available in USA with PN 157440. • Tube-resistance compensation now available in USA with PN 157440.

C.16

Software versions 3.2CX, 3.2CXU Part Numbers

• 157441 (Color and XTC) • 157442 (USA Color and USA XTC)

Date: Changes:

June 9, 2006

From May 2006. As versions 3.1*. There is no additional functionality:

PN 61067/05

C-7

C Software history and features

C-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

D Upgrade routes and kits D

D.1

Introduction The chart included at the start of this section displays all current upgrade routes. At the time of publication of this manual, the software version 3.0* upgrade, offering major new functionality, replaces all earlier updates (updates offer minor software enhancements).

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

D-1

D Upgrade routes and kits

RAPHAEL Upgrade Routes June 2006 RAPHAEL Software version 1.x 1.0

1.1

1.2

Software version 2.* 2.0

Software version 3.*

2.01

2.21

2.22

2.23

3.1

3.0

Upgrade Route 1

RAPHAEL Silver Software version 2.*S 2.0S

Upgrade Route 2

Software version 3.*S

2.01S

2.21S

2.22S

2.23S

3.0S

3.1S

Upgrade Route 3

RAPHAEL Color

Software version 3.*C

Software version 2.*C 2.21C

2.22C

2.23C

3.0C

3.1C

Upgrade Route 4

RAPHAEL Japan Software version 2.* 2.1

2.23

RAPHAEL Silver Japan Software version 2.*S 2.23S

RAPHAEL Color Japan Software version 2.*C 2.23C

RAPHAEL Color US Software version 3.*CU

Software version 2.*CU 2.24CU 2.25CU

3.0CU

3.1CU

Upgrade Route 5

RAPHAEL XTC

Software version 3.*C 3.2CX

RAPHAEL XTC US Software version 3.*CU 3.2CXU

SN 1001

SN 2001

SN 3001

SN 6001 SN 7525 (June 2006)

Note: The vertical dotted lines relate RAPHAEL serial numbers to software originally fitted in the factory.

Figure D-1. Upgrade routes, June 2006

D-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Upgrade and language kits

Appendix D.2, Upgrade and language kits, immediately below, lists the kits available for each current upgrade route.

D.2

Upgrade and language kits Note To upgrade a RAPHAEL you require two kits: an upgrade kit and a language kit.

Upgrade kit

Language kit

Upgrade route 1

PN 157300 English

PN 157403

Description of contents

PN 157302 French

Upgrade kit PN 157403, in combination with one of the language kits, upgrades any basic RAPHAEL to basic RAPHAEL, software version 3.1.

PN 157301 German

The upgrade kit includes three PROMs, new labels, and installation guide PN 610873/06.

PN 157304 Italian

The language kit includes pre-operational check card and operator’s manual.

PN 157303 Spanish

Upgrade route 2

PN 157300 English

PN 157404

PN 157302 French

Upgrade kit PN 157404, in combination with one of the language kits, upgrades any basic RAPHAEL to RAPHAEL Silver, software version 3.1S.

PN 157301 German

The upgrade kit includes three PROMs, labels, Silver P&T-knob, and installation guide PN 610873/06.

PN 157304 Italian

The language kit includes pre-operational check card, ASV card, and operating manual.

PN 157303 Spanish

Upgrade route 3

PN 157300 English

PN 157405

PN 157302 French

Upgrade kit PN 157405, in combination with one of the language kits, upgrades any RAPHAEL Silver to RAPHAEL Silver, software version 3.1S.

PN 157301 German

The upgrade kit includes three PROMs, labels, and installation guide PN 610873/06.

PN 157304 Italian

The language kit includes pre-operational check card, ASV card, and operating manual.

PN 157303 Spanish

Upgrade route 4

PN 157300 English

PN 157406

PN 157302 French

Upgrade kit PN 157406, in combination with one of the language kits, upgrades any RAPHAEL Color to RAPHAEL Color, software version 3.1C.

PN 157301 German

The upgrade kit includes two PROMs, and installation guide PN 610930/02.

PN 157304 Italian

The language kit includes pre-operational check card, ASV card, and operating manual.

PN 157303 Spanish

Table D-1. Upgrade and language kits

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

D-3

Upgrade route 5

D Upgrade routes and kits

Upgrade kit PN 157407, in combination with language kits PN 157408, upgrades any RAPHAEL Color USA to RAPHAEL Color USA, software version 3.1CU. PN 157407

PN 157408 English (US)

The upgrade kit includes two PROMs and installation guide PN 610978/02. The language kit includes pre-operational check card and operating manual.

Table D-1. Upgrade and language kits

D-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

E Hardware and software versions and compatibility E

E.1

Mainboard versions and features There are four categories of mainboard, as shown in Table E-1. Mainboard feature

Mainboard versions Generation 1 PN 157250

Generation 2 PN 157265/01–03

PN 157265/04–09

Generation 3 PN 157373/00

Ambient state LED on mainboard by alarm ASIC.

No.

Yes.

Yes.

Yes.

Monochrome/color display functionality.

Monochrome only.

Monochrome only.

Monochrome and color.

Monochrome and color (including XTC).

Real-time clock.

No.

Yes.

Yes.

Yes.

Connection for optional communication interface board.

No.

Yes.

Yes.

Yes.

Requires cable PN 157388 to ensure the electronic switching signal to the two extended rinse flow valves is optimized.

Requires cable.

Requires cable.

Requires cable.

Does not require cable.

Three additional test pins for 3.3 V testing.

No.

No.

No.

Yes.

Potentiometer for expiratory valve adjustment.

No.

No.

No.

Yes.

Software-version-com patibility jumper.

No.

No.

No.

Yes.

WARNING This must be set correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

Table E-1. Mainboard features

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

E-1

E Hardware and software versions and compatibility

Software and mainboard compatibility

E.2

Mainboard versions DCU version

Software version

Table E-2 shows the relationship between mainboard versions and software versions in RAPHAEL.

1.0

1.0

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.2

2.0

2.0

2.0S

2.01

2.0

2.01S

2.1

2.1

(Japan)

2.2

2.2

2.21 2.22

PN 157250

PN 157265/01–03

PN 157265/04–09

PN 157373/00

This mainboard fitted in factory with software version 1.x.

This mainboard cannot function with software version 1.x.

This mainboard cannot function with software version 1.x.

This mainboard cannot function with software version 1.x.

This mainboard fitted in factory before SN 2000. Can also be found on RAPHAELs updated to 2.0(S) in the field.

This mainboard fitted in factory from SN 2000 onwards.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 2.0* in factory.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 2.* in factory.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.0*.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.0*.

This mainboard can be found on RAPHAELs updated to 2.01(S) in the field.

This mainboard fitted in factory from SN 2000 onwards.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 2.0* in factory.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 2.* in factory.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.0*.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.0*.

This mainboard fitted in factory before SN 2000.

This mainboard never fitted in factory with software version 2.1.

This mainboard fitted in factory with software version 2.1.

This mainboard never fitted in factory with software version 2.1.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.1.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.1.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.1.

This mainboard never fitted in factory with 2.2x software.

This mainboard never fitted in factory with 2.2x software.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 2.* in factory.

However, can be found on RAPHAELs updated to 2.2x in the field.

However, can be found on RAPHAELs updated to 2.2x in the field.

This mainboard fitted in factory. (Serial numbers start at 3001 for the 2.2, 2.2S, and 2.2C ventilators.)

This mainboard never fitted in factory with 2.2xS software.

This mainboard never fitted in factory with 2.2xS software.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 2.* in factory.

However, can be found on RAPHAELs updated to 2.2xS in the field.

However, can be found on RAPHAELs updated to 2.2xS in the field.

This mainboard fitted in factory. (Serial numbers start at 3001 for the 2.2, 2.2S, and 2.2C ventilators.)

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.2*.

2.23 2.2S 2.21S 2.22S

2.2

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.2*.

2.23S

Table E-2. Mainboards and software compatibility

E-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

2.2C

Mainboard versions DCU version

Software version

Mainboard versions and features

2.2C

PN 157250

PN 157265/01–03

2.21C

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

2.22C

Note

Note

2.23C

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

PN 157265/04–09

This mainboard fitted in factory with software version 2.2xC. (Serial numbers start at 3001 for the 2.2, 2.2S, and 2.2C ventilators.)

PN 157373/00

This mainboard never fitted with software version 2.* in factory. However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.2*.

Note You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

2.24CU

2.2C

2.25CU

2.3C

3.0

3.0

3.0S

3.0C

3.0C4a or 3.0C7a

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard fitted in factory with software version 2.2xC.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 2.* in factory.

Note

Note

Note

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 2.2*

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.*C in factory.

Note

Note

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

This mainboard fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

WARNING If fitting this mainboard as a replacement, you must be sure to set the jumpers correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

This mainboard fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

WARNING If fitting this mainboard as a replacement, you must be sure to set the jumpers correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

Table E-2. Mainboards and software compatibility

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

E-3

3.0CU

3.1

Mainboard versions DCU version

Software version

E Hardware and software versions and compatibility

3.0C4a or 3.0C7a

3.1

3.1S

3.1C

3.1C7a

PN 157250

PN 157265/01–03

PN 157265/04–09

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.*C in factory.

Note

Note

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.*C in factory.

Note

Note

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

PN 157373/00

This mainboard fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

WARNING If fitting this mainboard as a replacement, you must be sure to set the jumpers correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

This mainboard fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

WARNING If fitting this mainboard as a replacement, you must be sure to set the jumpers correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

This mainboard fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

WARNING If fitting this mainboard as a replacement, you must be sure to set the jumpers correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

Table E-2. Mainboards and software compatibility

E-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Software version

DCU version

Mainboard versions and features

3.1CU

3.1C7a

Mainboard versions

3.2CX

3.2CXU

3.2C7a

3.2C7a

PN 157250

PN 157265/01–03

PN 157265/04–09

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.*C in factory.

Note

Note

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.*C in factory.

Note

Note

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard cannot function with RAPHAEL Color.

This mainboard never fitted with software version 3.*C in factory.

Note

Note

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

You cannot update to RAPHAEL Color.

However, the mainboard can operate with software version 3.0*.

PN 157373/00

This mainboard fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

WARNING If fitting this mainboard as a replacement, you must be sure to set the jumpers correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

This mainboard fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

WARNING If fitting this mainboard as a replacement, you must be sure to set the jumpers correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

This mainboard fitted with software version 3.* in factory.

WARNING If fitting this mainboard as a replacement, you must be sure to set the jumpers correctly. See Appendix E.2.1, Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373, on page E-6.

Table E-2. Mainboards and software compatibility a. Depending on Display Graphics Unit (DCU graphics) board version. (The board is clearly embossed with DCU-L4 or DCU-L7.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

E-5

E Hardware and software versions and compatibility

E.2.1 E.2.1.1

Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157373 Introduction If you are fitting mainboard PN 157373 as a replacement, you must check that the software-version-compatibility jumper and loudspeaker-loudness jumper are set according to your software version. Failure to do this can result in (minor) misfunction. Loudspeaker-loudness jumper With software version 1.x or 2.* and mainboard PN 157373, the loudspeaker loudness is set using a jumper on the mainboard. With software version 3.* and mainboard PN 157373, the operator can set the loudspeaker loudness using a software feature. For this software feature to function correctly, the loudspeaker-loudness jumper on mainboard PN 157373 must be set to maximum volume. Software-version-compatibility jumper Software version 3.*, when running on mainboard PN 157373 enables RAPHAEL to: • Better deal with some difficult combinations of patient tubing, that, previously, could cause tubing oscillation • Respond more quickly to a patient’s inspiratory effort, resulting in reduced work of breathing (WOB) Note For these two new software version 3.* features to operate properly on mainboard PN 157373, the software version jumper must be set correctly for software version 3.*. Note For software version 1.x or 2.* to operate properly on mainboard PN 157373, the software-version jumper must be set correctly for software versions 1.x and 2.*. (Failure to do this can cause minor overpressure during inspiration.)

E-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Mainboard versions and features

E.2.1.2

Procedure 1. Determine your software version. The easiest way to do this is to look at the software PROM on the mainboard.

Figure E-1. Software PROM on mainboard (software version 2.23C

in this case) 2. Set the jumpers according to Table E-3: Software versions 1.x and 2.*

Software versions 3.* and higher

Loudspeaker-loudness jumper

Move the jumper to the required loudness, high, medium, or low. These positions are shown in Figure E-2 and Figure E-3.

Move the jumper to its high position. This position is shown in Figure E-2 and Figure E-3.

Software-version-comp atibility jumper

Move the jumper to the <3.x setting. The jumper is shown on Figure E-4.

Move the jumper to the >=3.x setting, as shown on Figure E-4.

Table E-3. Jumper settings on mainboard PN 157373

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

E-7

E Hardware and software versions and compatibility

Loudspeaker loudness jumper. (Shown here in high position.) High Buzzer Medium Low

Figure E-2. Loudspeaker-loudness jumper-settings on mainboard

PN 157373

Jumper position for low setting

Jumper position for medium setting

Jumper position for high setting

high

high

high

med

med

med

low

low

low

Figure E-3. Diagram of loudspeaker-loudness jumper settings on

mainboard PN 157373

E-8

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Mainboard versions and features

Softwareversioncompatibility jumper. (Shown here in position for software version 3.* and higher.)

Figure E-4. Software-version-compatibility jumper on mainboard

PN 157373 E.2.2 E.2.2.1

Setting the jumpers on mainboard PN 157265 Introduction If you are running software version 3.* or later on mainboard PN 157265, you must be sure that the loudspeaker-loudness jumper is set according to the software version. Failure to do this can result in (minor) misfunction. There is no software compatibility jumper.

E.2.2.2

Background information With software version 2.* and earlier, the loudspeaker loudness is set using a jumper on the mainboard. However, software version 3.* and later enables operators to set the loudspeaker loudness using software functions. For this software feature to function correctly, the loudspeaker-loudness jumper on the mainboard must be set to maximum volume.

E.2.2.3

Procedure 1. Determine your software version. The easiest way to do this is to look at the software PROM on the mainboard. (Figure E-1.)

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

E-9

E Hardware and software versions and compatibility

2. Set the jumpers according to Table E-3:

Loudspeaker-loudness jumper

Software versions 1.x and 2.*

Software versions 3.* and higher

Move the jumper to the required loudness, high (jumper removed), medium, or low. The positions are shown in Figure E-5 and Figure E-6.

Move the jumper to its high position. This is shown in Figure E-5 and Figure E-6.

Note You do this by removing the jumper completely.

Table E-4. Jumper settings on mainboard PN 157250 and PN 157265

Loudspeaker loudness jumper. (Shown here in high completely removed position.)

Buzzer Figure E-5. Loudspeaker-loudness jumper-settings on mainboards

PN 157250 and PN 157265

Jumper position for low setting

Jumper position for medium setting

medium

medium

medium

low

low

low

Jumper position for high setting

Figure E-6. Diagram of loudspeaker-loudness jumper settings on

mainboards PN 157250 and PN 157265

E.3

Display control unit and mainboard compatibility Display Control Unit (DCU) board L7 functions only on mainboard PN 157373 and later, and requires software version 3.0 or later. However, mainboard PN 157373 can function with any earlier version of DCU (for instance, L4).

E-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

F Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility F

F.1

Introduction This appendix brings together information found in other parts of the service manual concerning hardware components that have changed over time. The appendix then adds additional information, such as associated RAPHAEL serial numbers and the dates of changes. There are two major sections in this appendix: Appendix F.2, Component history chart, on page F-2 gives a historical overview of many changed parts. It displays photographs of the latest version of each part. Appendix F.3, Component change details, on page F-6 gives details about the items in the Appendix F.2 chart, and also some additional items. It displays photographs of all major versions of all parts. Note • The material in this section is not exhaustive: minor revisions are not shown. • In the Component history chart, on page E-2, the solid arrows represent time periods over which a particular part was kept in production; the dotted arrows represent time periods in which details of some revisions and dates are missing.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

F-1

F Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility

F.2

Component history chart Monochrome dc/ac board and display dc/ac board on page F-6

Date

RAPHAEL Serial Number

Description

11/1999

1001

Initial status. Mainboard s monochrome displays only. Requires cable PN 157388.

03/2000

1200

Communication interface added as an option.

02/2003

3200

Electro-magnetic shielding added to dpPtm sensor.

01/2004

4350

Color display added to RAPHAEL Color, and mainboard for color display added.

11/2004

Display on page F-7

PN 396150

PN 380020

Self-emptying water trap introduced, and supplied in addition to standard water traps.

02/2005

6001

Mainboard does not now requires cable PN 157388. Following added to mainboard: • Additional test pins for 3.3 V testing. • Potentiometer for expiratory valve adjustment. • Software-version compatibility jumper.

04/2005

6203

Filter added to dpPtm sensor.

05/2006

7507

Internal voltage of the dPptm pressure sensor printed circuit board changed from 10 V to 8 V.

Future

F-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Introduction

Color dc/ac board and display dc/ac board on page F-6

Display on page F-7

XTC dc/ac board and display dc/ac board on page F-6

Display on page F-7

Communication interface board on page F-6

PN 396193

PN 155360

PN 396150

PN 380021

PN 396193

June 9, 2006

PN 380023

PN 61067/05

F-3

F Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility

DCU (graphics) board and mainboard dpPtm sensor and PC board on page F-8

Date

RAPHAEL Serial Number

11/1999

1001

03/2000

1200

02/2003

3200

01/2004

4350

11/2004

DCU board on page F-7

Mainboard on page F-8

Description

Initial status. Mainboard s monochrome displays only. Requires cable PN 157388.

Sensor PN 399045 with PC board PN_157210

PN 396151 (DCU L3)

PN 157250

PN 157329 (DCU L4)

PN 157265

PN 157395 (DCU L7)

PN 157373

Sensor PN 399045 with PC board PN 157315 Color display added to RAPHAEL Color, and mainboard for color display added. Self-emptying water trap introduced, and supplied in addition to standard water traps.

02/2005

6001

Mainboard does not now requires cable PN 157388. Following added to mainboard: • Additional test pins for 3.3 V testing. • Potentiometer for expiratory valve adjustment. • Software-version compatibility jumper.

04/2005

6203

Electro-magnetic shielding added to dpPtm sensor. Later, filter also added.

Sensor PN 399045 with PC board PN 157409

05/2006

7507

Internal voltage of the dPptm pressure sensor printed circuit board changed from 10 V to 8 V.

Sensor PN 399045 with PC board PN 157412

Future

F-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Introduction

Water traps on page F-9

PN 279729 standard water trap

PN 157359 self-emptying water trap introduced, and supplied in addition to standard water traps.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

F-5

F Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility

F.3

Component change details Communication interface board See also: • Section 5.2.3, Communication interface board, on page 5-12 • Appendix A, RS232 port configuration settings and messages, on page A-1 PN 155360 Comment

The communication interface board was introduced as an option in March 2000.

Compatibility

There are no compatibility issues.

dc/ac board See also Section 5.2.4, dc/ac board, on page 5-12. Comment

dc/ac convertor board made by HITACHI. PN 396150

The board converts the 5 V dc input to approximately 17000 V ac, to power the light that illuminates the display.

Compatibility

Does not function with RAPHAEL Color and RAPHAEL XTC.

Fitted to all monochrome RAPHAELs. In other words, it is fitted to all RAPHAELs apart from RAPHAEL Color and RAPHAEL XTC. Comment PN 396167

dc/ac convertor board made by TDK. The board converts the 5 V dc input to approximately 17000 V ac, to power the light that illuminates the display.

Compatibility

Only functions with RAPHAEL Color.

Fitted to RAPHAEL Color only. Comment PN 396193

dc/ac convertor board made by Power Systems. The board converts the 5 V dc input to approximately 17000 V ac, to power the light that illuminates the display.

Compatibility

Only functions with RAPHAEL XTC.

Fitted to RAPHAEL XTC only.

F-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Introduction

DCU board See also Section 5.2.2, Display Control Unit (DCU) board, on page 5-11. PN 157329 (L4 version of board shown, L7 version very similar)

Comment

A standard display card (not a VGA card) that is preprogrammed with the graphics and text required for RAPHAEL to display. It is mounted on the mainboard. You can identify the type by the characters L4 or L7 etched into the board.

Compatibility

Compatible with all RAPHAELs except Color and XTC.

Note Do not confuse with the DCU graphics PROM, also mounted on the mainboard in RAPHAEL Color and XTC.

Compatibility

Compatible only with mainboard PN 157373 and later, and requires software version 3.0 or later.

Display PN 380020 RAPHAEL monochrome display Compatibility Comment

PN 380021 RAPHAEL Color display

The LCD that displays numerics and graphics for RAPHAEL operators and engineers. The screen can be LCD (liquid crystal display) monochrome, or LCD/TFT (thin film transistor) color. Three displays are available for RAPHAEL: • PN 380020 monochrome, fitted to RAPHAEL basic and RAPHAEL Silver.

PN 380023 RAPHAEL XTC display

Compatible only with RAPHAEL basic and RAPHAEL Silver.

Compatibility

Compatible only with RAPHAEL Color.

• PN 380021 color, fitted to RAPHAEL Color. • PN 380023 color, fitted to RAPHAEL XTC.

Compatibility

Compatible only with RAPHAEL XTC.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

F-7

F Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility

dpPtm sensor and PC board See also: • Section 5.4, Pressure sensors, on page 5-20. • Appendix E.3, Display control unit and mainboard compatibility, on page E-10 PN 399045 (PC board PN 157210) Comment

The sensor that measures the pressure difference between the front and rear chambers of the Flow Sensor.

PN 399045 (PC board PN 157315)

PN 399045 (PC board PN 157409)

The part number of the sensor is PN 399045 in all cases. The part number of the printed circuit board changed over time, as shown above the photographs. The three later types of sensor have metal shielding to mitigate interference from external electro-magnetic signals. (Part numbers for shielding components are displayed in schematic ZCH 157276 in Appendix J, Spare parts and schematics, on page J-1.)

Compatibility

All kinds of sensor are completely compatible. However, PN 157409 is not completely reliable.

PC boards PN 157409 and PN 157412 also have an electronic filter to mitigate external interference.

PN 399045 PC board (PN 157412)

In practice, all types work reliably, with the exception of PN 157409.

WARNING If you have PN 157409 replace it with the latest model.

Mainboard See also: • Section 5.2.1, Mainboard, on page 5-1. • Appendix E.1, Mainboard versions and features, on page E-1 • Appendix E.2, Software and mainboard compatibility, on page E-2 PN 157250 PN 157265/01–03 PN 157265/04–09 PN 157373/00-02

Comment

The main printed-circuit board in RAPHAEL. The DCU (Display Control Unit) board is mounted on it. The physical appearance of all mainboard types is almost identical. To identify a board, read the part number etched on it.

F-8

Compatibility

Compatibility is dependent on the software revision. This is dealt with fully in Appendix E.2, Software and mainboard compatibility, on page E-2.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Introduction

Water traps PN 279729 Standard water trap Comment

The standard, non-self-emptying water trap was introduced with the first RAPHAEL.

PN 157359 Self-emptying water trap

In November 2004, the self-emptying water trap was added to all RAPHAELs, but was not mounted in the factory. The self-emptying trap can therefore be mounted by the , if required.

Compatibility

There are no compatibility issues between the two kinds of water trap. However, the self-emptying kind must not be fitted to the oxygen inlet.

WARNING The self-emptying water trap must only be fitted to the air inlet, not to the oxygen inlet.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

F-9

F Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility

F-10

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

G

G

G.1

Maintenance tools and test equipment Overview You require the standard tools, ESD protection and test equipment detailed in the following sections to carry out the procedures explained in this manual.

G.2

Standard tools To perform all procedures on equipment from HAMILTON MEDICAL AG, you require a range of: • Screwdrivers (both flat and cross-head) • Metric spanners (wrenches) • Metric hexagonal (Allen) keys

G.3 G.3.1

Special tools IC extractor tool Although this manual does not document software changes, your job requires you to often change software. For this, you need an integrated-circuit extractor. You can purchase a suitable tool (PN 239040) from HAMILTON MEDICAL AG. (Figure G-1.)

Figure G-1. PN 239040 integrated circuit extractor

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

G-1

G Maintenance tools and test equipment

G.3.2

Potentiometer adjustment tool To adjust potentiometers while running test software, you can use a small screwdriver. However, the ideal tool is PN R70031. You can purchase this from HAMILTON MEDICAL AG. (Figure G-2.)

Figure G-2. PN R70031 tool for adjusting potentiometers

G.3.3

Grease for self-emptying water trap When performing yearly maintenance on the self-emptying water trap (Section 8.2.1.3, Special maintenance of the self-emptying water trap, on page 8-5) it is necessary to apply grease to some of the seals. You must use a grease that is recommended for medical air and oxygen applications. BERULUB OX 40 EP is one such example.

G.3.4

Inspiratory valve coil tool To clean the inspiratory valve, you must first remove the coil. Although you can do this without a special tool, PN 500293 makes the job a lot easier. (Figure G-3.)

Figure G-3. PN 500293 special tool for removing coil from

inspiratory valve G.3.5

Interface board PN 157269 and RS232 cable PN 157354 A major aid to troubleshooting is the analysis of the event log. This is described in Section 14.3, The role of the event troubleshooting, on page 14-3. To the event log, in order to send it to us for analysis, you require a computer, an interface board (often already fitted in RAPHAEL) and a suitable RS232 cable. This is explained in Test 17: Event Log, on page 13-119.

G-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

ESD protection

You can purchase the interface board by ordering the RAPHAEL interface board kit, PN 157287.

Communications interface board PN 157269

RS232 cable PN 157354

Figure G-4. Interface board and RS232 cable fitted in RAPHAEL

G.3.6

Metron EST tester Although not required by HAMILTON MEDICAL AG, some countries and some hospitals require that you perform the tests described in Section I, Automated electrical safety tests. For this, you require a Metron Safety Analyzer, or similar equipment.

Figure G-5. The Metron Safety Analyzer

G.4

ESD protection You must use equipment for preventing damage caused by electrostatic discharge (ESD) whenever you open a ventilator. Typically, this comprises: • ESD grounding cable and wrist band connected to the ventilator for use when you are working on the ventilator • EDS grounding cable and wrist band connected to the work surface for use when you are working on an electronic component from the ventilator

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

G-3

G Maintenance tools and test equipment

Figure G-6 shows a wrist band and connecting cable complete with the crocodile clip that must be attached to the ventilator or work surface.

Figure G-6. ESD band and cable

G.5

Equipment required for running test software You require the following equipment, as well as the tools listed above, to carry out the tests and calibrations included in this manual. Pictures and details of most of these items are in the Product Catalog. Item

G-4

Comment

Capillary tube with 20 ml/s flow.

PN 500280.

Orifice tube with 500 ml/s flow.

PN 500290.

Pressure connector.

PN 500300.

Microflow and pressure regulator (also referred to as a flow restrictor).

For example, PN 500335.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Equipment required for running test software

Item

Comment

Hand pump.

For example, PN 500330.

Suitable gauges are manufactured by THOMMEN (www.thommenag.ch) and WIKA (www.wika.com). One gauge from WIKA can be obtained from HAMILTON MEDICAL, PN 500058.

Pressure gauge with the following specifications: • Range: 0 to 2.5 mbar. Accuracy: ≤ 0.5%. • Range: 0 to 25 mbar. Accuracy: ≤ 0.5%. • Range: 0 to 400 mbar. Accuracy: ≤ 0.5%. • Range: 0 to 10 bar. Accuracy: ≤ 0.5%. T-piece, external pressure, 4-5 mm OD connector.

PN 279199.

Connector, cross, 4-5 mm OD.

PN 279785.

Tube, silicone, 4 mm ID, 7 mm OD. Order by the mm.

PN 7249057.

Test meter for measuring voltage.

Most volt meters are suitable.

Bacteria filter.

June 9, 2006

PN 279211.

PN 61067/05

G-5

G Maintenance tools and test equipment

Item

Comment

Proprietary locking paint or sealer. Alternatively, nail polish.

G.5.1

For locking potentiometer setting screws in place after adjustment.

Care of test equipment Some test equipment must itself be tested and recalibrated periodically. HAMILTON MEDICAL recommends the following schedule: Item

G-6

Schedule

Action

Pressure gauge

As recommended by the manufacturer, or at least once per year.

Send the pressure gauge back to the manufacturer for testing. You can usually find a convenient address by looking on the appropriate website (for example, www.thommenag.ch or www.wika.com).

Digital volt meter

As recommended by manufacturer.

As recommended by manufacturer.

20 ml/s capillary tube

Every year.

Send the tube back to HAMILTON MEDICAL for checking.

500 ml/s orifice tube

Every year.

Send the tube back to HAMILTON MEDICAL for checking.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

H

H

H.1

NIST and DISS connectors Overview World-wide, there are two major standards for medical oxygen and air connectors: NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) and DISS (Diameter Index Safety System).These standards apply both to the connections on the air and oxygen inlets of the equipment, and also to the connectors on the pipes that attach to them. HAMILTON MEDICAL uses DISS fittings by default. To obtain NIST fittings you must order the appropriate conversion kit. For more information, see the Product Catalog.

H.2

Photographs and part numbers

PN 155206

PN 500295

Figure H-1. NIST air connections

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

H-1

H NIST and DISS connectors

PN 155207

PN 500296

Figure H-2. NIST oxygen connections

PN 155190

PN 279592

Figure H-3. DISS air connections

H-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Photographs and part numbers

PN 155205

PN 279622

Figure H-4. DISS oxygen connections

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

H-3

H NIST and DISS connectors

H-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

I

Automated electrical safety tests

I

I.1

Introduction HAMILTON MEDICAL AG performs an electrical safety test, according to Norm EN 60601-1 and EN 60601-2, on all the ventilator and compressor units that it manufactures. It is a legal necessity that you too, after performing a repair or adjustment that includes replacing the power supply or removing any of the internal earth connectors, perform a similar test on your RAPHAEL. You can do this manually, as described in Section 10, Manual electrical safety tests, on page 10-1. In addition, you can do it automatically, as described here, if you have suitable equipment, such as the Metron Safety Analyzer. Because details of these automated electrical safety tests depend on the test equipment used, it is impossible to offer here any detailed descriptions. Nevertheless, this section provides a general outline for the parameters that you must test. Note The diagrams used in this section refer specifically to the Metron Safety Analyzer QA-90 Mk II. (Figure I-1.)

Figure I-1. The Metron Safety Analyzer

I.2

Considerations In this section, the following expressions are used: • • • •

June 9, 2006

“ground”, rather than “earth” “live” rather than “phase” “MD” Measurement Device “PE” Protective Earth

PN 61067/05

I-1

I Automated electrical safety tests

I.3

Ground wire resistance

Figure I-2. Ground wire resistance setup

In this test, a measurement is made of the resistance from the ground stud to the earth, as measured at the end of a power supply cord. Tolerance: ≤ 200 mΩ

I.4

Insulation resistance

Figure I-3. Insulation resistance setup

In this test, the neutral and live connectors in the unit’s power input socket are shorted together, and and the resistance measured between the ground stud and the shorted pair. Power is not applied to RAPHAEL during this test. CAUTION If the neutral and live connectors are not shorted together, damage can result to the test unit. Tolerance: ≥ 200 MΩ

I.5

Ground leakage current In this test, the leakage current is measured from the ground stud and the electrical ground (which are connected for the test) to an external ground.

I-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

I Automated electrical safety tests

I.5.1

Ground leakage current under normal conditions

Figure I-4. Ground leakage current (normal conditions) setup

In the normal part of this test, nothing is disconnected. Tolerance: ≤ 500 μA I.5.2

Ground leakage current with live open

Figure I-5. Ground leakage current (live open) setup

In the live open part of this test, the live connection is disconnected. Tolerance: ≤ 1000 μA I.5.3

Ground leakage current with live and neutral reversed, and live open The test is as Section I.5.2, Ground leakage current with live open, but with live and neutral reversed. Tolerance: ≤ 1000 μA

I.5.4

Ground leakage current with live and neutral reversed, and neutral open The test is as Section I.5.2, Ground leakage current with live open, but with live and neutral reversed. Tolerance: ≤ 500 μA

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

I-3

I Automated electrical safety tests

I.6

Chassis leakage current In this test the leakage current from ground to the unit’s chassis is measured.

I.6.1

Chassis leakage current under normal conditions

Figure I-6. Chassis leakage current (normal conditions) setup

In the normal part of this test, nothing is disconnected. Tolerance: ≤ 100 μA I.6.2

Chassis leakage current with live open

Figure I-7. Chassis leakage current (live open) setup

In the live open part of this test, the live connection is disconnected. Tolerance: ≤ 500 μA

I-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

I Automated electrical safety tests

I.6.3

Chassis leakage current with ground open

Figure I-8. Chassis leakage current (ground open) setup

In the ground open part of this test, the ground connection is disconnected. Tolerance: ≤ 500 μA I.6.4

Chassis leakage test with live and neutral reversed, and ground open Picture as in Section I.6.3, Chassis leakage current with ground open. In this part of this test, the ground connection is disconnected. Tolerance: ≤ 500 μA

I.6.5

Chassis leakage test under normal conditions, but with reversed connections Picture as in Section I.6.1, Chassis leakage current under normal conditions. Tolerance: ≤ 100 μA

I.6.6

Chassis leakage test with open ground and reversed connections Picture as in Section I.6.3, Chassis leakage current with ground open. Tolerance: ≤ 500 μA

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

I-5

I Automated electrical safety tests

I-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Appendix

J

J

Spare parts and schematics

J.1

Introduction In this manual, the expression “schematic” applies to a range of drawings and diagrams. A selection of these schematics is included in this section, as indicated by the Included in manual column in each table. However, only the most recent schematic of each type is normally present. If you require older schematics, you can order them from HAMILTON MEDICAL AG ([email protected]). Note Schematics included in this manual are reviewed together with the manual.

J.2

Spare parts This manual does not contain a list of spare parts and part numbers. This is because to find the number of a part, it is much easier use the schematics included in this appendix. The only significant spare parts not shown in the schematics are: • Backup battery kit PN 157313 (See Section 15.5, Changing the 12V batteries, on page 15-17) • Lithium clock battery PN 369096 (See Section 15.6, Changing the real-time lithium clock battery, on page 15-19) • Replacement wheels for the RAPHAEL trolley: • Wheel, complete with mounting, no brake: PN 281572 • Wheel, complete with mounting and brake: PN 281573 • “Service pneumatic block” (pneumatic block complete with flow restrictor “pills”, screws, and three connectors, but no valves) PN 157254 While all schematics included are current at the time of publication, they can quickly become out of date. In particular, it is possible that the part numbers of PROMs containing software are not the latest available. Please see the HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Partner Web Site (http://www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site/) for the latest information about upgrade part numbers.

J.3

List of schematics

J.3.1

Schematic ZCH157100 Revision 18, the current revision of this schematic, has only one sheet (“Blatt”). Sheets 2 and following of earlier revisions are now renamed with new part numbers.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

J-1

J Spare parts and schematics

Note • Different revisions of this schematic contain different numbers of sheets (“Blatt”s). • The content of any given sheet can change with the revision. In other words, Blatt X with Rev 08 is not necessarily an update of Blatt X with Rev 07, and could contain completely different information.

Schematic title and number

Description

“Pneumaticblock Raphael” on latest version. (Some earlier versions had no title.) ZCH157100 Blatt 1

“Raphael Front” on latest revision. (“Centurian Front” on earlier schematics) ZCH157100 Blatt 2

Schematic revision

Included in manual

A series of very detailed drawings showing the components mounted on the pneumatic block.

00 to 16

No

An exploded diagram showing all major components.

18 NOTE: 17 was not published.

Yes

A series of drawings showing the construction of the front of RAPHAEL, including the display and the press-and-turn knob.

00 to 16

No

00 to 16

No

00 to 16

No

03 to 16 (Revisions 00 to 02 do not exist.)

No

05 (Revisions 00 to 04 do not exist.)

No

A series of very detailed drawings showing the placement of all the components on the pneumatic block.

06

No

A moderately detailed, partly exploded drawing of all components in RAPHAEL.

07 to 16

No

05 (Revisions 00 to 04 do not exist.)

No

06 (Revisions later than 06 do not exist.)

No

Now replaced by ZCH157332/00 and ZCH157273/00. “Raphael Instrument” on latest revision. (“Centurian Instrument” on earlier schematics.)

Partly exploded detailed drawing of the main internal components of RAPHAEL.

ZCH157100 Blatt 3

Now replaced by ZCH157274/00 and ZCH157275/00.

“Wiring Diagram Raphael” on latest revision. (“Centurian Wiring Diagram” on earlier schematics.)

A diagram showing the cables between the mainboard, the power supply, and various ancillary items such as the fan.

ZCH157100 Blatt 4

Now replaced by WD616056/00.

Pneumatikblock Raphael

Drawing showing the positions of components on the pneumatic block.

ZCH157100 Blatt 5

Now included in ZCH157276/00. Pneumaticblock Raphael

Drawing showing the positions of components on the pneumatic block.

ZCH157100 Blatt 5

Now included in ZCH157276/00. Pneumaticblock Raphael (Service Manual) ZCH157100 Blatt 6

Raphael Instrument ZCH157100 Blatt 6

Now replaced by ZCH157100/18. Raphael Front (Service Manual) ZCH157100 Blatt 7

A series of drawings showing the construction of the front of RAPHAEL, including the display and the press-and-turn knob. Now replaced by new drawings.

J-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

List of schematics

Raphael Instrument ZCH157100 Blatt 8

Wiring Diagram Raphael (Service Manual) ZCH157100 Blatt 9 Pneumaticblock Raphael (Service Manual)

Two partly-exploded, detailed drawings showing most of the components in RAPHAEL.

05 (Revisions 00 to 04 do not exist.)

No

Now replaced by new drawings.

06 (Revisions later than 06 do not exist.)

No

Despite the title of the later revision, this is a diagram showing the wiring connections between the mainboard, the power supply, and various ancillary items such as the fan.Now replaced by new drawings.

05 (Revisions 00 to 04 do not exist.)

No

06 (Revisions later than 06 do not exist.)

No

Drawing showing the positions of some components on the pneumatic block. Now replaced by new drawings.

05 (No other revisions exist.)

No

Schematic revision

Included in manual

01

No

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

No

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

No

ZCH157100 Blatt 9

Pneumaticblock Raphael (Service Manual) ZCH157100 Blatt 10

J.3.2

Schematic ZCH157190 Schematic title and number

Patientenanschluss kpl. ZCH157190 Blatt 1 von 1

J.3.3

Description

A small diagram showing the construction of the to-patient port.

Schematic ZCH157271 Schematic title and number

Tankanschluss kpl. ZCH157271 Blatt 1 von 1

J.3.4

Description

A small diagram showing the construction of the connector between the tank and the pneumatic block.

Schematic ZCH157272 Schematic title and number

O2 Zellenhalter kpl. ZCH157272 Blatt 1 von 1

June 9, 2006

Description

A small diagram showing the construction of the oxygen cell holder.

PN 61067/05

J-3

J Spare parts and schematics

J.3.5

Schematic ZCH157273 Schematic title and number

Front kpl. ZCH157273 Blatt 1 von 1

Description

Three exploded, and one other diagram, showing the construction of the front and the display.

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

Yes

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

Yes

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

Yes

Schematic revision

Included in manual

02

Yes

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

Yes

Compare with ZCH157332, which shows the color version.

J.3.6

Schematic ZCH157274 Schematic title and number

Chassis kpl. ZCH157274 Blatt 1 von 1

J.3.7

Chassis kpl. Japan ZCH157275 Blatt 1 von 1

Pneumatikblock kpl. Japan ZCH157276 Blatt 1 von 1

A major drawing of the chassis and components. For Japan only.

Description

A series of drawings of the components on the pneumatic block.

Schematic ZCH157277 Schematic title and number

Anschlussleiste kpl. ZCH157277 Blatt 1 von 1

J-4

Description

Schematic ZCH157276 Schematic title and number

J.3.9

A major drawing of the chassis and components. For all countries except Japan.

Schematic ZCH157275 Schematic title and number

J.3.8

Description

Description

A small drawing showing details of the high-pressure air inlet and oxygen inlet.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

List of schematics

J.3.10

Schematic ZCH157332 Schematic title and number

Front color kpl. ZCH157277 Blatt 1 von 1

Description

Three exploded, and one other diagram, showing the construction of the front and the display.

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

Yes

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

Yes

Schematic revision

Included in manual

01

No

02

Yes

01

No

02

Yes

Compare with ZCH157273, which shows the non-color version and ZCH 157423, which shows the XTC version.

J.3.11

Schematic ZCH 157423 Schematic title and number

Front

J.3.12

Description

Exploded diagram of the front of RAPHAEL XTC.

Schematic ZCH614186 Schematic title and number

Blockdiagram Raphael ZCH614186 Blatt 1 von 2 Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael Sensor / Valves ZCH614186 Blatt 2 von 2

June 9, 2006

Description

A diagram giving an overview of all gas and electronic circuits in RAPHAEL.

A diagram giving an overview of all gas circuits in RAPHAEL. It is a subset of Blatt 1 above.

PN 61067/05

J-5

J Spare parts and schematics

J.3.13

Schematic ZCH614196 and BD614196 Schematic title and number

Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael uP System / Alarmmonitor ZCH614196 Blatt 1 von 4

Description

A diagram giving an overview the main microprocessor μP C167CR and ing components.

Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael uP System / Alarmmonitor

Schematic revision

Included in manual

01

No

02

Yes

01

No

02

Yes

01

No

02

Yes

00

No

01

No

02

Yes

Schematic revision

Included in manual

00

Yes

BD614196 Blatt 1 von 4 Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael Sensor / Valves ZCH614196 Blatt 2 von 4

A diagram showing the logic of the inputs and outputs to and from main microprocessor μP C167CR.

Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael Sensor / Valves BD614196 Blatt 2 von 4 Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael p-Source

A diagram showing the logic of the mainboard.

ZCH614196 Blatt 3 von 4 Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael p-Source Inspiration Valve Regulator BD614196 Blatt 3 von 4 Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael p-Source Exp Valve

A diagram showing the logic of the functioning of the expiratory valve.

ZCH614196 Blatt 4 von 4 Blockdiagram MAINBOARD Raphael p-Source Exp Valve BD614196 Blatt 4 von 4

J.3.14

Schematic WD616056 Schematic title and number

WIRING DIAGRAM RAPHAEL Basic, Silver, Color ZCH616056 Blatt 1

J-6

Description

Block wiring diagram, showing the electronic connections between the major components.

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Plot Abs.: Juerg Schudel 2005-01-11T16:06

Plot Abs.: Juerg Schudel 2005-01-11T16:01

Plot Abs.: Juerg Schudel 2005-01-11T15:05

Plot Abs.: Juerg Schudel 2005-01-11T15:01

Plot Abs.: Juerg Schudel 2005-01-11T15:46

Plot Abs.: Juerg Schudel 2005-01-11T15:32

Glossary This glossary offers definitions of expressions not included, or extended definitions of expressions briefly included, in the glossary of the RAPHAEL Operator’s Manual (PN 610994) and local-language equivalents.

Expression ambient state

Definition A state that RAPHAEL uses when it cannot function normally because of an internal fault. In this state, the patient is not actively ventilated in any way, but is allowed to inhale through the ambient valve, and to exhale through the expiratory valve if he or she is able to do so. A technical fault always causes RAPHAEL to go into the ambient state. RAPHAEL also uses the ambient state when displaying the system check screen.

ambient valve

A simple mechanical valve that enables air in the room to enter the patient breathing circuit in response to a patient’s efforts to inhale. It is built into the inspiratory valve. The ambient valve only opens in event of RAPHAEL failing to function, in which case we say that RAPHAEL is in ambient state.

ASIC

Application-specific integrated circuit. An integrated circuit containing logic, not a microprocessor containing microcode.

autozero valves

See Flow Sensor autozero valves and Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve.

backup buzzer alarm

Note Despite its name, the buzzer makes a high frequency sound. It functions independently of the loudspeaker. An alarm that sounds if the alarm from the loudspeaker is ignored for more than a minute. baseflow

A continuous and constant gas flow from the inspiratory outlet to the expiratory outlet.

communication interface

The optional RS232 port and Special (analog) port on the rear of the RAPHAEL. The RS232 port is used to communicate with peripherals such as a computer or monitor, and the Special port is used to activate the external nurse alarm, or synchronize a nebulizer or nitric oxide device.

compliance

A numeric value expressing the volume of gas that must be added to a container to raise the pressure of the gas in the container by one unit. For instance, if a container has a value of 5.5 ml/mbar, then 5.5 ml of gas must be added to the container to increase the pressure in the container by 1 mbar. High compliance indicates that pressure remains relatively constant, independent of gas flow into (or out of) a vessel.

display

The LCD screen used to show graphics and numerics on RAPHAEL. The screen can be LCD (liquid crystal display) monochrome, or LCD/TFT (thin film transistor) color.

Display Control Unit (DCU graphics) board

The Display Control Unit (DCU) board, or graphics board, is a standard display card (not a VGA card) that is preprogrammed with the graphics and text required for RAPHAEL to display. The windows you see on RAPHAEL’s display therefore comprise predefined graphical elements and text that are held in the PROM memory on the DCU board, and are called up, by number, over a serial interface, as required.

Display Control Unit graphics PROM (DCU graphics PROM)

A PROM positioned on the mainboard (not the DCU board) in RAPHAEL Color and RAPHAEL XTC. It contains text and graphical elements that are ed to the DCU board.

dPblende pressure sensor

A name sometimes used for the dPmixer pressure sensor.

June 9, 2006

(Text and graphics are ed only once: immediately after updating the DCU graphics PROM.)

PN 61067/05

Glossary-1

Glossary

Expression dPmixer

Definition Mixer differential pressure. A measurement of the pressure difference across the sintered disk flow restrictor positioned between the two mixer valves and the tank. RAPHAEL calculates the flow of gas to the tank from this value. Also called dPblende in some schematics.

dPmixer pressure sensor

The pressure sensor that measures the dPmixer value. This is mounted on the pneumatic block.

dPptm

Pneumatic tachometer differential pressure. A measurement of the pressure difference between the two chambers of the Flow Sensor. The measurement is performed by a pressure sensor inside the RAPHAEL, and is used to measure the flow of gas to and from the patient’s airway.

dPptm pressure sensor

The pressure sensor that measures the dPptm value. This is mounted on the pneumatic block.

event log

An area of memory used to record data about events such as ventilator alarms and setting changes. • With all RAPHAELs, the event log can be viewed in normal ventilating mode, in which case, only clinical events since power-up are displayed. • With RAPHAELs containing mainboard PN 157265 and later, and having software version 2.0 and later, the event log can be viewed in two further ways: • In configuration mode: in which case, all clinical events held in memory are displayed. • In Test 17, Event Log: in which case, all events held in memory (up to about 1000) are displayed, and can be ed to a computer and printed. • With RAPHAELs containing software version 3.* and later, when using the “Last Setup” option, all clinical events can be displayed in normal ventilating mode.

expiratory valve

A valve controlling pressure in the patient circuit, thereby enabling inspiration and expiration, and maintaining PEEP/AP, if set, during expiration. Its function is synchronized with that of the inspiratory valve.

extended rinse flow

A periodic flow pulse through the clear (ventilator side) and blue (patient side) tubes connecting the Flow Sensor to the front of RAPHAEL. The flow is from the tank to the Flow Sensor, and enables RAPHAEL to: • Test the connection of the Flow Sensor to the tubes • Test the tubes for kinks or blockages caused by moisture or mucous Unlike the normal rinse flow, the extended rinse flow is electronically controlled. See also rinse flow.

extended rinse flow valves

The two solenoid valves on the pneumatic block that control the extended rinse flow.

external interface

See communication interface.

external nurse alarm

See communication interface.

Flow Sensor

A device in the patient breathing circuit that measures gas pressure very near to (proximal to) the patient’s airway, and gas flow to and from the patient’s airway. Flow is calculated from the pressure difference between the front and rear chambers of the Flow Sensor. The pressure sensor that measures the flow is the dPptm sensor, and is mounted on the pneumatic block. Pressure at the Flow Sensor is measured by the Pprox sensor, also mounted on the pneumatic block.

(proximal Flow Sensor)

Flow Sensor autozero valves

Two valves, each controlling one side of the Flow Sensor circuit. During normal use they open periodically to bring to ambient the pressure in each side of the Flow Sensor circuit. This enables RAPHAEL to perform a zero calibration of the pressure sensor used to measure the differential pressure in the Flow Sensor (the dPptm reading). At the same time, RAPHAEL also performs a zero calibration of the Pprox pressure sensor used to measure pressure in the Flow Sensor. These calibrations are necessary because of drift associated with changes in temperature. See also Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve.

Glossary-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Glossary

Expression

Definition

inspiratory valve

A sophisticated electronically-governed valve that controls the pressure of the air/oxygen mixture flowing to the patient breathing circuit. Its function is synchronized with that of the expiratory valve.

interface board

An optional printed circuit board, that s the communication interface.

mainboard

The main printed circuit board in RAPHAEL. The two functions of the mainboard are: • To apply logic to the anaput signals from RAPHAEL’s pressure sensors, and thereby generate digital control signals for the solenoid valves, and inspiratory valve and expiratory valve • To manage the two alarm systems The mainboard is mounted at the top of the chassis of RAPHAEL.

mixer

The components that mix air and oxygen in RAPHAEL. These are the two mixer valves and the tank.

mixer valves

The two small solenoid valves mounted on the pneumatic block that control the flow of oxygen and air from the water traps into the tank. These valves determine the gas mixture, and control the gas pressure, in the tank.

nebulizer

An optional device in the patient circuit that vaporizes medical agents and adds them to the gas flowing to the patient.

nebulizer valve

One of the three larger solenoid valves (the other two are the air and oxygen mixer valves) on the pneumatic block that controls the flow of gas from the tank to the optional nebulizer. During normal ventilation, this valve is activated by RAPHAEL synchronously with the inspiratory and expiratory phases of the breath pattern, if the nebulization function is selected by the .

oxygen cell

A small, replaceable, plastic unit used by RAPHAEL to measure oxygen concentration. (Also known as an O2 cell.) The oxygen cell used by RAPHAEL functions on a Galvanic principle, reacting to the presence of oxygen and generating a voltage in proportion to the concentration of the oxygen. Oxygen cells must be replaced by the when RAPHAEL can no longer calibrate them. Typically, service life is about a year.

patient overpressure valve

An simple mechanical relief valve that opens the patient breathing circuit to the external atmosphere in the event of overpressure (caused, for instance, by the RAPHAEL malfunctioning).

pneumatic block

The composite plastic block containing most of the gas airways in RAPHAEL, and on which most of the pneumatic components — particularly pressure sensors and valves — are mounted. The pneumatic block is mounted at the rear of RAPHAEL’s chassis.

potential equalization terminal

A on RAPHAEL’s chassis (or cover, in some older models) that enables s to connect RAPHAEL to other hospital equipment, thereby ensuring no difference in electric potential between different pieces of equipment used on a patient. In some countries, use of the potential equalization terminal is a legal necessity. As specified by IEC 60601-1:1988.

power supply

The power supply comprises the following parts: • Voltage regulator • Two 12 V batteries • Battery charger

Pprox

Proximal pressure. A measurement of the pressure in the patient circuit at the Flow Sensor, as measured by the Pprox pressure sensor mounted on the pneumatic block.

Pprox pressure sensor

The pressure sensor that measures the pressure in the patient circuit at the Flow Sensor. It is positioned on the pneumatic block.

Ptank

Tank pressure. A measurement of the pressure in the tank. This must be in the range 850 to 1000 mbars.

Ptank pressure sensor

The pressure sensor that measures the tank pressure. It is positioned on the pneumatic block.

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Glossary-3

Glossary

Expression

Definition

Pvent

A measurement of the pressure in the patient circuit, as measured at the inspiratory valve outlet.

Pvent pressure sensor

The pressure sensor that measures the pressure in the patient circuit at the inspiratory valve outlet.

Pvent pressure sensor autozero valve

A valve that periodically opens to expose the Pprox pressure sensor to the pressure at the Pvent pressure sensor. (The pressure at the Pvent pressure sensor does not affected by this.) Because the Pprox pressure sensor is already compensated for zero-point drift, RAPHAEL can perform a zero-point-drift compensation on the Pvent pressure sensor by comparing it to the Pprox pressure sensor reading. This calibration is necessary because of drift associated with changes in temperature. See also Flow Sensor autozero valves.

rinse flow

A very small, continuous flow of gas through the blue (patient side) and clear (ventilator side) tubes connecting the Flow Sensor to the front . The flow is from the tank to the Flow Sensor, and greatly reduces the likelihood of moisture, mucous, bacteria or viruses from the patient’s expired gases from contaminating the pressure sensors on the pneumatic block. The flow is controlled by two “pill” restrictors mounted in the pneumatic block. See also extended rinse flow.

safety valve block

A metal block comprising the ambient valve and the patient overpressure valve. It is mounted on the pneumatic block.

sintered disk flow restrictor

The flow restrictor through which gas es on its way from the solenoid mixer valves to the tank. The purpose of the restrictor is to created a pressure difference from which RAPHAEL can measure the rate of flow of the gas. The flow restrictor is a large disc, and is physically positioned in the pneumatic block.

solenoid valves

The set of eight 12 V valves on the pneumatic block that control gas flows in RAPHAEL. The solenoid valves, unlike the inspiratory valve and expiratory valve, only have two states: open and closed.

tank

The metal vessel holding the air/oxygen mixture delivered by the mixer valves. The relatively large volume of the tank (2 liters) enables RAPHAEL to deliver a fairly steady flow of gas to the inspiratory valve.

tank overpressure valve

A simple mechanical relief valve that is activated by the pressure of the gas in the tank, if that pressure becomes too high. The valve is a part of the safety valve block that is mounted on the pneumatic block.

technical fault

An alarm condition in RAPHAEL in which RAPHAEL is not able to actively ventilate a patient. If a technical fault occurs, RAPHAEL goes into ambient state and: • Displays a TF (technical fault) message in the place of the normal screen display • Sounds the alarm buzzer, loudspeaker, or both

test software mode

A special mode in RAPHAEL in which engineers access test software that enables them to perform a range of checks and calibrations. You access test mode as shown in Section 13.6, Entering test software mode, on page 13-4.

WARNING When it is in test mode, the RAPHAEL cannot be used for ventilating patients.

Glossary-4

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Index A

batteries

AC power indicator LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3, 12-5, 13-4 Adjust dPptm gain calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58, 13-61 air air and oxygen inlet assemblies, photograph of . . . . . . . 2-9 air mixer valve test 11-53, 11-54, 12-41, 12-43, 13-43, 13-45 Air Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54, 12-43, 13-45 Air Valve test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56 connector, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 water trap, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 water trap, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-5

alarm Alarm LED test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19, 12-24, 13-27 Alarm light test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27, 12-32, 13-34 Alarm monitor test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24, 12-29, 13-31 Alarm silence test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28, 12-33, 13-35 Alarm Silence Time test . . . . . . . . . 11-18, 12-23, 13-26 buzzer, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 checking tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20, 12-25 conditions test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24, 12-29, 13-31 during test software mode . . . 11-4, 11-5, 12-6, 13-5, 13-6 high, medium and low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 LED check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27, 12-32, 13-34 LED test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19, 12-24, 13-27 LED, illustration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18, 12-23, 13-26 messages from communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 remote, nurse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 silence key illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18, 12-23, 13-26 understanding types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

backup, battery/mains switchover test 11-85, 12-111, 13-113 backup, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-17 backup, checking age of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1 backup, checking charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 backup, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 backup, determining date of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 backup, determining type of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 backup, part number of kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 backup, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 backup, position of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 backup, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17, 15-18 backup, replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1 backup, testing operation . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32, 12-38, 13-40 backup, type BB, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 backup, type MICROLYTE Plus, photograph of . . . . . . . .9-2 backup, type YUASA, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Battery operation test . . . . . . . . . . 11-32, 12-38, 13-40 of real-time clock, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-19 of real-time clock, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15, 13-15 of real-time clock, part number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 Bessel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

boards communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 communication interface, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 dc/ac converter board, position of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 dc/ac converter, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 DCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 DCU, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Display Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 mainboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-5 mainboard, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 mainboard, diagram of logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 mainboard, input and output connectors, photograph of 5-11 mainboard, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 mainboard, test pins on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-6 power supply, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 power supply, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

alarm monitor ASIC details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 general description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 alcohol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-12 warning e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12 alcoholic liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12, 15-14

altitude setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6, 12-7, 13-7 checking and adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10, 12-11, 13-11

buzzer Buzzer test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18, 12-23, 13-26 function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 position of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17, 12-22

ambient state Ambient Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-75, 12-96, 13-100 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-97, 13-101, E-1 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-75, 12-96, 13-100

ambient valve action demonstrated in photograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 cutaway photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 gas flow through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-75, 12-96, 13-100

C cable connectors removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3

cable PN 157388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 cabling, photograph of

ASIC details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 general description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

ASV mode test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

autozero valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

capillary tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-4 Caution, definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 chassis

Autozero test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37, 12-56, 13-59 Autozero Valves Test . . . . . . . . . . 11-38, 12-49, 13-52 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38, 12-49, 13-52

autozeroing

components mounted on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 schematic of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4 Check Serial Interface test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-105, 13-109

dPptm pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46, 12-56, 13-59 Pprox pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46, 12-56, 13-59 Pvent pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46, 12-56, 13-59

check valves

B

photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

backup batteries See batteries backup battery kit, part number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 backup buzzer See buzzer backup reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 bacteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 bacteria filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

June 9, 2006

monochrome displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-21 RAPHAEL Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22 RAPHAEL XTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22 Calibration + Scaling Values test . . . . . . . . . . . 11-82, 12-106

cleaning expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-14 inspiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3 self-emptying water traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 water trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 clock battery, part number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

coil in inspiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10

PN 61067/05

Index-1

Index

communication interface

event log

alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, E-1 board, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 board, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

compatibility of DCU and mainboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 of software and mainboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2 condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

configuration data, checking and setting . . . . . . . 11-9, 12-10, 13-10 construction of RAPHAEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 contrast, adjusting . . . . . . . . . 11-12, 11-15, 12-16, 12-20, 13-16, 13-20

D Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Date and Time field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13, 13-14 dc/ac converter board cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 position of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 DCU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 compatibility of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 introduction to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15, 15-19 diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1

display adjusting contrast of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15, 12-20, 13-20 adjustment of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12, 12-16, 13-16 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 contrast potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 display keyboard test . . . . . . . . . 11-21, 12-26, 13-28 display keyboard, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Display Test . . . . . . . 11-13, 11-13, 12-17, 13-17, 13-18 Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12, 12-16, 13-16 testing . . . 11-12, 11-13, 12-16, 12-17, 13-16, 13-17, 13-18 DISS connectors, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

dPblende pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-9 dPmixer

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-121, 13-123 Event Log test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-117, 13-119 transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-122, 13-124 exhaust port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-18, 4-17 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-17 exiting test software mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5, 12-6, 13-6

Exp. Gain potentiometer 11-63, 12-78, 12-83, 12-84, 13-81, 13-86, 13-87 expiratory signal, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-103, 13-107 expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14 detailed photograph of external parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 details of gas flow through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 exhaust port of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 3-18, 4-17 expiratory valve test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58, 12-72, 13-75 from-patient port of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 3-18, 4-17 membrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 3-18, 4-17 positioning coil of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 3-18, 4-17 potentiometer for adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 schematic of logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-6 testing 11-29, 11-62, 12-34, 12-77, 12-81, 13-36, 13-80, 13-84 testing and calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62, 12-81, 13-84 explosion, risk of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11

Ext. Autozero and Nebul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-35, 12-47, 13-50 Ext. Autozero and Nebul. test . . . . . . . . . . . .11-35, 12-47, 13-50 extended rinse flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Extended Autozero Valves Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40 Extended Rinse Flow Valves Test 11-40, 12-51, 13-54 testing valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40, 12-51, 13-54 valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23, 4-4 valves test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35, 12-47, 13-50 external nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

external tightness External Tightness Test . . . . . . . 11-73, 12-94, 13-98 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73, 12-94, 13-98

F fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Fan error tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33, 12-39, 13-41 filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 filter, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 logic for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33, 12-39, 13-41

pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 pressure sensor, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 3-7

dPptm autozeroing pressure sensor . . . . . . . . 11-46, 12-56, 13-59 checking and adjusting gain . . . . . . . . 11-47, 12-58, 13-61 gain adjustment of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58, 13-61 gain potentiometer 11-48, 12-60, 12-61, 12-65, 13-63, 13-64 pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 pressure sensor, autozeroing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37 pressure sensor, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42 pressure sensor, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

dPptm pressure sensor checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68, 13-71

drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1

E EEPROM EEPROM Scaling Data test . . . . . . . . . . . 12-107, 13-111 EEPROM Values test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-106, 13-110 serial, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

electronics overview of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 schematic of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-5

EPROM 27C4002 #1, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 27C4002 #2, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 equipment for testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6 error signals, checking . . . . . . 11-25, 11-34, 12-30, 12-40, 13-32, 13-42

filter bacteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

Flow Exp check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-83, 12-108, 13-111 Flow Insp check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-83, 12-108, 13-111 flow measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10, 12-11, 13-11 flow restrictor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 autozero valves test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35, 12-47, 13-50 calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70, 13-73 calibration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70, 13-73 checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-43, 12-68 connectors for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 in position on patient, photograph of . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 4-14 operation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 photograph of associated components . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 photograph of autozero valves for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 position in patient tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 flow-controlled ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 1-3

from-patient port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-18, 4-17 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-17

ESD protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 E-Valve test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62, 12-78, 12-82, 13-81, 13-85

Index-2

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Index

front

13-89 inspiratory valve test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58, 12-72, 13-75 I-Valve and E-Valve test . . . . . . . . 11-58, 12-72, 13-75 I-Valve controller (dynamic) test . . . . . . . . . . 11-65 I-Valve zero test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59, 12-73, 13-76 O-ring for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 overview of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 plunger in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 plunger pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 reassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34, 13-36 zero flow calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59, 12-73, 13-76 zero pressure calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-73 inspiratory/expiratory signal, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-103, 13-107

components mounted on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Flow Sensor connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Front test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17, 12-22, 13-25 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 nebulizer connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 schematic of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4, J-5

G GALILEO components managing principle gas flow . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

gas circuits

interface

schematic of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-5

gas flows

Interface test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102, 13-106 RS232, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Special, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 internal leakage test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72, 12-93, 13-96

diagram of all gas flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 diagram of flow in patient circuit and patient airway . . 3-14 diagram of flow to tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 diagram of major flows from tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 diagram of minor flows from tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 diagram of principle route through RAPHAEL . . . . . . . . . 3-3 for rinse flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 from patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 from tank, components managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 in patient airway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 in patient circuit and airway, components managing . . 3-13 minor, from tank, components managing . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 principle route of through RAPHAEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 to inspiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 to nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 to O2 cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 to patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 to tank overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 to tank, components managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Internal Pneumatic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68, 12-89, 13-92

J jumper for loudspeaker loudness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 for software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1, E-6 setting on mainboard PN 157265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9 setting on mainboard PN 257373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

K keyboard on display , photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 on front , photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21, 12-26, 13-28

gas inlet assembly, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 nipple, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 schematic of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4 gas mixer system test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53, 12-41, 13-43

gas water traps details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 gauge, pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

graphics controller board See DCU board

H hand pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

I

L Lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30, 12-36, 13-38 LCD See display leakage test external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73, 12-94, 13-98 internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72, 12-93, 13-96 LED 1 on main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4, 12-5, 13-5

LEDs, testing all on front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30, 12-36, 13-38 LEONARDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 lithium clock battery, part number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-105, 13-109 loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 loudness jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6, E-7 position of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 sound level of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17

I:E timing signals I/E Signal test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-103, 13-107 sending with Special port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 inlet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

inspiratory valve cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 cleaning seal and plunger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 controller test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65, 12-86, 13-89 cutaway photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 gas flow to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 inspiratory valve controller (dynamic) test 11-65, 12-86,

lubrication warning e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11

M mainboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-5 compatibility of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2, E-10 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 logic, diagram of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 PN 157265, setting jumpers on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9 PN 257373, setting jumpers on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 schematic of logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-6 software supplied with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1, F-1 versions and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 voltage test on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Mains off test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-86, 12-112, 13-114

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, I-1

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Index-3

Index

Marquette patient monitors

oxygen

alarm messages with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 membrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

and air inlet assemblies, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 calibrating full-scale gain measurement 11-80, 12-100, 13-104 calibrating zero measurement . . . . . . 11-79, 12-99, 13-103 check valve, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 checking measurement of . . . . . . . . 11-81, 12-101, 13-105 connector, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 measurement test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-77, 12-98, 13-102 offset/gain check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83, 12-108, 13-111 solenoid valve test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53, 12-41, 13-43 water trap, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 water trap, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 3-5

Memory test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6, 12-7, 13-7 messages from communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 microflow regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 microprocessor C167CR details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 diagram of logical inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 general description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 schematic of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-6 schematic of logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-6 mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Mixer and Tank Pressure test . . . . 11-53, 12-41, 13-43 Mixer test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68, 12-89, 13-92 valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 valves test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54, 12-43, 13-45 valves, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 μP Startup Config, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

multi-meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

oxygen calibration tube position of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 15-5 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

oxygen cell storage life of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 working life of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 oxygen mixer valve test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-54, 12-43, 13-45

P P&T-knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

N

testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23, 12-28, 13-30

nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 connector for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 gas flow to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Nebulizer LED test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19, 12-24, 13-27 nebulizer test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19, 12-24, 13-27 Nebulizer valve test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44, 12-54, 13-57 nebulizer valve test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35, 12-47, 13-50 valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 valve, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 valve, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44, 12-54, 13-57 Nebulizer test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54, 13-57

P12 Testconnector 3, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 P8 Debugconnector, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 part numbers list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 patient gas flow from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 gas flow to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

patient airway components managing gas flows in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 gas flow in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 patient circuit, components managing gas flow in . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

NIST connectors, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 nitric oxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Note, definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 nurse alarm, remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Nurse Call test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-104, 13-108

patient outlet, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 patient overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 4-10

O

pin locations for RS232 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 plunger

details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68, 12-89, 13-92 Perform Autozero calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46

pill restrictors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 testing . . . . . . . . . 11-70, 11-71, 12-91, 12-92, 13-94, 13-95

O2 O2 Cell Measurement test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-77 O2 gain check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83, 12-108, 13-111 O2 offset check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83, 12-108, 13-111 O2 offset/gain check . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83, 12-108, 13-111 O2 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55, 12-44, 13-46 O2 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54, 12-43, 13-45 O2 cell calibration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-77, 12-98, 13-102 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 gas flow to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 holder and O-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 input to main board from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 O2 Cell Measurement test . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98, 13-102 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 on/off switch, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

in inspiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 pneumatic block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-5 components mounted on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 diagram of pressure sensors on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 partly assembled, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 photograph of gas flow through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 photograph of pressure sensors on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 schematic of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2, J-4 service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-1 pneumatic tubes, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

pneumatics outstanding points of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 overview of circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

operating hours

port

checking and setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11, 12-12, 13-13 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6, 12-7, 13-7 orifice tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

positioning coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 4-17 potentiometer

orifice, variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 O-ring black, for inspiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 for oxygen cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 white, for inspiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 overpressure protection for rinse flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

overpressure valve for tank and patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 for tank, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56, 12-45, 13-48

Index-4

Special, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1, 6-4

for adjusting dPptm gain 12-60, 12-61, 12-65, 13-63, 13-64 for adjusting Pvent gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 for dPptm gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48, 12-60, 13-63 for Pvent gain . . . . . . . . 11-52, 12-64, 12-65, 13-67, 13-68 for screen contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15, 12-20, 13-20 for Vzero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74, 12-75, 13-77, 13-78 V‘zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60, 12-73, 13-77 power down status flag test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-26, 12-31, 13-33

Power down test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 power supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

Index

power supply

rinse flows

board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-6 board, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6, 11-86, 12-112, 13-114 indicator LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3, 12-5, 13-4 Power Supply Status, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 status, logic for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 gas supply for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 overpressure protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 testing . . . . . . . . 11-70, 11-71, 12-91, 12-92, 13-94, 13-95

RS232 port

Pprox

alarm messages with patient monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-105, 13-109 low-level data transmission protocol for . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 pin configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-119, 13-121 pin locations and assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 preparing computer to receive data from . . 12-119, 13-121 sending data to a computer from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

autozeroing pressure sensor . . . . . . . . 11-46, 12-56, 13-59 gain, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-67, 13-70 Pprox gain adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-67, 13-70 Pprox gain check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83, 12-108, 13-111 Pprox zoom gain check . . . . . . . . 11-83, 12-108, 13-111 pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 pressure sensor, autozeroing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37 pressure sensor, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42 pressure sensor, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Pprox pressure sensor

S

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-68, 13-71

press-and-turn knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23, 12-28, 13-30

pressure connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

pressure sensors details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 diagram of positions on pneumatic block . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 dPptm sensor, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 overview of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 positions of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Pressure Sensors test . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45, 12-55, 13-58 processing signals from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 See also dPptm, Pprox, Ptank, Pvent and dPmixer pressure-controlled ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 1-3

preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, I-1

S1 microswitch, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 safety valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 construction of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 4-9 scaling values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8, 12-9, 13-9 checking and setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8, 12-9, 13-9 schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

screen adjusting contrast of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15, 12-20, 13-20 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12, 12-16, 13-16 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 contrast potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 potentiometer for adjusting contrast of . . . . . . 12-20, 13-20 Screen Contrast test and adjustment 11-15, 12-20, 13-20 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13, 12-17, 13-17, 13-18

self-emptying water trap cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

sensor

principle gas flow components ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

processing of sensor signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 p-source / Exp Valve, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Ptank pressure sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 pump, hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 Pvent autozero valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 autozeroing pressure sensor . . . . . . . . 11-46, 12-56, 13-59 gain potentiometer . . . . 11-52, 12-64, 12-65, 13-67, 13-68 gain, checking and adjusting . . . . . . . . 11-51, 12-63, 13-66 pressure sensor autozero valves test . . . 11-35, 12-47, 13-50 pressure sensor, autozeroing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37 pressure sensor, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Pvent Autozero Valves Test . . . . . 11-42, 12-53, 13-56 Pvent Zero Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-62, 13-65 zero calibration, checking . . . . . . . . . . 11-50, 12-62, 13-65

Sensor Analysis test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68, 13-71 Sensor Validation test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42 signals from, processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9, 5-10 Sensor Analysis test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68, 13-71

service pneumatic block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 sintered disk flow restrictor gas flow through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7, 3-8

software and mainboard versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1, F-1 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2 jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 version history of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

software version compatibility jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

solenoid valves details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 overview of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 14-12

R RAM

Spacelabs patient monitors

HM62128, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 HM62512, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 HY628400, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 with clock DS1746P, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

alarm messages with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 Special port

RAPHAEL definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 overview of function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 real-time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13, 12-15, 13-14, 13-15, E-1 checking battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15, 13-15 removing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20 remote nurse alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 sending with Special port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 electrical specifications of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 pin locations and assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Stop Watchdog test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31, 12-37, 13-39

Supply Voltages test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-85, 12-111, 13-113 SW Status, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 switch S1 on main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4

replacement wheel, part number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 reservoir details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 ring on expiratory valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

June 9, 2006

PN 61067/05

Index-5

Index

T

valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

tank details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 gas flow from, components managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 gas flow to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 minor gas flows from, components managing . . . . . . . 3-21 overpressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 overpressure valve, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 overpressure valve, diagram of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 overpressure valve, gas flow to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 overpressure valve, testing . . . . . . . . . . 11-56, 12-45, 13-48 overview of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 3-8, 4-7 photograph of mounting point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 pressure test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53, 12-41, 13-43 technical faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 definitions of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6 test meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

test pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9, E-1

ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 ambient, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 autozero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 check, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 expiratory, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 extended rinse flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 inspiratory, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 nebulizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Pvent autozero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 tank overpressure, details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Valves off test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-29, 12-34, 13-36

ventilation flow controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 pressure controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 version history of software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

virus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 volt meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 voltage, checking 9-1, 9-6, 11-85, 11-86, 12-111, 12-112, 13-113, 13-114 Vzero potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74, 12-75, 13-77, 13-78

photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 5-9

test software mode alarms during . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4, 12-6, 13-5 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3, 12-4, 13-4 exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5, 12-6, 13-6 how to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4, 12-6, 13-5

test software tests

W Warning, definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31, 12-37, 13-39

Alarm monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24, 12-29, 13-31 Calibration + Scaling Values . . . . . . . 11-82, 12-106 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12, 12-16, 13-16 EEPROM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-106, 13-110 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-117, 13-119 Ext. Autozero and Nebul. . . . . . . . 11-35, 12-47, 13-50 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17, 12-22, 13-25 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102, 13-106 I-Valve and E-Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58, 12-72, 13-75 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6, 12-7, 13-7 Mixer and Tank Pressure . . . . . . . . 11-53, 12-41, 13-43 O2 Cell Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 11-77, 12-98, 13-102 Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45, 12-55, 13-58 Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-85, 12-111, 13-113 Tightness and Overpressure . . . . . 11-67, 12-88, 13-91 Trend Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-124, 13-126 Testconnector 3, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

water traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 assemblies, photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 details of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 8-4, 8-5 photograph of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-5, 4-2, 4-3, 8-4, 8-5 self-emptying, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 wheel, replacement, part number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-6

Tightness and Overpressure test . . . . . . . . . 11-67, 12-88, 13-91 tightness test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37 external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73, 12-94, 13-98 internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72, 12-93, 13-96

tools required special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1 to-patient port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

T-piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 trend data transmitting trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-125, 13-127 Trend Data test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-124, 13-126 Trigger LED test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19, 12-24, 13-27

trigger test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19, 12-24, 13-27 troubleshooting general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 technical faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

typographic conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

U UART TL16C550B, function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 interface test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17, 12-22

V V’zero potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-60, 12-73, 13-77

Index-6

RAPHAEL Service Manual Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests

RAPHAEL version 1.x test software report

Technician’s name (please print):

..................................................

Report number: Date: D D

M M

Y

RAPHAEL Serial Number: RAPHAEL year of production: RAPHAEL part number: RAPHAEL software and DCU versions (shown briefly at startup):

. Yes

No

Oxygen cell exchanged:

ˆ

ˆ

Fan filter cleaned/exchanged:

ˆ

ˆ

Inlet filters exchanged:

ˆ

ˆ

12 V Batteries exchanged:

ˆ

ˆ

Voltage check OK:

ˆ

ˆ

All tests ed:

ˆ

Operating hours:

.........

Test 2

All tests and screen adjustments OK:

ˆ

Test 3

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 4

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 5

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 6

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 7

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 8

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 9

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 10

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 11

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 1

Test 12

This test not performed.

Test 13

This test not performed.

Test 14

All tests ed:

Test 15

This test not performed.

Operating Manual tests and calibrations ed:

Signature of technician:

ˆ ˆ

....................................................

/

.

Y

Y

Y

RAPHAEL version 2.* and 3.* test software report

Technician’s name (please print):

..................................................

Report number: Date: D D

M M

Y

Y

RAPHAEL Serial Number: RAPHAEL year of production: RAPHAEL part number: RAPHAEL software and DCU versions (shown briefly at startup):

/

. Yes

No

Oxygen cell exchanged:

ˆ

ˆ

Fan filter cleaned/exchanged:

ˆ

ˆ

Inlet filters exchanged:

ˆ

ˆ

12 V Batteries exchanged:

ˆ

ˆ

Voltage check OK:

ˆ

ˆ

All tests ed:

ˆ

Operating hours:

.........

Test 2

All tests and screen adjustments OK:

ˆ

Test 3

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 4

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 5

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 6

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 7

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 8

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 9

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 10

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 11

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 12

All tests ed:

ˆ

Test 13

This test not performed.

Test 14

This test not performed.

Test 15

All tests ed:

Test 1

ˆ

Test 16

This test not performed.

Test 17

All tests ed (optional):

ˆ

Test 18

All tests ed (optional):

ˆ

Operating Manual tests and calibrations ed:

Signature of technician:

ˆ

....................................................

.

Y

Y

Document History Revision 02

RAPHAEL Service Manual, and Addition. December 4th 2002.

Revision 03

RAPHAEL Service Manual, Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests. July 2004. • All corrections from Korex added. • Inlet valve leakage test added in the following places: Test 7.5, Testing the air and oxygen inlet mixer valves for leakage, on page 11-57 Test 5.5, Testing the air and oxygen inlet mixer valves for leakage, on page 12-46. • Functionality of new nurse alarm call relay added to Section 6.3, Special port, on page 6-4. • Additional information about oxygen cell added to Section 5.3.3, Further information, on page 5-16. • Change made to Test 6.5, Testing the Pvent autozero valve, on page 12-53. (There appears to be no parallel in the software version 1 test software.) • Section 8: Voltage tests completely updated and then reworked to become Section 9, Backup battery and voltage tests. • Manual was broken into 4 separate parts. (The main object of this was to make the maintenance and testing much clearer.)

Revision 04

RAPHAEL Service Manual, Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests. February 2005. The following list details some of the improvements made to this revision of the service manual. • Section 13, Running version 3.* test software added. • Section I, Automated electrical safety tests added. • Section 8.2.1.3, Special maintenance of the self-emptying water trap added. • RAPHAEL version 3.* test software report added at back of manual. • The following small specific changes were made: • All references to replacing the alarm ASIC removed from all three test software sections. (ASICs are soldered on later boards, and we do not keep any in stock, anyway.) • Short explanatory introductions were written for all tests requiring them. However, these were only added to the version 3.* test software section. • Figure 4-1, Details of the standard water trap (with air connector), on page 4-2 - gas flow details corrected. • Figure 4-2, Details of the self-emptying water trap (only available for air), on page 4-3 - gas flow details corrected. • Test 6.5, Testing the Pvent autozero valve, on page 12-53: Pvent tolerance changed to ±10. • Test 6.5, Testing the Pvent autozero valve, on page 13-56: Pvent tolerance changed to ±10. • Test 3.3, Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time, on page 11-18, step (5) moved to step (2). This does not change the test materially, but avoids the possibility of a mistake. • Test 3.3, Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time, on page 12-23, step (5) moved to step (2). This does not change the test materially, but avoids the possibility of a mistake. • Test 3.3, Testing the backup buzzer and the alarm silence time, on page 13-26, step (5) moved to step (2). This does not change the test materially, but avoids the possibility of a mistake.

Revision 05

RAPHAEL Service Manual, Including Maintenance, Repairs and Tests. June 2006. The following list details some of the improvements made to this revision of the service manual. • General: “Allen key” changed to “hexagonal (Allen) key”. • Section 3.3.2.3, Gas flow through mixer valves, on page 3-6, warning not to exchange nebulizer and mixer valves. • Section 3.4.2.2, Gas flow to nebulizer, on page 3-11, warning not to exchange nebulizer and mixer valves. • Section 5.2.4, dc/ac board, on page 5-12, new XTC board added. • Section 9.3.2, Procedure, on page 9-6, note added not to use middle pin on three-pin test connector. • Test 8.4, Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve, on page 11-62, new sub-headings added. • Test 7.4, Checking and adjusting dPptm gain, on page 12-58, new values added. • Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265, on page 12-77, new step (1) added. • Test 8.5 Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373, on page 12-81, introductory words, “offset” added. Also additional sub-headings added. • Test 17.3.2 Method, on page 12-119, section reworked to add information about how s must create a file first, if they are to be able to the whole of the logfile. • Section 13.1, Introduction, on page 13-1, details of new software numbers added. • Test 7.4, Checking and adjusting dPptm gain, on page 13-61, new values added. • Test 8.4, Testing/calibrating exp. valve with mainboard PN 157250 or 157265, on page 13-80, new step (1) added. • Test 8.5 Testing and calibrating the expiratory valve with mainboard PN 157373, on page 13-84, introductory words, “offset” added. Also additional sub-headings added. • Section 14.4, Troubleshooting technical fault alarms, on page 14-5, information about defective on/off switch added to technical fault #1; technical fault 1, alarm codes 99 to 2000 added; action added to technical fault 8-28; technical fault 13-99 to 2000 added. • Section 15.7.8, Removing, dismantling and replacing the display on a RAPHAEL XTC, on page 15-41: this sub-section added in entirety, and many associated minor changes made to Section 15.7, Replacing the display, on page 15-21. • Appendix C.15, Software versions 3.1, 3.1S, 3.1C, 3.1CU: section added. • Appendix C.16, Software versions 3.2CX, 3.2CXU: section added. • Appendix D, Upgrade routes and kits extensively updated. • Appendix F, Hardware revisions, features, and compatibility added.

PN 61067/05

HAMILTON MEDICAL AG Via Crusch 8 CH-7402 Bonaduz Switzerland Phone: (+41) 81 660 60 10 Fax: (+41) 81 660 60 20 International Web Site: www.hamilton-medical.com USA Web Site: www.hammed1.com Partner Web Site: www.hamilton-medical.com/partner-site Intelligent Ventilation Website: www.IntelligentVentilation.org

Hamilton Medical-raphael Manual De Servicio 6y524w

Overview 26281t

More details 6y5l6z

Related Documents 3h463d

Hamilton Medical-raphael Manual De Servicio 6y524w

Xtz125 Manual De Servicio j5y1a

Ax4 Manual De Servicio 83ar

Manual De Servicio Liberty 143n4g

Manual De Servicio A.a. 6bu55

Manual De Servicio Rheem 85252

More Documents from "Maria Alejandra" 5b172c

4p345f

Hamilton Medical-raphael Manual De Servicio 6y524w

Viscosimetro De Cilindros Coaxiales 6e4q2b

4p345f

4p345f

Caso Trail Smelter.docx 86x3f